Vatican insiders reveal that Pope Francis is considering attending the upcoming COP28 climate conference in Dubai, set to commence next month. This historic move would mark the first time a Pope has participated in a United Nations climate change conference since their inception in 1995.
Cardinal Pietro Parolin, the Vatican’s Secretary of State, expressed Pope Francis’ desire to travel to Dubai during a recent Catholic-Jewish event in Rome, stating that a final decision had yet to be made. According to other Vatican sources, the likelihood of the Pope’s attendance at the event, scheduled from November 30 to December 12, stands at a substantial 90 percent.
Typically, heads of state attend the opening sessions of such conferences, delivering keynote speeches. For instance, U.S. President Joe Biden addressed the commencement of the previous two conferences held in Sharm el-Sheikh, Egypt, in the previous year and Glasgow, Scotland, in 2021. These conferences also provide opportunities for bilateral meetings between world leaders.
Pope Francis, at 86 years old, has prioritized environmental protection throughout his papacy. Recently, he held a meeting with Sultan al-Jaber, the President of COP28. In a significant statement on October 4, Pope Francis appealed to climate change skeptics and hesitant politicians, urging them to recognize the human impact on climate change and the importance of scientific evidence. He emphasized that the planet may be on the brink of a crisis. This document, referred to as an Apostolic Exhortation and titled “Laudate Deum” (Praise God), serves as a follow-up to Pope Francis’ 2015 environmental encyclical, “Laudato Si” (Praise Be). It was spurred by the occurrence of recent extreme weather events and mentioned the challenges that COP28 faces on multiple occasions.
The document also warns that failure at the Dubai conference would be a grave disappointment and would jeopardize the progress made thus far. Despite mobility challenges due to a knee ailment, Pope Francis has maintained an active schedule. In September, he undertook trips to Mongolia and the French city of Marseilles.
There is a strong possibility that Pope Francis will attend the COP28 climate conference in Dubai next month, signaling a significant moment in the history of United Nations climate change conferences. The Pope’s commitment to addressing climate change and his willingness to participate in this event underscore the urgency of the global environmental crisis.
Microsoft’s CEO, Satya Nadella, recently delivered a compelling vision of the company’s future at the Envision Tour in London, emphasizing that artificial intelligence (AI) will play a central role and drive a new tech revolution. This bold stance, however, raises concerns about whether Microsoft’s intense focus on AI could potentially overshadow its other successful ventures.
At this event, which primarily caters to enterprise audiences, one standout star was Copilot, Microsoft’s AI assistant that has been making waves on Windows 11 PCs worldwide. While the widespread adoption of Copilot exceeded Microsoft’s expectations, it’s important to note that this AI assistant comes in various forms, integrated into select Microsoft products.
The discussions at Envision shed light on how Copilot is transforming the way Microsoft 365 customers work, with an intriguing session on its integration into GitHub, the open-source code repository that Microsoft acquired a few years ago. Copilot significantly accelerates software development processes. Microsoft is adamant that AI should be viewed as a tool used by humans rather than a replacement for them. Nevertheless, concerns persist that despite Microsoft’s optimism about how Copilot can enhance our lives, there’s the fear that AI might eventually replace human jobs.
Nadella addressed this concern during his keynote, asserting that AI, particularly Copilot, isn’t a threat to employment but an opportunity. He highlighted the potential of AI, particularly in the realm of security, where there’s a shortage of professionals. He argued that AI can facilitate on-the-job training, making job opportunities more accessible to a broader range of individuals. While this is an ambitious idea, the practicality of companies hiring unqualified individuals for significant roles while relying on AI to fill the gaps remains in question. However, Nadella presented a more convincing argument regarding the value of adding AI-related skills to one’s resume, which is a feasible and beneficial step for nearly anyone.
Nadella’s faith in AI hinges on the accessibility of this technology to people worldwide. He envisions a world where every individual has access to a personalized tutor and a virtual doctor in their pocket, transforming their agency and empowerment. His conviction in the profound role AI will play in Microsoft’s future is evident, as he believes we’re on the brink of a monumental revolution.
He drew a parallel between the current AI era and the transformative impact of personal computing, particularly Windows, in the workplace, emphasizing the revolutionary shift in workflow brought about by email, word processing, and spreadsheets.
While Nadella’s enthusiasm for AI is contagious, the assertion that AI is “bigger than the PC, bigger than mobile” is debatable. Despite Microsoft’s AI endeavors, Google and other tech giants continue to dominate certain sectors. However, Microsoft’s Copilot feature in Windows 11 has shown promise, even though it’s in its early stages (still in preview, with a full release forthcoming).
There is a perceptible shift in Microsoft’s vision of itself and its target audience. It appears to be increasingly focused on enterprise users, a shift that extends beyond events like Envision, which were traditionally enterprise-focused. This shift is exemplified by Microsoft’s recent Surface product launches.
Previously, Surface devices were aspirational products aimed at consumers, challenging Apple’s premium offerings. However, the recent Surface lineup consists of iterative, less innovative upgrades. This shift in focus raises concerns that Microsoft is becoming less interested in the consumer market.
The push into AI, while important for Microsoft for various reasons, also raises questions about its commitment to enhancing the lives of consumers, particularly through its Surface devices. These devices could have been the ideal platforms to showcase how AI can improve daily life, but Microsoft’s waning interest in them is apparent.
Despite these concerns, it’s difficult not to be swept up by Nadella’s passion for AI and his unwavering belief in its potential. His statement that “AI is only real to me if it can make a real difference” underscores the importance of AI’s practical applications in real life. While the road ahead may have challenges and uncertainties, Microsoft’s bold AI journey is poised to shape the company’s future and the tech landscape at large.
Summarizing what ITServe Alliance is and its remarkable growth, achievements, and contributions to the economy and to the nation, Vinay K. Mahajan, National President of ITServe Alliance put it this way: “We have more than 2,200 member companies, spread over 21Chapters, they generate 175,000 high paying jobs across the United States. Our members contribute almost $12 billion to the US GDP. We at ITServe Alliance are immensely proud of us that we are very successful. We are the voice for and are fighting for causes on behalf of the small and medium scale enterprises of IT industry, protecting our members’ interests. We give back to the community, and invest in startups, which is to help the United States maintain the leadership in innovation and technology.”
Synergy 2023, the annual flagship conference by ITServe Alliance, planned to be held from October 26th to 27th, 2023 at the popular Harrah’s Resort in Atlantic City, New Jersey is a way of celebrating the success story of the 2,200+ ITServe member companies in the United States, who have achieved great success and are eager to share their expertise, skills, resources and knowledge, and be role models for others to emulate.
Under the banner “Come, Learn, and Grow,” a dedicated team under the able leadership of Venu Sangani has been working earnestly to elevate Synergy 2023’s brand and position it as the leading IT Staffing Conference in America.
Venu Sangani, Director of Synergy 2023 says, “Beyond being an arena for networking and knowledge sharing, Synergy 2023 aims to be a veritable marketplace for ideas and innovations. The event is curated to provide actionable insights and strategies that companies can directly implement, serving as a catalyst for taking your business to the next level.”
According to Vinodbabu Uppu, Chair of Board of Directors of ITServe, “Synergy 2023 is the only one-of-a-kind conference delivering innovative strategies, unique insights, and proven tactics for success, exclusively for IT service companies and individuals. Synergy 2023 will focus on developing strategic relationships with our partner organizations, sponsors, and supporters to work for a better technology environment by building greater understanding.”
Designed to cater to the specific needs of ITServe members, primarily tech entrepreneurs, Synergy 2023 will host a plethora of crucial panel discussions. Topics will span from Immigration to CIO/CTO issues, Mergers and Acquisitions, Financial Planning, and Political Action Committees, among others. Barbara Bruno will lead an educational session on “Mastering Effective Recruiting in Staffing,” while other sessions will focus on Contracts, Legal Compliance, and Federal Contracting.
“Synergy continues to add prominent speakers, and valuable sponsorships, and help grow a community network of industry professionals across the country,” said Amar Varada, Chair of Synergy 2023. “Participants at Synergy 2023 will have a platform for IT company heads to come together to hear industry leaders speak, engage in discussions with lawmakers, participate in interactive breakout sessions, deliberate on the latest trends, challenges, and opportunities in the world of IT Staffing and Technology.”
Anil Atyam, Chair of Speakers for Synergy 2023 emphasized the curated lineup of speakers and panels. “We are thrilled to have a diverse and esteemed set of speakers for this year’s conference. From policymakers, and technology leaders to industry innovators, our speakers are pivotal in shaping the discussions and providing invaluable insights that can be immediately applied in various sectors of the IT industry. The selection process has been meticulous, ensuring that each session offers a blend of expertise, vision, and actionable advice for our members. The goal is to create a transformative experience for our attendees.”
On the opening day of the much-anticipated Synergy 2023, Steve Forbes, Chairman and Editor-in-Chief, Forbes Media will deliver keynote address on “Leadership Lessons: The Stunning Parallels between Great Leaders of the World and Today’s Top Business Leaders.” This will be followed by a keynote address on, “Strategies for Scaling and Sustaining a Successful IT Company from One to 100 Million Plus” by Phaneesh Murthy, Founder & CEO of Primentor. The keynote address by Zack Kass, Technology Futurist, and Generative AI Solutions Specialist will focus on: “AI for Small Business Success: Navigating the Future of Entrepreneurship.”
Ashish Agarwal from Turbo Start, DVC will lead the Startup Cube Panel on “GTM Pitfalls Faced by Growing Startups.” Post Lunch, a Financial Panel Discussion will explore “Alternative Investments for Diversified Business Portfolios and Funding Solutions for Diversified Growth.” The Breakout Session in the Afternoon will be on: “Mastering the Art of Effective Recruiting in the Staffing Industry” by Barbara Bruno.
“State, County, City, High-Ed & Federal Government Contracting: Opportunities & Challenges” will be yet another important topic at the Breakout Session in the afternoon and will be led by Nazeera Dawood, CEO of Vendorship.net. The M & A Panel Discussion will deliberate on, “Driving Growth and Value Through Strategic M&A: Opportunities and Challenges: Accelerating Business Expansion.”
Another important Breakout Session on the first day will be on, “Increase Cash Flow $$$ and Collect Bad Debt,” which will be led by Douglas Fuchs at Goldman, Evans & Trammell LLC. Kevin O’Leary, a Venture Capitalist, Star of ABC’s Shark Tank will deliver the Evening keynote address on: “The Path to Profit: Strategies for Building a Successful Business.”
The morning of October 27th will begin with the keynote address on “Navigating the Financial Crises and Regulatory Landscape: Lessons Learned and Insights for IT Staffing Company Owners” by Sheila Bair, Former FDIC Chair.
Other sessions in the morning include a Startup Cube Finals on GTM Pitfalls Faced by Growing Startups, which will be led by Ashish Agarwal, Turbo Start, DVC. The Immigration Panel Discussion will focus on “Navigating Immigration Challenges and Policies.” The CXO Panel’s focus will be “The Evolving Role of IOs and CTOs in AI and ChatGPT Powered Digital Transformation.” Other panel discussions will address issues related to “Contracts And Litigations,” and “Direct Client Engagement in the World of Contingent Workforce.”
Secretary of State Hillary Rodham Clinton, the Chief Guest at Synergy 2023 will deliver the Keynote address during an interactive session with ITServe members on October 27th evening. Ms. Clinton, the 67th Secretary of State of the United States has dedicated over four decades in public service as an advocate, attorney, First Lady, and US Senator.
A Special Guest Session at Synergy will be a “Dialogue with Yuvraj Singh,” a highly popular international Cricketer, Entrepreneur, and Philanthropist. Synergy 2023 will conclude with a Live Musical Concert by Bollywood Playback Singer and Filmfare Awardee Kanika Kapoor.
During Synergy 2023, ITServe will honor high achieving Entrepreneurs with Leadership Awards. “Join us in celebrating the remarkable achievements of our Members,” said Venu Sangani, Synergy Director for 2023. “ITServe Alliance proudly recognizes and honors companies that have demonstrated exceptional growth and success during a specific period. The ITServe Fastest Growing Company Awards are a testament to the impact of businesses that embrace innovation and strive for excellence.”
The ITServe Fastest Growing Companies Award is a prestigious recognition that celebrates outstanding performance and remarkable growth in three categories: Small, Medium, and Large. Applicants are being evaluated based on their revenue growth over a three-year period to be chosen for these prestigious awards.
Founded in 2010, ITServe Alliance is the largest association of Information Technology Services organizations functioning across the United States. Established to be the voice of all prestigious Information Technology companies functioning with similar interests across the United States, ITServe Alliance has evolved as a resourceful and respected platform to collaborate and initiate measures in the direction of protecting common interests and ensuring collective success. ITServe Alliance now has 21 Chapters in several states across the United States, bringing the Synergy Conference to every part of this innovation country. For more information, please visit: www.itserve.org
On October 7th, Israel experienced a shockingly unexpected attack, reminiscent of the 1973 October War, which brought the nation to the brink 50 years ago. This recent assault by Hamas from the Gaza Strip, occurring on a holiday morning and taking Israel off guard, draws parallels with historical conflicts that reshaped their respective landscapes. Similar to the Tet Offensive during the Vietnam War, the Hamas attack demonstrated unforeseen capacities, briefly overwhelming a superior military, and prompting a reevaluation of the conflict’s nature.
The prevailing assumption in Israel that the Palestinian conflict could be “managed” rather than resolved is now in question. Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu discarded this notion, declaring that the country was “at war,” not engaged in a mere operation or round of conflict. This shift in perspective has far-reaching implications, not only for Israel but also for global political and military leaders who must reconsider the potential outcomes of this conflict.
This attack has cast doubt on a potential peace deal between Israel and Saudi Arabia that hinged on the presumed acceptance of the status quo by the occupied Palestinians. It also challenges America’s longstanding hope to shift its focus away from the Middle East and rekindles the competition between global powers in the region. Once again, Israel and the Palestinians become pivotal players in the near future of geopolitics.
Israel had grown accustomed to brief, one-sided battles with Gaza militants, often fought using drones or fighter jets. Israeli officials even humorously referred to these encounters as “cutting the grass.” This routine became a stark military aspect of “managing the conflict,” a strategy that has dominated for decades. It operates on the assumption that there is no political solution to the contest for land between Jewish Israelis and Palestinians, both of whom lay claim to the same territory.
In the West Bank, home to 3 million Palestinians and around 500,000 Jewish settlers, much of the management falls under the purview of a robust internal security apparatus overseen by Palestinian National Authority President Mahmoud Abbas, also known as Abu Mazen. Abbas wagered that quelling violent resistance, including from Hamas, a rival to his Fatah party, would lead to negotiations resulting in a Palestinian state. However, this bet has not paid off.
TOPSHOT – Palestinians run for cover from tear gas during clashes with Israeli security forces near the border between Israel and the Gaza Strip, east of Jabalia on May 14, 2018, as Palestinians protest over the inauguration of the US embassy following its controversial move to Jerusalem. (Photo by MOHAMMED ABED / AFP) (Photo credit should read MOHAMMED ABED/AFP via Getty Images)
Unlike the West Bank, the Gaza Strip, housing 2.2 million Palestinians, saw the departure of Jewish settlers and the Israeli military in 2005. Since then, it has been governed by Hamas, or the Islamic Resistance Movement, and sealed off by Israel. While Israel exerts control over Gaza’s power supply, telephone systems, and much of its economy, managing it has proven more challenging. Poverty is widespread, and the young population has limited options for leaving. Israeli security relied heavily on fences and walls, which Hamas guerrillas tunneled under in 2014 and demolished on October 7th, using paragliders.
The events that followed have left a deep impact on Israelis, who, in addition to possessing the region’s most powerful military, carry a reservoir of trauma. In the chaotic hours of that Sabbath morning, everything was overwhelmed: the Israel Defense Force, the Iron Dome missile defense system, and the sense of security that had led hundreds of young people to an overnight rave in the desert where the paragliders landed and opened fire. Some of these terrified revelers became among the approximately 100 hostages, including Israelis and foreign citizens, taken into Gaza.
The abduction of individuals, including the bodies of soldiers, has been a recurring tactic in the asymmetrical warfare faced by Israel. It provides bargaining leverage following hit-and-run operations. These actions, along with civilian casualties, ensure sympathy for Israel and afford it latitude in its responses. Prime Minister Netanyahu vowed to turn parts of Gaza “to rubble,” but doing so while dozens of Israeli hostages are in harm’s way presents a complex challenge.
The surprise attack by Hamas on Israel has shattered assumptions about managing the Israeli-Palestinian conflict. It has led to a shift in perspective from “management” to being officially “at war.” This development has far-reaching implications, influencing not only the regional dynamics but also global politics. The events that unfolded on that fateful day have left deep scars on the collective psyche of Israelis, and the situation remains fluid, with complex challenges ahead.
GOP Rep. Jim Jordan of Ohio failed in his second attempt to become speaker of the House, again falling short of the 217 votes needed to be elected and casting doubt about the way forward in the still-leaderless lower chamber.
Jordan won just 199 votes in the House on Wednesday morning, with 22 Republicans withholding their support and voting for a variety of protest candidates. All 212 Democrats voted for Rep. Hakeem Jeffries, the party’s leader in the House.
Jordan’s total was one fewer than the 200 he secured on the first ballot on Tuesday, a sign that he has struggled to make any inroads among the GOP holdouts. Four Republicans who voted for him on Tuesday defected in the latest vote, while he picked up support from two others. One member who was absent for the first ballot also supported Jordan in this round.
Republican Lawmakers rejected Rep. Jim Jordan for House speaker on a first ballot Tuesday, October 17th, as an unexpectedly numerous 20 holdouts denied the hard-charging ally of Donald Trump the GOP majority needed to seize the gavel.
Additional voting was postponed as the House hit a standstill, stuck while Jordan works to shore up support from Republican colleagues to replace the ousted Kevin McCarthy for the job. Reluctant Republicans are refusing to give Jordan their votes, viewing the Ohio congressman as too extreme for the powerful position of House speaker, second in line to the presidency. Next votes were expected Wednesday.
“We’re going to keep working,” Jordan said at the Capitol as evening fell. It’s been two weeks of angry Republican infighting since McCarthy’s sudden removal by hard-liners, who are now within reach of a central seat of U.S. power. The vote for House speaker, once a formality in Congress, has devolved into another bitter showdown for the gavel.
Picture: The Hill
Jordan (R-Ohio) secured 200 of the necessary 217 votes, while Minority Leader Hakeem Jeffries (D-N.Y.) got the full backing of Democratic members, with 212 votes. Jordan had gained some major momentum, picking up endorsements from key players who had initially said they would not vote for him. But during Tuesday’s midday vote, 20 Republicans cast votes for other members.
Jordan’s loss of 20 GOP votes – one more than former House Speaker Kevin McCarthy (R-Calif.) in his first of 15 votes to secure the gavel – has left the GOP even more uncertain when it can reach consensus over who should lead the party. A second planned vote was abruptly postponed from Tuesday evening to Wednesday.
Many in the party are rallying behind efforts that would give McHenry more power to act as a temporary Speaker, expanding a role otherwise appears to be largely dedicated to organizing the process of electing a new speaker.
Rep. Carlos Giménez (R-Fla.) – who has pledged to continue to vote for McCarthy for speaker – told reporters Tuesday that moves to further empower McHenry have gained momentum – “as they should.”
The political climb has been steep for Jordan, the combative Judiciary Committee chairman and a founding member of the right-flank Freedom Caucus. He is known more as a chaos agent than a skilled legislator, raising questions about how he would lead. Congress faces daunting challenges, risking a federal shutdown at home if it fails to fund the government and fielding Biden’s requests for aid to help Ukraine and Israel in the wars abroad.
With the House Republican majority narrowly held at 221-212, Jordan can afford to lose only a few votes to reach the 217 majority threshold, if there are no further absences.
Jordan conferred immediately afterward with McCarthy, who fared nearly as badly in January, having lost almost as many votes on the first of what would become a historic 15 ballots for the gavel.
In the complex realm of international diplomacy, India’s quest for a permanent seat on the U.N. Security Council and China’s persistent efforts to thwart it are deeply rooted in their ancient histories. As two of the world’s oldest continuous civilizations, their interactions are colored by centuries of mutual distrust, and their intentions are continually scrutinized.
Drawing inspiration from legendary grandmasters of statecraft, both nations have honed their strategies to navigate this complex geopolitical landscape. The enduring philosophies of India’s Chanakya and China’s Sun Tzu, even though they lived over two millennia ago, continue to shape their approach to international relations.
For India, the G4, a coalition formed in 2004 with fellow Security Council aspirants Japan, Germany, and Brazil, symbolizes a collaborative alliance of like-minded nations. In contrast, China perceives the G4 as a challenge to its established influence as one of the Security Council’s five permanent, veto-wielding members, alongside the U.S., the U.K., France, and Russia.
These differing interpretations of the G4’s significance reflect the lessons drawn from their respective grandmasters. India’s adherence to Chanakya’s wisdom that “There is no friendship without self-interest” underlines its approach, while China draws on Sun Tzu’s advice that “Battles are lost when adequate calculations are not made in advance.”
Despite its growing global influence, India recognizes that securing a permanent seat on the U.N. Security Council requires the collective consent of all five current permanent members, including China. New Delhi has garnered support from all members except China. Beijing has adopted a shrewd strategy, indicating that it would support India’s bid only if it disengages from Japan.
China’s approach aligns with Sun Tzu’s famous dictum, “All warfare is based on deception.” The reality is that China is uneasy about India’s ascendance on the world stage. To counter this, China has been fostering a close relationship with Pakistan, using territorial disputes and territorial claims on Indian lands to exert pressure and maintain an edge. This mirrors Sun Tzu’s principle: “The best strategy is to break the enemy’s resistance without fighting.”
India, in response, has adopted a foreign policy stance of “strategic autonomy.” Following Chanakya’s counsel to “Attack and destroy your fear, as soon as it approaches,” New Delhi’s strategy involves confronting China where it is vulnerable before entering negotiations.
In recent years, India has positioned itself as a viable alternative to China for multinational manufacturers and has become integrated into U.S. strategic plans for the Asia-Pacific region. This strategic move has been so successful that the U.S. now refers to the region as the Indo-Pacific, demonstrating India’s influence. India’s commitment to building goodwill, particularly among Global South nations, is consistent with Chanakya’s advice that “A person’s goodness spreads in all directions.”
New Delhi’s diplomatic achievements, such as garnering support for the African Union to join the global body and facilitating consensus on important issues, underscore its readiness for a permanent Security Council seat. If the U.N. General Assembly voted today, India would likely secure the necessary two-thirds support due to its effective positioning as a spokesperson for the developing world.
Nonetheless, India must further advance its strategy to isolate China and question why it is pursuing this goal, as Chanakya advised. India needs to build consensus directly, refuting China’s claim of a lack of agreement regarding its accession. This could potentially place China “outside the global consensus,” a position Beijing strives to avoid.
In their diplomatic jockeying, Chinese President Xi Jinping’s absence from the G20 summit in New Delhi aimed to diminish India’s influence. Surprisingly, his non-participation did not sway other leaders’ decisions to attend. China is undoubtedly devising a response to rectify past missteps in its efforts to contain India.
In this process, India can draw inspiration from Sun Tzu’s wisdom: “If you know your enemy and know yourself, you don’t have to fear the result of a hundred battles.” Understanding China’s tactics and its own strengths is crucial for India as it navigates the intricate world of international diplomacy.
A recent survey conducted by the Pew Research Center has shed light on the religious landscape within the Asian American community, with a particular focus on Hinduism. The findings provide insights into the faith and cultural connections of this demographic.
Approximately half of Asian American adults who self-identify as Indian continue to practice Hinduism, with 48 percent of respondents aligning themselves with this ancient religion. This statistic remains relatively stable compared to 2012 when it stood at 51 percent.
The survey also discovered that about one in ten Asian Americans now regard Hinduism as their religious affiliation, with 11 percent of respondents identifying as Hindus. This number has shown little change since 2012 when it was reported at 10 percent.
Furthermore, the survey revealed that 6 percent of all Asian Americans express a strong sense of closeness to Hinduism, often due to factors like ancestral or cultural ties. In total, two-thirds of Indian Americans either identify as Hindu or have a profound affinity for Hinduism.
Of those Asian American Hindus surveyed, one-third emphasized the importance of religion in their lives, while an additional 38 percent considered it to be somewhat important. The survey highlighted that approximately 31 percent of these individuals attend religious services monthly or even more frequently.
Hindus emerge as the group with the highest proportion among Asian American religious communities who incorporate altars, shrines, or religious symbols in their homes for worship, with a remarkable 79 percent adopting these practices. Among Hindus who place a high priority on religion in their lives, this figure rises to 89 percent.
Notably, approximately 92 percent of Asian American Hindu adults were born outside of the United States, representing the highest proportion of foreign-born individuals among Asian American religious groups.
In contrast, among religiously unaffiliated Asian Americans who feel a cultural closeness to Hinduism, a significantly higher percentage are born in the United States (35 percent) compared to those who explicitly identify as Hindus (8 percent).
When examining the socioeconomic status of Asian American Hindus, it becomes evident that this group exhibits remarkable achievements. A substantial 61 percent of them hold postgraduate degrees, in stark contrast to the 22 percent figure among all Asian American adults. Moreover, 44 percent of Asian American Hindus report a family income exceeding $150,000, which surpasses the 32 percent figure for Asian Americans as a whole.
The recent Pew Research Center survey has not only confirmed the resilience of Hinduism among Asian American adults who self-identify as Indian but has also highlighted the diversity within this community. While some strongly identify as Hindus and actively practice the religion, others feel a cultural or ancestral connection to Hinduism. The data also reveals that Asian American Hindus, as a group, have achieved remarkable success in terms of education and income, further enriching the complex tapestry of the Asian American experience.
India’s top court declined to legalize same-sex marriages in a historic ruling delivered on October 17, 2023. This ruling affects what is now the world’s most populous country. And same-sex marriages are not legal there at this time.
The marriage ruling will be a disappointment for LGBTQ+ people in India, who had hoped the supreme court judges would recognise their constitutional right to marriage equality.
In a sign of how contentious the issue remains in India, the five-judge bench of the supreme court, led by the chief justice of India, said they had been divided on the matter, and four separate judgments were written by the bench. Two of the judges had supported same-sex civil unions but the majority verdict ruled against them.
Rohin Bhatt, one of the lawyers in the case, said: “Today the court has reaffirmed that queer citizens will be relegated to an unsympathetic legislature and an apathetic executive. We are second-class citizens, no matter how many judicial platitudes say otherwise. We will rise in rage and protest.”
India’s Supreme Court delivered the judgment on petitions advocating for the legalization of same-sex marriage, and this decision has profound implications for the rights and recognition of LGBTQ+ individuals in the country.
Petitioners and Their Objectives
The court considered 21 petitions filed by same-sex couples, including those raising children together, LGBTQ+ activists, and organizations. The petitioners’ legal representatives argued that marriage is a union between two individuals, not restricted to a man and a woman. They asserted that laws should evolve to reflect changing concepts of marriage over time, with same-sex couples deserving the dignity and recognition of marriage.
Students and supporters of the Students’ Federation of India (SFI) shout slogans, hold placards and pride flags as they take part in an LGBT+ Pride vigil organised after India’s top court on Tuesday declined to legalise same-sex marriage and left it to parliament to decide, at North Campus in New Delhi, India, October 18, 2023. REUTERS/Anushree Fadnavis
The petitioners contended that the Indian constitution guarantees all citizens the right to marry a person of their choice and prohibits discrimination based on sexual orientation. They highlighted that the inability to marry deprives them of joint bank accounts, co-ownership of property, and the opportunity to adopt children together.
The petitioners argued that the prohibition on same-sex marriage infringes upon their constitutional rights and relegates them to “second-class citizens.” However, the government and religious leaders have staunchly opposed same-sex unions, contending that they run counter to Indian cultural norms.
In April and May during hearings, Chief Justice DY Chandrachud, leading the bench, described it as “a matter of seminal importance,” and these proceedings were “livestreamed in public interest.” The court reserved its order on May 12. Justice Chandrachud emphasized that they would not meddle with religious personal laws but would explore the possibility of amending a special law governing inter-caste and inter-faith marriages to include LGBTQ+ individuals.
This debate carries immense significance in a nation where tens of millions of LGBTQ+ people reside. While the Indian government reported their population at 2.5 million in 2012, global estimates suggest a much higher figure, possibly exceeding 135 million, or 10% of the entire population.
During the proceedings, the judges displayed empathy for the concerns of same-sex couples and pressed the government for its plans to address these issues.
Government’s Position
The government initially questioned the court’s authority to address this matter, arguing that it should be a decision for parliament. Solicitor General Tushar Mehta, representing the government, urged the court to dismiss the petitions, asserting that marriage could only occur between a heterosexual man and woman.
Government authorities also criticized the same-sex petitioners, characterizing them as “reflecting urban elitist views.” Remarkably, leaders from various religious denominations in India united in opposing same-sex unions, asserting that marriage should be reserved for procreation, not recreation.
Despite these strong objections from the government and religious leaders, the judges decided to hear the case. They clarified that they would not venture into religious personal laws but would explore the potential amendment of the Special Marriage Act (SMA) of 1954 to include LGBTQ+ individuals.
The Special Marriage Act: A Key Focus
In India, the majority of marriages occur under religious personal laws, such as the Muslim Marriage Act and the Hindu Marriage Act. However, these laws recognize marriages only between couples of the same religion or caste. Consequently, if a Hindu and a Muslim sought to marry, one of them had to convert to the other’s religion.
This approach posed a significant challenge to the concept of personal liberty, a right guaranteed by the Indian constitution. Consequently, after India gained independence, the government introduced the Special Marriage Act in 1954 to facilitate inter-faith or inter-caste marriages.
The Special Marriage Act effectively detached marriage from religion, affirming that individuals did not need to renounce their religion to marry. This was a major step forward for personal liberty. During the court proceedings, the petitioners proposed substituting “man” and “woman” with “spouse” in the Act as a means of achieving marriage equality.
However, it became evident as the hearings progressed that amending this single law might be insufficient since numerous other laws govern divorce, adoption, succession, maintenance, and related matters, many of which fall under the purview of religious personal laws.
In a 2020 Pew survey, 37% of respondents believed homosexuality should be accepted, a substantial increase from 15% in 2014 when the question was first posed in the country. In a June survey by Pew, 53% of Indian adults supported legalizing same-sex marriage, while 43% opposed it.
Nonetheless, conservative attitudes towards sex and sexuality persist in India, and LGBTQ+ individuals continue to face stigma and discrimination. Lawyer Mukul Rohatgi, representing the petitioners, argued that society sometimes requires a push to acknowledge LGBTQ+ individuals as equals under the constitution, and legalizing same-sex marriage could be that catalyst for acceptance.
Empathy from SC Justices
The Chief Justice of India, DY Chandrachud and the four other judges ruled that amending the special marriage act went beyond the scope of the court, amounting to “judicial lawmaking”, and was instead the job of the legislature.
In his ruling, Chandrachud emphasised that LGBTQ+ people should have the right to choose their partners and co-habit and should not face discrimination under the law.
“Choosing a life partner is an integral part of choosing one’s course of life. Some may regard this as the most important decision of their life,” he said. He instructed the government to form a high level committee to examine the concerns, rights and welfare entitlements of same-sex couples.
“Queerness is not urban elite. Homosexuality or queerness is not an urban concept or restricted to the upper classes of the society,” added Chandrachud. He had also expressed his support for LGBTQ+ couples being allowed to adopt, but was overruled by the majority of the bench.
One of the petitioners, Mario da Penha, said it was “a day to be disappointed, but not to lose hope. There’s been tremendous work that has gone into these petitions, and many hopes and dreams of the queer community attached to them — to lead lives that most other Indians take for granted. The fact that the dream could not come to fruition today is a disappointment for all of us.”
Dr. Sampat Shivangi, a physician, an influential Indian American community leader, and a veteran leader of the American Association of Physicians of Indian Origin (AAPI) was awarded the prestigious Lifetime Achievement Award during the 9th annual Gala and Awards ceremony organized by the Indo-American Press Club on Sunday, October 8th, 2023 at the Stamford Hilton, CT.
The award ceremony was part of the oth annual International Media Conference organized from October 7th to 9th, 2023 by the University, which brought together media personnel from around the world, who shared their insightful thoughts and expertise on various topics related to Media and Freedom of the Press.
In his response for being chosen for the award, Dr. Shivangi said, “I am truly honored to receive this prestigious award from IAPC award, which is a forum bringing together members of the ethnic media under one umbrella, providing education, and resources and work towards media freedom.”
A conservative lifelong member of the Republican Party, Dr. Shivangi is the founding member of the Republican Indian Council and the Republican Indian National Council. Dr. Shivangi is the National President of Indian American Forum for Political Education, one of the oldest Indian American Associations. Over the past three decades, he has lobbied for several Bills in the US Congress on behalf of India through his enormous contacts with US Senators and Congressmen.
A close friend to the Bush family, he was instrumental in lobbying for the first Diwali celebration in the White House and for President George W. Bush to make his trip to India. He had accompanied President Bill Clinton during his historic visit to India. Dr. Shivangi is Dr. Shivangi has worked enthusiastically in promoting India Civil Nuclear Treaty and recently the US India Defense Treaty that was passed in US Congress and signed by President Obama.
Dr. Shivangi has actively involved in several philanthropic activities, serving with Blind foundation of MS, Diabetic, Cancer and Heart Associations of America. Dr. Shivangi has number of philanthropic work in India including Primary & middle schools, Cultural Center, IMA Centers that he opened and helped to obtains the first ever US Congressional grant to AAPI to study Diabetes Mellitus amongst Indian Americans.
Dr. Sampat Shivangi was awarded the highest civilian honor, the Pravasi Bharatiya Diwas Sanman award in 2016 in Bengaluru by the Hon. President of India, Shri Pranap Mukhejee. He was awarded the prestigious Ellis Island Medal of Honor in New York in 2008. He is married to Dr. Udaya S. Shivangi, MD, and the couple are blessed with two daughters: Priya S. Shivangi, MS (NYU); Pooja S. Shivangi who is an Attorney at Law.
Others who were bestowed with Lifetime Achievement Awards during the Gala included;
• Padma Shri H.R. SHAH (Media & Arts), Chairman & CEO of TV Asia Group.
• MEERA GANDHI (Philanthropist). She is the founder of the Giving Back Foundation and a recipient of the Ellis Island Medal of Honor (2015).
• SHAJAN SKARIAH (Excellence in Journalism). He is a promoter and editor of the online portal “Marunadan Malayali”.
• RENU ABRAHAM VARUGHESE (Excellence in Elder Care). She is an Associate Professor at the School of Health and Natural Sciences, Mercy University, NY.
• VINAY MAHAJAN, President of ITServe Alliance, and the President & CEO of NAM Info Inc, a software services firm dealing in software consulting and ongoing software development projects.
IAPC was formed to unite the Indian diaspora media fraternity across North America under one umbrella to work together, support one another, and provide a unified voice in front of the mainstream media and the larger community. Every year IAPC hosts media conferences bringing together renowned journalists and media professionals from various countries around the world, and hosts workshops and seminars. For information regarding IAPC, please visit: www.indoamericanpressclub.org
Indian American teenager Gitanjali Rao was one of fifteen young women leaders recognized by First Lady Jill Biden for their outstanding efforts in driving positive change and shaping a brighter future in their respective communities throughout the United States.
The White House Gender Policy Council has carefully selected the participants for the “Girls Leading Change” event at the White House, a testament to the profound impact these young women are making within their communities and their unwavering commitment to fortifying the future of our nation.
First Lady Jill Biden expressed her deep honor in celebrating this remarkable group, remarking, “These young women are safeguarding and preserving our environment, crafting narratives that alter perspectives, and transforming their challenges into meaningful missions.”
At just 17 years old, Rao is currently a freshman at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. A budding scientist and inventor, she earned the title of “America’s Top Young Scientist” from Discovery Education/3M and was the recipient of the EPA Presidential Award for her groundbreaking lead contamination detection tool.
Rao delved into a project in the Department of Cell Biology at the University of Colorado Denver, where she harnessed cutting-edge genetic engineering techniques to create a colorimetry-based application and device for the treatment of prescription opioid addiction. Her initiative garnered global recognition as a world finalist in the Technovation Girl Challenge and received a Health Pillar award from the TCS Ignite Innovation challenge on a national level.
Additionally, Rao had the opportunity to share her innovative invention on TEDtalksNayibaat, the Indian version of the TED platform. Notably, she also serves as a board member for the Children’s Kindness Network, a non-profit organization dedicated to spreading an anti-bullying message and emphasizing the significance of kindness.
Among her many notable achievements, one stands out: her book, “Young Innovator’s Guide to STEM,” has been widely adopted as a STEM curriculum in schools around the globe.
Rao, who was named Time Magazine’s inaugural “Kid of the Year,” is deeply committed to not only continuing her journey as a scientist and inventor but also to expanding her STEM education initiative, which has already impacted over 80,000 students in elementary, middle, and high schools. In 2021, her dedication to making a difference was acknowledged when she received the title of “Young Activists Summit Laureate” from the United Nations in Geneva
In an alarming revelation, a nefarious blackmail scheme has emerged, employing instant loan applications to ensnare and disgrace individuals across India, as well as in various Asian, African, and Latin American nations. A heart-wrenching report has exposed the grave consequences of this perilous extortion racket, with at least 60 Indian citizens resorting to suicide after enduring relentless abuse and threats. The BBC’s undercover investigation has shone a light on those profiting from this deadly deception, which has proliferated in India and China.
Astha Sinhaa’s world was abruptly upended when her aunt, in a state of panic, urgently contacted her. “Don’t allow your mother to leave the house,” she implored. Still half-asleep, the 17-year-old was gripped with fear as she discovered her mother, Bhoomi Sinhaa, in the adjacent room, distraught and agitated.
Bhoomi, a vibrant and fearless Mumbai-based property lawyer, had, as a widowed single mother, earned respect for her dedication to her daughter. However, on this fateful day, she was reduced to a state of chaos.
Astha recalls, “She was breaking apart.” Bhoomi urgently began to provide her daughter with instructions on the whereabouts of important documents and contacts, a palpable desperation to exit the premises. Her aunt’s admonition resonated in Astha’s mind: “Don’t let her out of your sight, because she will end her life.”
Little did Astha know the extent of her mother’s torment, who had become a victim of a global scam that had ensnared individuals in at least 14 countries, wielding shame and extortion as its weapons.
The sinister modus operandi of this scam is uncompromising yet straightforward. Numerous apps promise rapid, hassle-free loans. While not all of them operate maliciously, many, once downloaded, surreptitiously harvest users’ contacts, photos, and identification documents, employing this sensitive data as leverage for future extortion.
When borrowers fail to meet repayment deadlines – and sometimes even when they do – these apps transmit user information to a call center. There, young agents in the gig economy, equipped with laptops and smartphones, are trained to relentlessly harass and demean individuals until they comply with demands for repayment.
By the end of 2021, Bhoomi had borrowed roughly 47,000 rupees ($565; £463) from several loan apps, expecting that her work-related expenses would soon be covered. While the funds arrived promptly, a substantial portion was deducted in fees. A week later, her expenses remained unpaid, compelling her to borrow from other apps, creating a spiraling debt that ultimately reached two million rupees ($24,000; £19,655).
Subsequently, the recovery agents commenced their relentless calls, which swiftly devolved into a barrage of insults and abuse directed at Bhoomi. Even after making payments, she was accused of dishonesty. The agents phoned her up to 200 times daily, asserting knowledge of her residence and even sending gruesome images as threats.
As the abuse escalated, Bhoomi’s tormentors threatened to expose her as a thief and a prostitute to all 486 contacts in her phone. When her daughter’s reputation became a target, Bhoomi found herself unable to sleep.
In a desperate attempt to repay her mounting debts, she borrowed from friends, family, and additional apps, eventually totaling 69 in all. Every night, she hoped the morning would never come. However, at 7:00 a.m., her phone would start buzzing relentlessly.
Although Bhoomi eventually managed to repay all the money, one app, in particular, Asan Loan, persisted in its harassment. Overwhelmed and emotionally drained, Bhoomi’s ability to concentrate at work waned, and panic attacks became a daily occurrence.
One day, a colleague showed her a disturbing image on his phone – a lewd, pornographic picture of herself. The photograph had been crudely manipulated, superimposing Bhoomi’s head onto another person’s body. However, it filled her with revulsion and humiliation. The image had been disseminated to every contact in her phone book by Asan Loan, pushing Bhoomi to contemplate suicide.
Disturbingly, this devastating scam has affected numerous lives across the world. However, in India alone, the BBC’s investigation has uncovered that at least 60 individuals have taken their own lives after enduring harassment from loan apps.
These victims, mostly in their 20s and 30s, include a firefighter, an award-winning musician, a young couple leaving behind their three- and five-year-old daughters, and even a grandfather and grandson who were both ensnared in the clutches of loan apps. Shockingly, four of the victims were teenagers.
Regrettably, many of the victims are too ashamed to discuss their ordeal, while the perpetrators, for the most part, remain anonymous and concealed. After a months-long search for an insider, the BBC managed to locate a former debt recovery agent who had worked for call centers associated with multiple loan apps.
This informant, referred to as Rohan (a pseudonym), was deeply troubled by the abuse he witnessed. He recounted customers’ tears and their threats of self-harm, admitting, “It would haunt me all night.” Eventually, Rohan agreed to assist the BBC in exposing the scam.
He successfully secured employment at two separate call centers, Majesty Legal Services and Callflex Corporation, and spent weeks covertly recording their activities. His recordings captured young agents mercilessly harassing clients, issuing threats and profanities. In one incident, a woman resorted to threats of violence. She accused a client of committing incest and, upon their disconnection, callously laughed.
Rohan managed to document over 100 instances of harassment and abuse, thus providing the first tangible evidence of this systemic extortion.
The most egregious instances of abuse occurred at Callflex Corporation, located just outside Delhi. At this call center, agents routinely employed obscene language to degrade and threaten clients. Notably, these agents were not acting independently but rather under the supervision and direction of call center managers, including one named Vishal Chaurasia.
Rohan succeeded in gaining Chaurasia’s trust and, alongside a journalist posing as an investor, arranged a meeting during which they pressured him to elucidate the intricacies of the scam.
Chaurasia revealed that when a customer acquires a loan, the app gains access to their contact list. Callflex Corporation is then contracted to recover the funds, resorting to relentless harassment if a client misses a payment, targeting both the client and their contacts. According to Chaurasia, the agents can say anything, as long as it secures repayment.
“The customer then pays because of the shame,” Chaurasia divulged. “You’ll find at least one person in his contact list who can destroy his life.”
The BBC approached Chaurasia for direct comment, but he declined to provide a statement. Regrettably, Callflex Corporation also failed to respond to the BBC’s outreach efforts.
One of the countless lives torn apart by this scam was that of Kirni Mounika, a 24-year-old civil servant. She was the pride of her family, the only student at her school to secure a government job, and a devoted sister to her three brothers.
Her father, a successful farmer, was ready to support her to do a masters in Australia. The Monday she took her own life, three years ago, she had hopped on her scooter to go to work as usual. “She was all smiles,” her father, Kirni Bhoopani, says. It was only when police reviewed Mounika’s phone and bank statements that they found out she had borrowed from 55 different loan apps. It started with a loan of 10,000 rupees ($120; £100) and spiralled to more than 30 times that. By the time she decided to kill herself, she had paid back more than 300,000 rupees ($3,600; £2,960).
Police reports indicate that Mounika’s ordeal involved incessant calls and vulgar messages from the loan apps, which had escalated to messaging her contacts.
Mounika’s room has now been transformed into a makeshift memorial. Her government ID card hangs near the door, and her mother’s wedding bag remains untouched. What pains her father most is that she never confided in him about her predicament. “We could have easily arranged the money,” he laments, wiping tears from his eyes. His anger is directed toward those responsible for his daughter’s suffering.
As he was accompanying his daughter’s body from the hospital, her phone rang, and he answered to a torrent of obscenities. “They told us she has to pay,” he recalls. “We told them she was dead.” He wondered who these heartless tormentors could be.
Hari, a former employee at a call center tasked with loan recovery for one of the apps Mounika had borrowed from, shares a grim perspective. While he claims not to have personally made abusive calls, he was part of the team responsible for initial, more polite interactions. Hari reveals that managers instructed staff to employ abuse and threats.
Agents routinely sent messages to victims’ contacts, portraying the victims as fraudsters and thieves. Hari emphasizes the importance of maintaining a reputation in front of one’s family, stating, “No one is going to spoil that reputation for the measly sum of 5,000 rupees.” Once a payment was secured, the system signaled “Success!” and they moved on to the next client.
When clients began to threaten self-harm, nobody took these threats seriously until the suicides began. Faced with this grim reality, the staff contacted their boss, Parshuram Takve, to inquire whether they should cease their relentless tactics.
Upon Takve’s appearance at the office, he was notably furious. “He said, ‘Do what you’re told and make recoveries,'” Hari recalls. And so they did.
A few months later, Mounika tragically took her own life. Takve, a ruthless figure, wasn’t the sole mastermind behind this operation. Occasionally, Hari notes, the software interface would inexplicably switch to Chinese.
Takve was married to a Chinese woman named Liang Tian Tian. Together, they established Jiyaliang, a loan recovery business located in Pune, where Hari was employed. In December 2020, Indian authorities arrested Takve and Liang while investigating harassment related to loan apps. However, they were released on bail a few months later.
By April 2022, they faced charges of extortion, intimidation, and abetment of suicide. By the year’s end, they were fugitives from justice.
Takve proved to be a formidable figure, but he did not operate in isolation. At times, the software interface switched to Chinese, suggesting a broader connection. Our investigation led us to a Chinese businessman named Li Xiang, who has little online presence. However, we identified a phone number associated with one of his employees and, posing as investors, arranged a meeting with Li.
During this meeting, Li boasted about his business ventures in India. He disclosed that his companies had been subject to police raids in 2021 in relation to loan apps’ harassment, leading to frozen bank accounts. Li explained that his companies run loan apps in India, Mexico, and Colombia, and he asserted himself as an industry leader in risk control and debt collection services in Southeast Asia. He further revealed plans to expand into Latin America and Africa, employing over 3,000 staff in Pakistan, Bangladesh, and India to provide “post-loan services.”
Li went on to detail his company’s debt recovery methods, explaining, “If you don’t repay, we may add you on WhatsApp, and on the third day, we will call and message you on WhatsApp at the same time, and call your contacts. Then, on the fourth day, if your contacts don’t pay, we have specific detailed procedures. We access his call records and capture a lot of his information. Basically, it’s like he’s naked in front of us.”
For Bhoomi Sinha, the relentless harassment, threats, and abuse were bearable, but the shame of being linked to that pornographic image shattered her. She describes the message as stripping her bare in front of the entire world, causing her to lose her self-respect, morality, and dignity in an instant.
This image was shared with lawyers, architects, government officials, elderly relatives, and friends of her parents – individuals who would never view her the same way again. She explains that it tainted her essence, leaving her with emotional scars akin to mending a broken glass with persistent cracks.
Her community of 40 years has ostracized her, and she reveals that she no longer has friends. However, her daughter’s unwavering support became a source of strength. Bhoomi resolved to fight back, filing a police report, changing her number, and instructing friends, family, and colleagues to ignore calls and messages.
Although her ordeal has been harrowing, Bhoomi found solace in her sisters, her boss, and an online community of others abused by loan apps. Above all, her daughter’s unwavering support has been her greatest source of strength.
The BBC presented these allegations to Asan Loan, Liang Tian Tian, and Parshuram Takve, but neither the company nor the couple responded. Li Xiang asserted that his companies adhere to local laws and regulations, denying any involvement in predatory loan apps and emphasizing their compliance with strict standards for loan recovery call centers. Majesty Legal Services denied the use of customers’ contacts for loan recovery and assured that their agents are instructed to avoid abusive or threatening calls, with violations resulting in dismissal.
Prime Minister Narendra Modi held a virtual meeting with Google’s CEO, Sundar Pichai, on Monday. During this interaction, PM Modi and Pichai discussed Google’s plans to contribute to the expansion of the electronics manufacturing ecosystem in India. The Prime Minister commended Google for its collaboration with Hewlett Packard (HP) to manufacture Chromebooks in India.
Additionally, PM Modi acknowledged Google’s “100 languages initiative” and expressed his support for making AI tools accessible in Indian languages. He encouraged Google to focus on developing AI tools that promote good governance, as stated by the Prime Minister’s Office (PMO).
Modi also extended a warm welcome to Google’s intention to establish its global fintech operations center in the Gujarat International Finance Tec-City (GIFT) located in Gandhinagar. During the meeting, Pichai informed the Prime Minister about Google’s plans to enhance financial inclusion in India by leveraging the capabilities of GPay and UPI. He emphasized Google’s commitment to contributing to India’s developmental trajectory.
Furthermore, PM Modi invited Google to participate in the upcoming Global Partnership on AI Summit, which is scheduled to be hosted by India in December 2023 in New Delhi.
Picture: TOI
Notably, earlier this year, Sundar Pichai had the opportunity to meet Prime Minister Modi during the Prime Minister’s official visit to the United States. At that time, Pichai had announced Google’s significant investment of $10 billion in India’s digitization fund and shared insights with the Prime Minister.
Pichai also highlighted Google’s plans to establish a global fintech operation center in GIFT City, Gujarat. He praised PM Modi’s visionary approach to Digital India, considering it a blueprint that other nations are eager to emulate.
The meeting between PM Modi and Sundar Pichai is not a first. The Google CEO had previously met with the Prime Minister during his visit to India in December the previous year. During this meeting, PM Modi expressed his delight in discussing innovation, technology, and related matters with Pichai, emphasizing the importance of global collaboration in leveraging technology for the betterment of humanity and sustainable development.
In a recent CNN poll conducted by SSRS, the public’s perception of the Republican Party and its congressional leaders has deteriorated, partly due to a leadership crisis in the House of Representatives. The poll reveals that Republican-aligned Americans are divided on how the GOP should govern, and even though many Americans are dissatisfied with both parties’ handling of the nation’s issues, they still express more confidence in the Republican Party’s leadership in Congress compared to President Joe Biden.
As of the poll, 54% of respondents have more confidence in Republicans in Congress to address major national issues, while 45% have more confidence in President Biden. This balance has remained unchanged since the summer.
Picture: CNN
The removal of Kevin McCarthy as House speaker, which occurred after the poll was conducted, received mixed reactions. Half of Americans approved of McCarthy’s removal, while 49% disapproved. McCarthy himself had a 46% unfavorable view, with 21% having a favorable opinion, and 33% expressing no opinion. Florida Rep. Matt Gaetz, who initiated the motion to remove McCarthy, had an unfavorable rating of 44%, a favorable rating of 14%, and 42% were unsure about him.
Opinions within the Republican camp were divided, with 49% of Republicans and Republican-leaning independents approving of McCarthy’s removal and 50% disapproving. Furthermore, there was little consensus on whether McCarthy’s removal was a good or bad thing for the party, with 30% considering it a positive development and 34% seeing it as detrimental.
These divisions within the Republican Party are reflected in the party’s presidential nomination contest. Among Republican-aligned voters who support former President Donald Trump, 56% approved of McCarthy’s ouster, compared to only 37% of those who didn’t support Trump in the primary.
This internal division is evident across multiple aspects of the Republican Party’s performance and its future direction. For instance, when asked about Republican leaders in Congress, 51% of Trump supporters approved of their work, compared to just 35% of other Republican-aligned voters. On the question of whether Republicans in Congress should compromise or stand firm on their beliefs, 52% of Trump backers favored standing firm, while 77% of other Republicans preferred working across the aisle.
Even on topics where there is agreement between the two factions, disparities exist. For example, Trump’s supporters are more likely to feel entirely unrepresented by the government, with 57% of Trump primary supporters believing they are not well represented in Washington, compared to 47% of other GOP-aligned voters.
Additionally, they are less likely to consider continued aid to Ukraine as important, with 45% of non-Trump Republican voters deeming it very or somewhat important, compared to 27% of Trump supporters. Trump supporters are also more optimistic about the government reaching an agreement to avoid a shutdown before the November 17 deadline, with 67% of Trump supporters viewing it as likely, as opposed to 57% of other Republicans.
In terms of the 2024 presidential nomination race, Trump has extended his lead, with 58% of Republicans and Republican-leaning voters supporting him. Other candidates, such as Florida Gov. Ron DeSantis, former South Carolina Gov. Nikki Haley, former Vice President Mike Pence, and tech entrepreneur Vivek Ramaswamy, garnered less support, each receiving 8% or less in the poll.
Despite these internal party dynamics, the overall public perception of the Republican Party is highly negative. Nearly three-quarters (74%) of respondents disapprove of the way the GOP’s congressional leaders are handling their roles, a notable increase from 67% in January. Furthermore, 52% of respondents have a negative impression of the Republican Party as a whole, an increase from 45% in December. Approval for GOP leadership in Congress has significantly dropped among Republicans and Republican-leaning independents, decreasing from 58% in January to 44% at the time of the poll.
The public’s expectations for positive changes resulting from the Republican majority in the House have also diminished. Only 18% of respondents believe there has been a positive effect on the federal budget, 23% on oversight of the Biden administration, 17% on immigration laws, and 16% on the level of cooperation within the federal government. These figures reflect a decrease in optimism since December.
However, the challenges facing the Republican Party have not improved public opinion of Democrats. Just 35% of respondents approve of the way Democratic leaders in Congress are handling their roles, down from 40% in January. Additionally, 50% of respondents have an unfavorable opinion of the Democratic Party, an increase from 44% in December.
The poll indicates widespread frustration with both political parties, with 58% expressing anger at both parties’ handling of the nation’s problems. Another 15% are only angry at Republicans, and 13% are only angry at Democrats, leaving just 14% who are not angry with either party. Moreover, only 19% feel even somewhat well represented by the federal government in Washington, the lowest percentage in CNN polling since 2015. A substantial 81% now feel they are not represented well by the federal government.
Despite broad preferences for leaders in Congress and the White House to compromise in order to achieve results, 69% of respondents believe it is unlikely that attempts at bipartisanship on upcoming major legislation in Washington will be successful.
Regarding the imminent major legislation to fund the government by November 17, most Americans (57%) believe it is at least somewhat likely that a deal will be reached, with only 10% considering it “very likely.” Additionally, 81% of Americans find it unacceptable for members of Congress to threaten a government shutdown during budget negotiations to achieve their goals, with this sentiment being shared across party lines, including among Democrats (89%), independents (81%), and Republicans (72%).
This CNN Poll was conducted by SSRS from October 4-9 and included a random national sample of 1,255 adults, which also comprised 428 Republican and Republican-leaning independent voters. Surveys were conducted either online or by telephone with a live interviewer. The margin of sampling error for the full sample is plus or minus 3.4 points, and it is 5.7 points for results among Republican and Republican-leaning voters.
In a groundbreaking study published in the journal Cell, a team of scientists has proposed a novel explanation for some cases of long Covid, shedding light on a potential biological pathway underlying the condition. The research, conducted by experts at the University of Pennsylvania, points to depleted serotonin levels as a key factor in the manifestation of certain long Covid symptoms, including memory problems and neurological and cognitive issues. This discovery has significant implications for the diagnosis and treatment of long Covid, a condition that presents in various forms and often eludes conventional diagnostic tools.
The study suggests that the reduction in serotonin levels may be triggered by residual viral remnants lingering in the gut. This revelation has the potential to open doors to innovative treatments, including medications designed to boost serotonin production. Additionally, the researchers propose that their outlined biological pathway could serve as a common link between various theories surrounding the causes of long Covid, such as the persistence of viral remnants, inflammation, increased blood clotting, and autonomic nervous system dysfunction.
As Christoph Thaiss, a lead author of the study and an assistant professor of microbiology at the Perelman School of Medicine at the University of Pennsylvania, states, “All these different hypotheses might be connected through the serotonin pathway.” He also highlights the possibility that therapies targeting the serotonin pathway could benefit at least a subset of individuals with long Covid.
Akiko Iwasaki, an immunologist at Yale University, commends the study, describing it as “an excellent study that identifies lower levels of circulating serotonin as a mechanism for long Covid.” She notes that her team and colleagues at the Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai have recently conducted a study that identified other biological changes associated with some cases of long Covid, including hormone cortisol levels. These findings suggest that there might be specific subtypes of long Covid or different biological markers at different stages of the condition.
The research involved the analysis of blood samples from 58 patients who had been experiencing long Covid symptoms for a duration ranging from three months to 22 months post-infection. These results were compared to blood samples from 30 individuals with no post-Covid symptoms and 60 patients in the early, acute stage of a coronavirus infection.
Maayan Levy, a lead author of the study and an assistant professor of microbiology at the Perelman School of Medicine, highlights that serotonin levels and other metabolites were altered immediately following a coronavirus infection, a pattern observed with other viral infections. However, in individuals with long Covid, serotonin was the only significant molecule that did not return to pre-infection levels.
The researchers delved deeper into their investigation by analyzing stool samples from some long Covid patients, where they discovered the presence of residual viral particles. Through a combination of patient data and studies on mice and miniature models of the human gut, where serotonin production primarily occurs, the team identified a potential pathway contributing to certain long Covid cases.
The proposed mechanism revolves around viral remnants prompting the immune system to produce interferons, which are proteins that fight infection. Interferons induce inflammation, reducing the body’s ability to absorb tryptophan, an amino acid crucial for serotonin production in the gut. Moreover, blood clots that can develop following a coronavirus infection may impair the circulation of serotonin in the body. Depleted serotonin levels are believed to disrupt the vagus nerve system, which transmits signals between the body and the brain. As serotonin plays a role in short-term memory, this disruption could potentially lead to the memory problems and cognitive issues often experienced by individuals with long Covid.
While the study presents a promising breakthrough, there are some caveats to consider. The sample size was relatively small, necessitating the confirmation of these findings through additional research. Moreover, participants in other long Covid studies, which included individuals with milder symptoms, did not consistently exhibit depleted serotonin levels. This variation might suggest that serotonin depletion occurs primarily in individuals with more severe and complex long Covid symptoms.
In the quest to identify biomarkers for long Covid, which are measurable biological changes that aid in diagnosing the condition, this study has put forth three potential indicators: the presence of viral remnants in stool, reduced serotonin levels, and elevated interferon levels. Most experts believe that there won’t be a single biomarker for the condition; instead, several indicators may emerge, varying based on the type of symptoms and other factors.
The need for effective long Covid treatments is substantial, and clinical trials testing various treatment approaches are currently underway. Dr. Levy and Dr. Thaiss have announced their intention to launch a clinical trial to evaluate fluoxetine, a selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor often marketed as Prozac, and potentially tryptophan. They hope that supplementing serotonin or preventing its degradation could help restore vagal signals and improve memory and cognition in individuals with long Covid. This research paves the way for novel diagnostic methods and potential therapies to address the multifaceted challenges of long Covid.
In the 16th century, Sen no Rikyu, renowned as Japan’s most celebrated tea master, regarded the pristine forest stream water of Yamazaki as ideal for his tea ceremonies. At the same location on the outskirts of Kyoto, Shinjiro Torii, the founder of Suntory, established Japan’s inaugural malt whisky distillery in 1923, selecting the same water source highly prized by Japan’s “The Way of Tea” master.
As Suntory commemorates a century of crafting whisky, it is advancing a mission of unwavering quality through Japan’s art of monozukuri craftsmanship, all the while championing a sustainability endeavor firmly rooted in the preservation of water resources. For Suntory Holdings CEO Tak Niinami, the waters of Yamazaki, a misty valley where three rivers converge, are the wellspring and inspiration behind Suntory’s devoted commitment to whisky-making in harmony with nature.
In this context, Niinami aptly captures the essence, “We must think about what heritage means to us. What is Shinjiro Torii’s legacy? It comes down to providing something new. Something for people to feel — something we call ‘the brilliance of life.’ It’s not about selling products. It’s about the experience. We have to pursue innovation, even in the traditional world of whisky. We must find harmony among humanity, innovation, and nature.”
Suntory has been experiencing a surge in global demand for its premium whiskies like Yamazaki, Hibiki, and Hakushu, positioning them among the most sought-after whiskies in the world. This success has put Niinami under substantial pressure to expand production, a path he refuses to take in order to uphold quality.
“As CEO, I have to always follow this discipline, even if it’s my job to boost revenue. The reason? We need to surprise consumers by exceeding their expectations,” Niinami affirms, emphasizing the uncompromising spirit that governs Suntory’s commitment to quality.
Shinji Fukuyo, the fifth in a prestigious lineage of chief blenders, elucidates the critical role of pure water, which flows down mountain streams and permeates through rock, in determining the quality and natural harmony of Suntory whisky. This water, enriched by nutrients and minerals from the fertile terroir, remains a mysterious and essential element.
“In whisky-making, it’s water as much as barley and yeast that’s crucial,” Fukuyo asserts. “Water ultimately determines the success of each whisky we make. We haven’t fully understood what it is in the water that makes Suntory whisky special, but we know it brings out its unique character.”
Fukuyo elucidates how Suntory’s premium whiskies like Yamazaki and Hakushu, through maturation in their unique terroir, culminate in “a resonance between humans and nature.” The diverse climate and humidity of Yamazaki create ideal conditions for cask aging, a phenomenon known as “Suntory maturation.” This process yields the subtle and nuanced refinement of Suntory whiskies, in harmony with Shinjiro Torii’s original vision.
“Our whisky remains faithful to the outlook of our founder,” says Fukuyo. “He sought to create a whisky that appeals to the sensitivity of the Japanese sense of taste. For a hundred years, we’ve been cultivating this refined taste with unwavering dedication to quality.”
Beyond the world of whisky, Suntory is dedicated to nurturing water sanctuaries, including those deep in Japan’s Minami Alps, where Hakushu whisky is crafted. These sanctuaries play a vital role in preserving pristine groundwater and sustaining life’s most precious resource while bolstering whisky quality.
Today, Suntory’s water sanctuary project spans roughly 12,000 hectares in 22 locations across 15 prefectures in Japan, replenishing more than twice the water consumed by Suntory’s plants.
Niinami underscores the commitment to replenishing the water used for production, noting that, “We have a passion for cultivating water resources in forests. Natural water is not owned by us, but by society.” Globally, Suntory has extended its water sanctuary initiatives to Scotland and Kentucky, collaborating with local communities to support the environment.
As Niinami affirms, “Water scarcity is a global crisis. We must be a solution, not a cause. Our commitment is to contribute to natural water in the world. That’s the commitment of all Suntory Group companies.”
Water conservation is an integral part of Suntory’s broader global mission of sustainability, grounded in the vision of humanity living in harmony with nature. Suntory is actively engaged in developing innovative technologies for plastic recycling, including PET bottles, and collaborates with over 40 companies, including competitors, to advance recycling technologies on a large scale.
“Biodiversity is a key part of the lifeline for the world, not only for humankind but also for all land and ocean life,” emphasizes Niinami. “We need to work with partners to resolve pressing issues such as sustainability, and we want to be a center for it.”
This forward-looking vision encapsulates the legacy of Shinjiro Torii, who believed in nature’s blessings to humanity and sought to pay them forward.
As Niinami aptly states, “Nature gives us blessings. We have to return our due.”
Learning something new, something beyond our current knowledge, takes various forms. Experience often serves as a crucial teacher, compelling the young to venture forth into uncharted territory. Another path to enlightenment lies in the wisdom shared by those who have embarked on journeys of discovery before us.
Their insights manifest as stories, lessons in school, Wikipedia entries, or books, expanding our horizons. Take, for instance, the case of Aristotle and Theophrastus, who, during their sojourn to the island of Lesbos, meticulously observed the intricate movements of fish, mollusks, birds, mammals, and plants. Their records unveiled the wondrous realm of biology, illuminating the natural world for all to see.
Instruments, on the other hand, offer us an opportunity to peer even further into the mysteries of the universe. Galileo, for instance, turned his telescope toward the heavens and bore witness to phenomena that would have defied belief. This act opened our eyes to the boundless expanse of astronomy. Similarly, physicists utilize spectrometers to dissect the light emitted by elements, amassing data about atoms and ushering us into the world of quantum physics.
Yet, what about the aspects of our universe that remain invisible, even to the most advanced technology? How do we learn about phenomena we can never observe directly, regardless of our technological prowess? This is a question that continually gnaws at my own exploration of black holes.
Black holes, today, dot the celestial landscape, visible thanks to the remarkable capabilities of telescopes. However, the view we have is limited to their exteriors. We witness matter swirling madly around the abyss before succumbing to its relentless pull. But what lies within? What secrets would we uncover if we dared to plunge into a black hole and withstand the crushing forces that assail us?
This is a conundrum that current science cannot answer. While Einstein’s theory offers insights into the behavior of black holes, it predicts the termination of time within their dark depths. Nevertheless, the inner sanctum of black holes is governed by the quantum aspects of space and time, aspects that Einstein’s theory does not encompass.
So, how do we fathom a place we can neither physically reach nor directly observe? To explore the unexplorable, we must rely on a tool beyond technology, logic, or mathematics. We must invoke the power of imagination.
Picture: CBC
Throughout history, numerous scientific breakthroughs have hinged on the subtle art of changing one’s perspective. Consider Anaximander, the ancient Greek thinker who revolutionized cosmology. He ventured to imagine the Earth not merely as the sky above but also as the expanse beneath our feet, presenting a revolutionary shift in perspective. This imaginative leap allowed him to envision how the Earth might appear from a vantage point in the heavens, a vision later realized by Neil Armstrong and Buzz Aldrin as they gazed upon our planet from the moon’s surface.
Anaximander also stands as the originator of geographical mapping. In ancient times, the concept of rendering land from an eagle’s perspective, as seen from great heights, had not occurred to anyone. It took the audacity to place oneself in the eagle’s position, to contemplate the world from such an elevated viewpoint, to introduce this entirely new perspective.
Hipparchus, one of the most illustrious astronomers of antiquity, offered a refined calculation of the moon’s distance. He began with the question, “What would I see if I stood at the tip of Earth’s shadow cone?” By envisioning himself thousands of miles from Earth, in the expanse of interplanetary space, witnessing the Earth completely eclipsing the sun, Hipparchus engaged in a form of mental sightseeing.
Copernicus, the trailblazing astronomer, examined the solar system from the perspective of the sun itself. Johannes Kepler, in his work “The Dream,” recounted a voyage to the moon, providing an account of the celestial vista from its surface. Einstein, in his profound contemplation, pondered what he might observe if he could ride a beam of light.
These visionaries were able to see from places they had never physically visited. Anaximander didn’t soar with eagles, Kepler didn’t ride a broomstick to the moon, and Einstein certainly didn’t surf a ray of light. So, how is this possible? The answer, I believe, lies in striking a delicate balance—a balance between what we carry with us from our accumulated knowledge and what we’re willing to leave behind. What we retain equips us with a sense of expectation.
In the context of exploring black holes, Einstein’s equations, predicting their geometric properties, guide us. Einstein, in turn, built upon James Clerk Maxwell’s equations, describing light’s behavior. Kepler drew from Copernicus’s magnum opus, “On the Revolutions of the Celestial Spheres.” These established the maps, the rules, the principles that have consistently served us well. However, it’s imperative that we shed some of our preconceptions.
Anaximander discarded the notion that all things fall in the same direction, recognizing that falling must involve subtleties not previously considered. Kepler relinquished the idea of celestial bodies moving in perfect circles, a concept that seemed intuitively correct. Einstein parted with the belief that all clocks tick uniformly, a notion still held by many. Striking this balance is essential; too much baggage hampers progress, while too little leaves us ill-equipped to forge new pathways. There is no recipe for success; there is only trial and error, a continuous cycle of experimentation.
This approach is emblematic of scientific inquiry, a journey marked by unceasing study and profound love. It involves the endless reconfiguration of our existing knowledge to gain new insights. It requires us to leave behind elements that once seemed fundamental but have become obstacles to progress. It necessitates calculated risks and a lingering presence on the fringes of our knowledge. This ongoing familiarity enables us to traverse the border, to walk back and forth along its length, searching for that elusive gap. It beckons us to experiment with new combinations, to embrace new concepts.
This method is not dissimilar to the creative process in art. Both science and art revolve around the perpetual reorganization of our conceptual space, reshaping our understanding of meaning. When we react to a work of art, the process occurs not within the art itself but within the intricate network of analogical relationships woven by our neurons. Art and science awaken us from our habitual slumber, reconnecting us with the joy of seeing the world anew.
This joy mirrors the profound satisfaction that science imparts. The radiance in a Johannes Vermeer painting reveals a resonance of light in the world previously eluding our grasp. A fragment of Sappho’s poetry engenders a fresh perspective on desire. Anish Kapoor’s voids of pure black bewilder us, much like the enigmatic black holes in general relativity. Both prompt us to contemplate alternate ways of understanding the intangible fabric of reality.
The path from observation to comprehension is often long and meandering. Copernicus and Einstein, for instance, drew from well-established observations that had been known for centuries. It is the ability to reconfigure our thought processes that enables us to take that transformative leap.
In the pursuit of understanding the enigmatic depths of black holes, I have devoted my career and life to this quest. As Albert Einstein eloquently expressed, “The most beautiful thing we can experience is the mysterious
Flag football and squash will make their Olympic debut in 2028, among five new sports added to the schedule for the Los Angeles Summer Games, as revealed by the International Olympic Committee (IOC) on Monday. Alongside these additions, cricket, lacrosse, and baseball-softball will also join the roster, aimed at diversifying the viewer base.
In a statement, IOC President Thomas Bach highlighted the selection of these additional sports as being in harmony with American sports culture and their potential to introduce iconic American sports to a global audience, while also bringing international sports to the United States, thereby making the Olympic Games LA28 distinctive.
Cricket, a sport of massive popularity in India, a country with a population of 1.4 billion, will return to the Olympics for the first time since 1900, featuring the shorter T20 format, a three-hour variation that has thrilled cricket enthusiasts. Sachin Tendulkar, a renowned cricketing figure, expressed his excitement, saying, “This marks the dawn of a new era for cricket as it will be a golden opportunity to foster inclusivity and showcase new talent from emerging cricketing nations.”
Lacrosse will make its Olympic return, having been previously contested in the 1904 and 1908 Olympics and more recently as a demonstration sport in 1948. In LA, the version being played is called sixes, a fast-paced variant of lacrosse introduced in 2018. The IOC acknowledged the Indigenous North American origins of the sport.
Flag football, a non-contact iteration of American football, secured a place in the Olympics following a campaign by the NFL advocating for its inclusion. Notably, more children aged 6 to 12 in the U.S. participate in flag football compared to tackle football.
Squash, played by 20 million enthusiasts across 180 countries, will debut at the 2028 Olympics after previous attempts to secure a spot fell short. Former world champion squash player Jonathon Power emphasized the sport’s passionate following and its potential for unique venues due to the use of glass walls in gameplay. He stated, “They put some of the tournaments at the foot of the pyramids or in Grand Central Station. They can basically put this four-wall glass court in some really spectacular settings.”
While baseball and softball have been part of previous Olympics, including the Tokyo Olympics in 2021, they are not slated to feature in the upcoming Paris Games in 2024.
Additionally, the IOC announced that modern pentathlon and **weightlifting** will continue to be part of the Olympics despite not being initially included in plans. Modern pentathlon made changes by replacing its horse riding event with obstacle racing to reduce costs. Weightlifting had faced scrutiny following a doping scandal, prompting the IOC to closely monitor anti-doping efforts in Paris next year.
In early 2022, 28 sports categories were announced for the LA Olympics, including skateboarding, sport climbing, and surfing, reflecting the ongoing efforts to keep the Olympic program dynamic and appealing to a diverse global audience.
Executives are raising alarm bells about the impending impact of artificial intelligence (AI) on the workforce. A recent survey conducted by edX, an online education platform, sheds light on their concerns. The survey collected responses from 800 executives and 800 employees, revealing some thought-provoking insights about the evolving skills landscape.
According to the survey, a staggering 49% of executives believe that nearly half of the skills currently existing in the workforce will be irrelevant by 2025 due to AI. This revelation underscores the rapid pace of change that AI is ushering in. Furthermore, an equally substantial 47% of these executives express doubts about their workforce’s readiness for the future job market. While the identification of skills shortages may not be surprising coming from an educational platform, the timeframe in question is indeed an eye-opener.
Picture: LinkedIn
Executives foresee substantial changes on the horizon, particularly in entry-level knowledge worker roles. A striking 56% of these leaders anticipate that over the next five years, their organizations will eliminate more than half of these roles due to AI. Even more startling, 79% of executives believe that entry-level knowledge worker jobs will cease to exist entirely as AI ushers in a new era of roles for incoming employees. Notably, 56% of these executives also foresee their own roles being either “completely” or “partially” replaced by AI.
However, there are dissenting voices in the industry who take a more cautious stance. Richard Jefts, the executive vice president and general manager at HCL Software, believes that the immediate impact of AI on career trajectories may be less dramatic. He asserts that many companies, despite claims of AI adoption, are still in the early stages of implementation. In his view, the real transformation of careers will occur as AI matures, emphasizing a longer-term perspective.
The impact of AI on jobs and tasks is multifaceted and not simply a matter of replacing tasks with AI-driven solutions. Frederico Braga, head of digital at Debiopharm, points out the complexity of predicting where and when this transformation will manifest. He believes that professionals whose daily routines intersect with digital activities will need to adapt their career goals as they witness changes in their work-related activities and processes.
In some cases, career redirection may not be necessary. Jonathan Martin, president at WEKA, suggests that individuals can enhance their career prospects by leveraging emerging AI tools to amplify their existing strengths. He encourages individuals to explore how AI can make them incrementally better at what they already excel in.
Vittorio Cretella, CIO of Procter and Gamble, anticipates AI’s value as augmented, not artificial, intelligence. He asserts that the most successful AI applications will complement human skills rather than replace them. Humans, he believes, will continue to excel in problem definition and pattern identification, areas where AI still struggles.
The survey conducted by edX raises concerns even among the highest-level decision-makers, including CEOs. Surprisingly, 47% of C-Suite executives believe that “most” or “all” of the CEO role should be entirely automated or replaced by AI, a sentiment shared by 49% of CEOs themselves.
While AI may take over decision-making processes at certain levels, running organizations necessitates enduring qualities that only humans can provide. Leadership, curiosity, and strong soft skills are qualities that will remain in high demand, according to Jefts. These qualities are challenging for generative AI to replicate.
As AI continues to evolve, certain skills will become more crucial. These include critical thinking, logical intelligence, interpersonal and intrapersonal intelligence, and structured planning and organization. Conversely, skills in decreasing demand will encompass repetitive tasks, analysis, interpretation activities, and content generation as AI becomes integrated into daily work activities.
The survey highlights that while AI will replace certain tasks, it will also enhance the effectiveness of executives and free up their time for more critical business activities. Beyond handling routine tasks, AI can contribute to idea generation, planning, forecasting, and data-driven decision-making.
The survey reveals that 92% of executives recognize the importance of improving their AI skills within the next one to two years. Almost all of them are already incorporating AI into their roles. However, close to 80% express concerns that their lack of AI proficiency could leave them unprepared for the future of work. The rapid pace of change is cited as a source of anxiety for some executives.
Familiarity with AI and its capabilities is expected to empower business professionals, particularly in areas such as HR, sales, and support. Senior IT leaders, in particular, are likely to be the professionals most impacted by AI and will need to understand the technology.
Nevertheless, Martin maintains that there will always be a place for creative and strategic thinking. Innovation and great ideas will continue to rely on human creativity, as generative AI apps advance. Human involvement will still be needed to develop prompts, curate results, and determine how AI-generated output is applied.
The survey underscores the importance of creativity for problem-solving in any industry. Human creativity, agility, and tenacity will be essential to address the various challenges that arise throughout one’s career. In this realm, AI may struggle to replace years of real-world experience and human intuition.
In his recent apostolic exhortation, Laudate Deum, Pope Francis extends the dialogue initiated by his 2015 encyclical, “Laudato Si’, on Care for Our Common Home.” Climate scientists affirm the scientific rigor of this latest document, while theologians applaud the Pope’s unwavering commitment to addressing the climate crisis.
At the outset of Laudate Deum, Pope Francis commends the U.S. bishops’ assessment of climate change as a social issue. He cites the 2019 global climate change background report from the U.S. Conference of Catholic Bishops, underlining the interconnectedness of caring for both one another and the Earth. This report emphasizes that climate change is a paramount challenge facing society and the global community, with the most vulnerable bearing the brunt of its impacts.
Archbishop Thomas Wenski of Miami welcomes the inclusion of this quote, viewing it as recognition of the conference’s longstanding work on climate. He asserts that environmental stewardship has been an ongoing commitment of American bishops.
Daniel DiLeo, associate professor and director of the justice and peace studies program at Creighton University, sees the citation as a strategic move to hold the bishops accountable for their own standards. DiLeo, who co-published a study in 2021 revealing that the majority of U.S. bishops rarely mentioned climate change in their writings around Laudato Si’, remains skeptical about the likelihood of a significant change in the bishops’ stance post-Laudate Deum. He calls on the bishops to commit to substantial emission reductions within specific timeframes to align with Laudate Deum’s call and engage young Catholics actively in environmental issues.
In line with this, Christiana Figueres, the United Nations official instrumental in the 2015 Paris Agreement, had previously challenged the U.S. Catholic Church to commit to achieving net-zero emissions by 2040. DiLeo underscores the importance of collective action among individual Catholics, urging them to leverage their combined influence in their dioceses and with elected officials.
In Laudate Deum, Pope Francis issues a challenge to the United States, noting the high per capita emissions in comparison to China and the poorest countries. He emphasizes the need for a significant shift away from the unsustainable Western lifestyle as a means to address the climate crisis.
In response to this criticism, Archbishop Wenski questions the accuracy of the comparison between China and the United States, suggesting that China’s pollution levels might be underestimated.
According to the World Bank, the U.S. emitted 13.0 metric tons of carbon dioxide per capita in 2020, while China emitted 7.8 metric tons per capita. Nevertheless, Archbishop Wenski acknowledges that conspicuous consumption is a notable aspect of American culture and hopes that Laudate Deum prompts self-reflection.
The archbishop commits to implementing more sustainable and energy-efficient practices in parishes and schools within the Miami Archdiocese. He also expects Laudate Deum to influence their legislative priorities when advocating for government policies.
Laudate Deum’s extensive explanation of the latest climate science garners praise from climate scientists. Carmelite Fr. Eduardo Agosta Scarel, a climate scientist and senior adviser to the Laudato Si’ Movement, applauds the document’s use of up-to-date scientific knowledge. However, he points out a concern with the Pope’s use of the term “correlation” when describing the relationship between greenhouse gas emissions and climate change. He emphasizes that it’s not merely a correlation but a well-established scientific theory explaining the Earth’s climate behavior.
Carlos Martinez, an atmospheric scientist and chair of the Committee on Spirituality, Multifaith Outreach, and Science at the American Meteorological Society, commends Pope Francis for his straightforward and simple communication on climate. He believes that this approach will help climate scientists effectively reach religious audiences who might be apathetic or skeptical about climate change.
Martinez appreciates Pope Francis’ attention to geoengineering and carbon capture technology, noting the potential of the latter to play a positive role.
Laudate Deum places significant emphasis on the forthcoming United Nations climate change summit, COP28. Pope Francis calls for “binding forms of energy transition” at COP28, focusing on their efficiency, obligation, and monitoring.
Sister Veronica Brand, representing the Religious of the Sacred Heart of Mary at the U.N., recognizes the impact of Pope Francis’ environmental teachings on U.N. leaders. She appreciates his concept of “multilateralism from below,” emphasizing the importance of representing the voices of people on the ground, especially sisters’ participation at the U.N.
Blair Nelsen, representing the Sisters of St. Joseph of Peace at the U.N., applauds Pope Francis’ analysis of the state of multilateralism and underscores the significance of civil society organizations. Nelsen points out the incentive for destructive business practices under the prevailing technocratic paradigm, echoing the Pope’s concerns.
Christiana Zenner, associate professor of theology, science, and ethics at Fordham University, lauds Pope Francis for addressing the technocratic paradigm, which questions the idea of unlimited technological and economic growth as an unqualified good. She believes that this document will make the concept of the technocratic paradigm more understandable.
Zenner finds it surprising that the document cites feminist science and technology studies scholar Donna Haraway, given the Vatican’s infrequent citations of women in papal documents. Zenner contends that the document sometimes discusses women more than it allows them to have a voice.
Finally, Fr. Emmanuel Katongole, a theology and peace studies professor at the University of Notre Dame, appreciates Pope Francis’ connection between Indigenous culture and a healthy ecology. He believes that Indigenous, poor communities may offer insights into a more sustainable future by breaking free from the technocratic paradigm.
Katongole emphasizes the need for widespread awareness of Laudate Deum and its theological and spiritual implications, calling for workshops in all parishes to educate Catholics about the climate crisis.
Dominican Sr. Lissette Avilés-Ríos, who hosts a radio show and podcast focused on environmental care, underscores the importance of conveying Pope Francis’s message and climate science to help people understand the local impact. She calls on Christians to unite their faith with their way of life, taking responsibility for the Earth.
The upcoming winter season in the United States may bear the hallmark of El Niño’s influence, as indicated in a recent forecast from The Weather Company, an IBM Business, and Atmospheric G2.
This influence is discernible in the comprehensive three-month winter outlook. The forecast suggests that a robust El Niño is anticipated for this winter, a phenomenon typically linked to above-average temperatures in much of the northern United States. In contrast, it often results in slightly below-average temperatures in parts of the southern U.S.
However, it’s important to note that this outlook provides a broad three-month trend, so there could be periods of both warmer and colder weather in specific regions compared to the general forecast.
Month-by-Month Projections
Let’s delve into the month-by-month projections for this upcoming winter and examine some key factors that might alter this outlook.
December: Winter could kick off with unseasonably warm conditions in the Northern Plains, Great Lakes, and Northeast. If you were hoping for a chilly December to set the holiday mood, you might be in for disappointment. Cities like Minneapolis, Chicago, Boston, and New York City are all expected to experience temperatures significantly above average. Meanwhile, the southern tier of the U.S. is likely to see temperatures close to the seasonal norm.
January:As the new year begins, the southern U.S. might experience slightly colder-than-average temperatures. A typical feature of El Niño is cool and wet conditions in parts of the southern states during the heart of winter, and this outlook suggests that from the Southern Plains to Georgia and the Carolinas, there’s a possibility of increased chances for snow and ice. On the other hand, parts of the Northwest and Northeast have the highest likelihood of experiencing above-average temperatures in January.
February:The last full month of winter may bring a split in temperature trends. In February, the warmest temperatures compared to the seasonal average could prevail in the Northwest and northern Rockies. Conversely, the Southeast to the mid-Atlantic might have a higher chance of encountering colder-than-average temperatures.
Factors that Could Alter the Winter ForecasT
Several critical factors could potentially modify the winter forecast.
Atmospheric Response to El Niño:The extent of the atmospheric response to El Niño’s warm Pacific waters plays a pivotal role. According to Dr. Todd Crawford, Vice President of Meteorology at Atmospheric G2, the current atmospheric conditions resemble those of the 2009-10 El Niño, which was characterized by cooler temperatures in the central and eastern U.S. Therefore, close monitoring of trends in the coming weeks and months is necessary to determine the extent of El Niño’s influence on winter weather patterns and whether the outlook may shift towards cooler conditions.
Polar Vortex Strength:The weakening of the polar vortex later in the winter can have significant implications for weather patterns. When the polar vortex weakens, the frigid air typically trapped in the Arctic can spill into parts of Canada, the U.S., Asia, and Europe. This happens because the jet stream becomes more blocked with sharp, southward meanders, redirecting cold air toward lower latitudes. Dr. Crawford suggests a good chance of a mid-winter weakening of the polar vortex, which could lead to colder conditions during the latter part of winter.
Global Warming Influence:The recent surge in global warmth is another factor to consider. As of the end of September, the Earth was on track to experience its warmest year on record. Dr. Crawford notes that this additional burst of global warmth in 2023 may result in an upward shift in temperatures. In practical terms, this means that warm periods could be even warmer than usual, while cold periods may be less severe than typical.
While the winter outlook suggests an influence of El Niño with a predisposition towards warmer conditions in the northern U.S. and cooler conditions in the southern U.S., these projections are subject to modification based on the evolving interplay of these significant factors. Therefore, as winter approaches, we must remain vigilant and adaptable in our preparations for the upcoming season.
Steve Jobs: it’s easy to think the Apple co-founder (did you know there were actually three?) possessed something — intelligence, talent, creativity, connections, etc. — that you don’t.
But here’s the thing. Scratch the surface of even the most successful people and you’ll likely find they suffer from impostor syndrome: the inner belief they’re inadequate and mediocre, despite objective evidence that proves their skills, talents, and achievements.
Jobs summed it up nicely:
“Life can be much broader once you discover one simple fact: Everything around you that you call ‘life’ was made up by people that were no smarter than you. And you can change it.
The minute you understand you can change it, you can mold it … that’s maybe the most important thing: to shake off this erroneous notion that life is there and you’re just going to live in it, versus embrace it, change it, improve it …
… and make your mark upon it.”
Jobs was a mixed bag. Visionary entrepreneur, and a guy who sometimes ate only carrots or apples for a week. Incredibly influential leader, yet also the antithesis of a warm, empathetic boss.
We’re all mixed bags. At times, we’re all a little insecure. A little uncertain. A little — or a lot — messy. As Avenged Sevenfold guitarist Synyster Gates puts it, “Everyone is some sort of [screwed] up.”
Depressing? Absolutely not; that perspective is actually empowering, especially when you consider other examples.
Richard Branson’s Perspective:
Take Richard Branson. Quintessential entrepreneur. Noted philanthropist and humanitarian. World-class adventurer. Influencer of world leaders. I was nervous the first time I interviewed him, but I shouldn’t have been. He was gracious. Thoughtful. Considerate. (He even gave me half his sandwich.) Even though personal reality rarely lives up to public perception, Branson was exactly what you would hope he would be.
And then there’s this: As I was leaving, I heard him say to the PR rep, “Do you think that went OK? I’m not sure I did some of his questions justice.”
And it hit me: Even though Sir Richard is incredibly successful, intelligent, and accomplished, he’s also insecure. Just as you or I would have been, he was worried he didn’t come off well.
Additional Examples:
A few more examples? After our first interview, Metallica guitarist Kirk Hammett told me he had been nervous because he “never imagined he would ever be in a magazine like Inc.” Dany Garcia, the Rock’s business partner and CEO of the Garcia Companies, called me back after our interview, not because she wanted to change a few answers but because she was worried they lacked depth. Jack Welch paused after a question and said, “Let me think about that for a minute. I don’t want to sound dumb.”
I can list plenty more examples.
A Common Human Thread:
Why?
Because we’re all just people: No matter how talented, how celebrated, how successful or influential someone may appear on the outside, on the inside, people are just people. We all share the same doubts and fears.
That high-powered investor you’re about to pitch? She’s smart. Savvy. Successful. Naturally, you’re nervous. Even intimidated. You’re afraid your vision, your plans, your foresight, and your passion won’t be good enough.
You’re afraid you won’t be good enough.
But so is she. No matter her track record, she’s still insecure about the future: whether she can spot the next group company, the next great entrepreneur, the next great opportunity. Deep inside, she worries that she won’t be good enough.
Underneath the trappings of success is a person just as nervous and insecure as you.
Because, to paraphrase Jobs, we’re all just people — and the playing field is a lot more level than it might appear.
Embracing Our Shared Humanity:
The next time you feel nervous about meeting someone, pitching someone, selling someone, connecting with someone, make sure your nervousness isn’t misplaced. It makes sense to be nervous about how you will perform, especially if you aren’t prepared. (Confidence is all about preparation; the more prepared you are, the more confident you feel.)
But it doesn’t make sense to be nervous about the person. No matter how successful on the outside, on the inside they’re just like you: Scared. Nervous. Insecure. Messy.
Some sort of (screwed) up.
Which means you can be just as successful, in whatever way you choose to define success, as the people you admire. You can be just as successful as the people you think might be smarter, more talented, more skilled, more connected.
India is aiming to urge developed nations to embrace a more ambitious target of becoming carbon negative rather than merely carbon neutral by 2050. This move is rooted in the argument that this approach would provide emerging economies with additional time to utilize fossil fuels to meet their developmental needs. Two sources within the Indian government revealed that India, which has been resisting calls to commit to a specific deadline for phasing out coal and other fossil fuels, plans to present this proposal at the COP28 climate summit in Dubai later this year.
“One of the government officials said, ‘The rich countries should become net negative emitters before 2050 to enable the world to achieve the target of global net-zero by that year while allowing developing nations to use the available natural resources for growth,'” according to one of the government officials.
As it currently stands, developed countries, including the United States, Britain, Canada, and Japan, are targeting achieving net zero emissions by 2050. China has committed to reaching net zero emissions by 2060, while India has set a target of achieving this goal by 2070. Net zero or carbon neutrality denotes a scenario in which the volume of carbon dioxide released into the atmosphere through human activities is offset by corresponding activities designed to remove an equivalent amount. In contrast, being carbon negative is a more ambitious undertaking that requires a nation to remove more carbon dioxide from the atmosphere than it emits.
The discussions at COP28 are unfolding against a backdrop of extreme weather events, such as heatwaves and unpredictable monsoons, which have underscored the urgency of taking immediate action on climate change.
India, in its approach, intends to persist in resisting the pressure from developed economies to establish a concrete deadline for phasing down the use of fossil fuels. Instead, it is advocating for a shift in focus towards reducing overall carbon emissions through the use of “abatement and mitigation technologies.” These insights were provided by the two officials, and a third government official, who opted to remain anonymous as these discussions are confidential, and a definitive stance has not yet been established.
Efforts to obtain comments from India’s environment, external affairs, and prime minister’s offices through email inquiries were unsuccessful.
India has already committed to operating 50% of its installed power capacity using non-fossil energy sources and reducing its greenhouse emissions-to-GDP ratio to 45% of the 2005 level by 2030.
During a summit held in New Delhi just last month, the G20 countries acknowledged the necessity of reducing unabated coal power, although they did not specify a timeline or set emission reduction targets. This declaration marked a positive step in global climate negotiations, with these 20 nations, which collectively account for over 80% of global emissions, agreeing to phase out coal for the first time. This development was particularly notable as coal-dependent economies, including China, India, and Indonesia, have previously resisted discussions about transitioning away from coal and instead called for developed economies to cease using gas.
One official emphasized that it is currently unfeasible for India to commit to a timeline for ending coal usage, as coal is anticipated to remain a fundamental component of the country’s energy mix in the foreseeable future, even if energy storage and abatement technologies become viable in a hypothetical scenario.
Statistics reveal that thermal power stations continue to supply 73% of the electricity consumed in India, despite the country increasing its non-fossil energy capacity to constitute 44% of its total installed power generation capacity.
COP28 is scheduled to be held between November 30 and December 12, providing a significant platform for discussions on these crucial matters of global climate action.
The week-long annual meetings of the International Monetary Fund (IMF) and World Bank concluded in the Moroccan city of Marrakech. Despite being overshadowed by recent Middle East violence and held in a country still recovering from an earthquake, these meetings covered a range of critical topics affecting the global economy. Here are the main points from the meetings:
1.Global Economic Growth: The IMF outlook, approved before the escalation of the Israel-Hamas conflict, predicts a slowdown in global economic growth. It anticipates growth to decrease from 3.5% last year to 3% this year and 2.9% next year, marking a 0.1% downgrade from a previous 2024 estimate. Global inflation is also expected to decrease, from 6.9% this year to 5.8% next year. Central bankers indicated their readiness to halt interest rate hikes if circumstances permit, with the hope that inflation can be controlled without causing a severe economic downturn. The impact of the Middle East conflict on the global economy remains uncertain.
2. Debt Challenges: Discussions frequently revolved around the heavy debt burdens carried by advanced economies, including the United States, China, and Italy. Financial markets recently pushed U.S. bond yields higher, raising concerns. Italian central bank governor Ignazio Visco noted that markets appeared to be reassessing the risks associated with holding longer-term debt. JPMorgan’s Joyce Chang emphasized the return of the “bond vigilantes,” marking the end of the Great Moderation, a period of relative economic stability prior to the 2008/09 financial crisis. This shift could affect policies related to climate change, as escalating subsidies may lead to increased public debt. The IMF suggests that a new approach, with carbon pricing at its core, is needed.
3.Debt Deals and Reforms: Beyond advanced economies, several challenges exist, including higher policy rates, a strong U.S. dollar, and geopolitical uncertainties. Turkey is working on a reform plan, focusing on lowering inflation. Kenya aims to prevent debt distress by planning a buyback of a quarter of its $2 billion international bond maturing in June. Zambia reached a debt rework memorandum of understanding with creditors, including China and France. The situation with Sri Lanka’s debt remains less clear, with an agreement reached with the Export-Import Bank of China but talks with other official creditors stalling.
4.Risks to the Global Economy: The IMF’s Global Financial Stability Report highlights the risks posed by high interest rates. It estimates that approximately 5% of banks worldwide are vulnerable to stress if interest rates remain high for an extended period. Moreover, an additional 30% of banks, including some of the world’s largest, would be at risk if the global economy experiences prolonged low growth and high inflation.
Picture: CNBC
5.Challenges to Consensus-Building: Several factors, including the Ukraine war, growing trade protectionism, and tensions between the United States and China, have made consensus-building more challenging. Notably, no final communique was issued at the end of the meetings. Discussions about restructuring the IMF and World Bank to better represent emerging economies like China and Brazil were held. A U.S. proposal to increase IMF lending power while deferring a review of fund shareholdings gained broad support. However, anti-poverty groups remained skeptical about the outcomes, emphasizing the need for new financial commitments to address poverty and climate change.
The annual meetings of the IMF and World Bank in Marrakech addressed critical global economic issues, including slowing growth, debt challenges, the impact of geopolitical factors, and the need for reforms to address climate change. While these meetings provided insights into these pressing matters, there were concerns about the adequacy of the solutions proposed, particularly in the face of persistent global challenges.
Blood clots are one of the most preventable causes of death among hospitalized patients. About 400,000 in the US and 10 million people around the world are diagnosed with blood clots every year. In the US alone the cost related to blood clots is close to $10 Billion. Prolonged immobility due to sickness, hospitalization, surgery, or travel is the most common cause of venous blood clots. Obesity, smoking, pregnancy, birth control pills, cancer can increase the risk further.
World Thrombosis Day, founded by the International Society on Thrombosis and Haemostasis (ISTH), is a global initiative held annually on October 13th with the mission is to raise awareness about thrombosis, that is about blood clots, a condition often underestimated and misunderstood.
“October 13th is World Thrombosis Day, aimed at increasing awareness of blood clots which are one of the most common preventable cause of death, especially in hospitalized patients,” said Dr. Satheesh Kathula, MD, FACP, DipABLM, Clinical Professor of Medicine; Hematologist and Oncologist, and President Elect, AAPI. “I was honored to be invited as a chief guest for an event promoting awareness of blood clots in Austin, Texas last week.”
Blood is in fluid state because we have perfect balance of factors promoting and preventing blood clots. If there is imbalance it will result in blood clots.
About 10 million people are diagnosed with blood clots every year in the world. About 400,000 cases are diagnosed every year in the United States and the cost related to blood in the US healthcare system is close to $10 billion every year. 1 in 4 deaths are felt to be due to clotting of blood.
Type of blood clots:
Blood clots can form either in the arteries or veins due to different set of risk factors and lead to different type of damage to the organs. Venous clots are more common due to passive flow and the most common cause of death due to venous clots is pulmonary embolism (clots traveling to lungs). 60% of venous clots are due to hospitalization.
Risk factors:
If there is endothelial (inner lining of the blood vessels) damage, inflammation or venous stasis ( pooling of the blood). Any of these can lead to disturbance in the smooth flow of blood resulting in blood clots.
Prolonged immobility due to being sick or hospitalization, surgery, travel is one of the most common cause of blood clots. Obesity, smoking, pregnancy, being on birth control pills, cancer will increase the risk further. Some people are born with (hereditary) risk factors such as factor V Leiden and prothrombin gene mutations, protein C, S, and anti-thrombin III deficiency.
Treatment:
Blood clots are treated with blood thinners which are available widely in the form of IV, injections or pills.
Prevention:
Blood clots are highly preventable cause of morbidity and death. Early and frequent ambulation of hospital patients is of paramount importance. People who travel either by road or air should get up and walk every 2 hours or so. Loosing weight, if one is obese; quitting smoking are highly encouraged. Those who are at high risk should receive prophylactic blood thinners as a preventive measure, especially when they are hospitalized, undergoing surgery or become pregnant.
“As a hematologist treating patients with blood clots for over 22 years and as a life style medicine promoter, my message on this day is to MOVE.. MOVE and MOVE!” says, Dr. Kathula, who has dedicated nearly a quarter century of his life in preventing and treating Thrombosis.
Amid the ongoing conflict between Israel and Gaza, a concerning message has surfaced from Hamas Commander Mahmoud al-Zahar, expressing his group’s aspirations for global dominance.
A video clip, lasting over a minute, featuring the senior Hamas official has gone viral on the internet. In the footage, he claims that Israel is just the initial target and that their goal is to expand their influence worldwide. This ominous warning comes as Israel has declared war on Hamas following a shocking attack that claimed the lives of hundreds of Israelis.
Zahar stated in the video, “Israel is only the first target. The entire planet will be under our rule.”
He continued, “The entire 510 million square kilometres of Planet Earth will be subject to a system devoid of injustice, oppression, and the kind of violence and crimes witnessed against Palestinians and Arabs in various Arab countries, including Lebanon, Syria, Iraq, and others.”
Shortly after the video emerged, Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu released a statement reaffirming his commitment to the ongoing fight against Hamas, declaring that every member of the Palestinian group was a target.
“Hamas is equivalent to Daesh (the Islamic State group), and we will dismantle them just as the world did with Daesh,” he stated during a brief televised address.
Meanwhile, Hamas members holding Israeli soldiers and civilians captive have issued a threat to execute a hostage for each Gaza home struck by Israel without warning. At the time, there was no confirmation of Hamas carrying out this threat.
In response to the escalating crisis, Israel has formed an emergency unity government, with Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu working alongside former Defense Minister Benny Gantz in a war cabinet.
This development comes as the Israeli military intensifies its operations in Gaza, aiming to eradicate the Palestinian group Hamas before a potential ground offensive in the Palestinian coastal enclave.
Comparing Hamas to ISIS, Netanyahu outlined some of the horrific acts committed during the recent attacks, including the burning of individuals alive. He highlighted that nearly every Israeli family has a connection to a victim of these attacks.
“We will unite to protect our homeland,” Netanyahu declared and expressed appreciation for the “unprecedented” support Israel has received from global leaders. “We are on the offensive… Every Hamas member is a target,” he asserted.
Netanyahu concluded by emphasizing that all of Israel stands behind its soldiers, assuring that Israel will emerge victorious.
“We are all one; we are all enlisted in this fight,” proclaimed Benny Gantz. He added, “There is only one camp, the camp of the Nation of Israel,” emphasizing that the partnership with Netanyahu is not political but one of fate. “All of Israel is under Order Number 8 (the order sent to reservists for an emergency wartime call-up),” Gantz noted.
Maju Varghese, a former official from the Biden administration, has assumed the role of principal at NEWCO Strategies, a comprehensive strategic consulting firm renowned for its diverse leadership, composed primarily of minority, female, and LGBTQ individuals.
In a social media announcement on X (formerly Twitter), NEWCO Strategies welcomed Varghese with enthusiasm, highlighting his extensive career in various high-profile roles: “We’re thrilled to announce @moojv77 is joining NEWCO Strategies as a principal. Maju was the former COO and Sr. Advisor for the Biden 2020 campaign, executive director of the Presidential Inaugural Committee, and served in senior roles in the Biden and Obama Administrations.”
Expressing his thoughts on his new position, Varghese conveyed his excitement: “Excited to join Jess O’Connell and her team at NEWCO Strategies. Running organizations and leading teams in today’s landscape is a hard task, and I can attest that leaders are hungry for sound advice, practical solutions, and partners that can help them navigate challenges. I want to apply the lessons I’ve learned, particularly managing through difficult times, to help others.”
Before his appointment at NEWCO Strategies, Varghese held the position of Chief Operating Officer (COO) at the National Endowment for Democracy (NED), an organization dedicated to promoting democratic activities worldwide. His responsibilities included overseeing a vast team engaged in supporting the White House.
Prior to his role at NED, Varghese served as the Director of the White House Military Office and Deputy Assistant to the President. In this capacity, he led a team of approximately 3,000 military and civilian employees, responsible for providing essential services to the White House.
Varghese’s professional journey also encompassed a significant role as the Chief Operating Officer and Senior Advisor during the Biden Campaign. In this capacity, he played a pivotal role in supervising national operations, personnel matters, travel logistics, vetting processes, and compliance, a responsibility that extended from the primaries to the general election.
Maju Varghese’s academic background includes a Juris Doctor degree from Hofstra University’ Maurice A. Dean School of Law and a Bachelor of Arts in Political Science and Economics, obtained from the University of Massachusetts.
The prevalence of unexpected and added fees, encountered by consumers when purchasing airline tickets, renting a car, or even ordering takeout, is the focus of new initiatives announced by the Biden administration. Their aim is to combat these so-called “junk fees” and provide buyers with more transparency regarding their payments.
President Biden expressed his concerns at the White House, saying, “Folks are… tired of being taken advantage of, and being played for suckers.” He emphasized that while these “junk fees” may not be significant to the wealthy, they certainly matter to working-class families.
One significant move unveiled is a proposal by the Federal Trade Commission (FTC) that would prevent companies in various sectors from imposing concealed and deceptive fees. This rule would mandate sellers to disclose all essential costs upfront. The FTC could potentially impose financial penalties on companies that violate this rule. Proponents argue that this regulation will enable consumers to make more informed price comparisons and create a level playing field for businesses that are transparent about their costs.
Additionally, the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau (CFPB) has instructed banks and credit unions to offer basic information to customers, such as their account balances, without any fees. The White House further disclosed that the CFPB will introduce a separate rule later this month, compelling financial institutions to enable customers to conveniently share their data with other banks if they wish to switch.
However, the Biden administration’s actions have sparked criticism from some quarters. Neil Bradley, the executive vice president of the U.S. Chamber of Commerce, argued that the crackdown on “junk fees” would negatively impact consumers. He expressed puzzlement at the notion that the administration believes it can assist consumers by regulating the pricing of the numerous transactions occurring daily.
On the contrary, consumer advocates have lauded the administration’s efforts. They estimate that “junk fees” cost consumers more than $64 billion annually. Erin Witte, the director of consumer protection at the Consumer Federation of America, affirmed that Americans, regardless of their political affiliations, are weary of being subjected to deceitful and worthless fees. She also pointed out that these fees disproportionately affect low-income consumers and communities of color.
Chip Rogers, the president and CEO of the American Hotel & Lodging Association, announced that the organization will review the FTC rule. However, he emphasized their support for establishing a uniform standard for displaying mandatory fees within the lodging industry. This standard would apply across short-term rental platforms, where such fees are prevalent, online travel agencies, metasearch sites, and hotels.
President Biden had previously urged lawmakers to pass the Junk Fees Prevention Act in his State of the Union speech earlier this year. The proposed legislation seeks to limit the excessive fees imposed by companies.
When Satya Nadella assumed the role of Microsoft CEO in 2014, he displayed a distinct leadership approach. Rather than boasting about IQ points or intellectual achievements, he emphasized the importance of understanding people and building meaningful connections as a leader. His key mantra for effectiveness and setting himself apart from the crowd was encapsulated in just two words: emotional intelligence.
In a widely publicized event nearly a decade ago, Nadella addressed a large audience of students on the topic of their future and possibilities. During his speech, he stressed the significance of developing emotional intelligence (EQ), saying, “In the long run, EQ trumps IQ. Without being a source of energy for others, very little can be accomplished.”
Research indicates that companies that prioritize emotional intelligence in their workforce tend to experience higher levels of productivity and employee engagement compared to those that overlook this vital aspect.
Picture: Harvard
In an era where technological advancements often take center stage, the importance of emotional intelligence can sometimes be overshadowed. However, leaders like Satya Nadella have shown that emotional intelligence is not merely a desirable trait but a crucial element for achieving lasting success in the corporate landscape.
Let’s delve into several ways in which leaders and high achievers can harness emotional intelligence to enhance their own performance and create a more productive workplace environment.
1.Empower Through Active Listening
Two decades ago, I reported to an executive who possessed a high level of emotional intelligence, and I gleaned a valuable lesson that has stayed with me to this day. I was leading a team through a challenging project, and the pressure was palpable, causing tensions to run high. Within the team, there was a quieter member struggling to find their voice amid the chaos.
Instead of steamrolling ahead with his own ideas, our executive, who was also our boss, took a step back. He approached the team member and asked a simple but powerful question: “What do you think?” The impact was astonishing. The team member’s face lit up, and they began to share their valuable insights, including a brilliant solution that hadn’t been considered before. Subsequently, the project achieved resounding success, and we all imbibed a crucial lesson: Leadership is about empowering others and valuing their perspectives.
2.Lead with Authenticity and Empathy
Emotional intelligence is not synonymous with being overly sentimental or softhearted. It is about comprehending the emotions, motivations, and aspirations of the individuals you work with. It involves creating an environment where everyone feels genuinely valued and heard.
The crux of leading with emotional intelligence is to actively listen, empathize, and lead with authenticity. It also entails recognizing and managing one’s own emotions because a high-performing leader who can’t or won’t navigate their own feelings often struggles to guide a team effectively.
3.Embrace the Power of Humility
Admitting that you don’t have all the answers can be uncomfortable, especially when people expect you to provide solutions. Garry Ridge, chairman emeritus of WD-40 Company, had an unconventional perspective during his tenure as CEO. Ridge found that the three most powerful words he ever learned were “I don’t know.” As he became comfortable with not having all the answers, he started to experience personal growth and learning.
Ridge emphasizes that, “As soon as you pretend to know everything, you close yourself off from the opportunity to learn more and gain different perspectives. So, not only have I become comfortable with ‘I don’t know,’ but even more so today, I constantly ask myself, ‘Why do I believe that?’ This is because the world is changing so rapidly.”
As you reflect on your own leadership style, remember that authentic leadership is not about having all the answers but about creating a space where collective brilliance can flourish.
Satya Nadella, in his ongoing role as the leader of Microsoft, continues to demonstrate the power of emotional intelligence. His example underscores that emotional intelligence is not just a buzzword but a potent force that can shape the future of leadership in the tech industry and beyond.
The wisdom shared by Satya Nadella and other experienced leaders emphasizes the importance of emotional intelligence in today’s corporate landscape. This intangible yet powerful attribute, often overshadowed by technological advancements, plays a pivotal role in driving productivity, fostering collaboration, and shaping the future of leadership in the ever-evolving world of business.
Indian authorities have filed charges against the acclaimed author Arundhati Roy for public statements she made over a decade ago regarding the tumultuous Kashmir region, marking the latest development in the Indian government’s increasingly restrictive stance on free speech under Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s leadership.
Suman Nalwa, a spokeswoman for the New Delhi police, stated that the government had given approval for charges to be brought against Ms. Roy and Kashmiri law professor Sheikh Showkat Hussain. The charges encompass various sections of Indian law, including those related to provocative speech and the incitement of enmity between different groups.
The Lieutenant Governor of the Delhi region indicated that the government had contemplated pursuing a more severe sedition charge against Ms. Roy and Mr. Hussain in connection with a case originating from a complaint lodged in October 2010 by a right-wing Kashmiri Hindu activist against speakers at a conference on Kashmir.
However, no such sedition charge was filed, as India’s highest court is currently deliberating the validity of the colonial-era sedition law, which critics assert has been misused for decades to stifle dissent. The reason for the police’s decision to act on the activist’s complaint over a decade after its filing remains unclear.
Picture: NYT
The action taken against Ms. Roy, a prominent critic of Prime Minister Modi, and Mr. Hussain occurred shortly after New Delhi police conducted raids on the residences and offices of numerous journalists associated with an online news portal recognized for its critical stance on the Indian government.
Previously, the authorities had also targeted the organization NewsClick. However, their crackdown escalated following the publication of an article in The New York Times that revealed connections between an American tech mogul financing the website and the Chinese government.
On Tuesday, a New Delhi court denied bail to the founder of NewsClick and another individual linked to the website, ordering their detention for ten days. Both individuals, who deny any wrongdoing, face charges under the stringent Unlawful Activities Prevention Act, an anti-terrorism law. Many individuals charged under this law have spent years in detention awaiting trial.
Regarding the Kashmir conference-related case, Mr. Hussain, speaking from Kashmir, informed The New York Times that he had not received any formal communication regarding the charges. When asked for comment, Ms. Roy stated that she needed to consult with her lawyer before discussing the case.
Two other individuals accused in the activist’s complaint, Syed Ali Shah Geelani, a prominent figure in Kashmir’s separatist movement, and Syed Abdul Rahman Geelani, a former university professor, have since passed away. The two men were not related.
The conference, titled “Freedom — the Only Way,” took place in New Delhi on October 21, 2010. During that period, tensions in Muslim-majority Kashmir were running high after the death of a 17-year-old boy who was struck by a tear gas canister fired at close range by Indian security forces as he returned from a tutoring session.
The year saw a cycle of unrest in Kashmir that resulted in the deaths of approximately 120 demonstrators.
In a guest essay published in The New York Times that autumn, Ms. Roy described the turmoil, noting, “Since April, when the army killed three civilians and then passed them off as ‘terrorists,’ masked stone throwers, most of them students, have brought life in Kashmir to a grinding halt. The Indian government has retaliated with bullets, curfew, and censorship.”
In the complaint filed by the Kashmiri Hindu activist, it was alleged that several speeches at the conference, including Ms. Roy’s, had “endangered public peace and security” and that the speakers had advocated for the “separation of Kashmir from India.”
In her speech, Arundhati Roy, the Booker Prize-winning author of “The God of Small Things,” recounted an incident in which she was accosted by a television reporter who repeatedly asked her, “Is Kashmir an integral part of India?”
She responded, “Kashmir has never been an integral part of India. However assertively and frequently you ask me, even the Indian government has acknowledged that it is not an integral part of India.”
The Modi government, which assumed power four years after these events, has taken measures to bring the Kashmir region under direct control, revoking its limited autonomy and suppressing democratic principles and opposing voice
The largest Hindu temple in the United States is set to open its doors in New Jersey this Sunday. Located in Robbinsville, the 183-acre BAPS Swaminarayan Akshardham, named after its founding Hindu spiritual organization, rivals major Hindu temples in India.
Yogi Trivedi, a temple volunteer and a scholar of religion at Columbia University, marveled at the temple’s existence, saying, “I wake up every morning and scratch my eyes thinking, ‘Am I still in central New Jersey?’ It’s like being transported to another world, specifically to India.”
The temple is scheduled for official inauguration on October 8, with public access commencing on October 18. For Indian Americans and Hindu Americans, this represents a significant milestone. Trivedi noted, “This is the American Dream. The sacred geography of India and beyond is here in this one place, and you can experience, witness, and admire it all here in New Jersey. I anticipate, as a scholar of religion, that this will become a popular place of pilgrimage for Hindus from across the world.”
Construction of the temple involved 12,500 volunteers from around the world and has been in progress since 2011. However, it gained significant attention a decade later when a group of immigrant laborers filed a lawsuit against the global organization Bochasanwasi Shri Akshar Purushottam Swaminarayan Sanstha (BAPS), which operates temples worldwide. The lawsuit alleged “shocking” conditions, including forced labor, long work hours, inhospitable living conditions, and caste discrimination.
The initial complaint stated, “For these long and difficult hours of work, the workers were paid an astonishing $450 per month, and even less when Defendants took illegal deductions. Their hourly pay rate came to approximately $1.20 per hour.”
BAPS, however, made a distinction between employment and religious volunteer service, known as seva. A spokesperson for BAPS, Ronak Patel, explained, “The artisans who helped to build our mandir came to the U.S. as volunteers, not as employees. We took care of the artisans’ needs in the U.S., including travel, lodging, food, medical care, and internet and prepaid phone cards so they could stay in touch with their families in India. BAPS India also supported the artisans’ families in India, so they did not suffer financial hardship as a result of the artisans’ seva in the U.S.”
Many of the laborers who participated in the temple’s construction arrived in New Jersey from India on religious visas and belonged to the Dalit community, historically marginalized groups in South Asia’s caste system. The lawsuit claimed that temple leadership enforced the caste hierarchy at work.
The lawsuit has been put on hold, with 12 of the original 21 plaintiffs moving to dismiss their claims. BAPS Akshardham spokespeople have assured that the temple will be a place for people of all creeds and castes to gather in community.
The temple’s walls feature carvings of historical figures like Martin Luther King Jr. and Abraham Lincoln, emphasizing inclusivity. Trivedi commented, “When you come to the mandir, you will see people of all genders, all castes, and social backgrounds living, eating, praying, loving, and serving together.”
However, activists argue that the allegations still raise questions about the line between religious service and work exploitation, which particularly affects vulnerable Dalit communities.
Sunita Viswanath, a civil rights activist and co-founder of the civil rights group Hindus for Human Rights, expressed her concerns, saying, “A place of worship, a temple, is such an important space, especially for an immigrant community who’s making a home in a new country. I would want anybody who goes to the temple to really ask themselves, really do some soul searching, about going to a temple where there are such serious allegations of labor and human rights violations.”
The construction of the temple was no small feat, involving the placement of 2 million cubic feet of stone in Robbinsville Township. The temple is a cultural blend, featuring materials sourced from around the world and nods to American history.
The outside of the temple was built with non-traditional Bulgarian limestone to withstand New Jersey’s cold winters. The interior includes stone from various countries, including Greece, Italy, and India. A traditional Indian stepwell contains waters from 300 bodies in India and all 50 U.S. states. Notably, women played key roles in running the project, a rarity in temple construction.
Trivedi sees the temple’s design as representative of the diverse community that will gather there, with inclusivity reflected on the walls. He said, “That kind of inclusivity is not just talked about, it’s actually seen on the walls.”
This landmark Hindu temple in New Jersey, with its rich cultural diversity and complex history, is poised to become a significant focal point for Hindu and Indian American communities across the nation.
The largest Hindu temple in the United States is set to open its doors in New Jersey this Sunday. Located in Robbinsville, the 183-acre BAPS Swaminarayan Akshardham, named after its founding Hindu spiritual organization, rivals major Hindu temples in India.
Yogi Trivedi, a temple volunteer and a scholar of religion at Columbia University, marveled at the temple’s existence, saying, “I wake up every morning and scratch my eyes thinking, ‘Am I still in central New Jersey?’ It’s like being transported to another world, specifically to India.”
The temple is scheduled for official inauguration on October 8, with public access commencing on October 18. For Indian Americans and Hindu Americans, this represents a significant milestone. Trivedi noted, “This is the American Dream. The sacred geography of India and beyond is here in this one place, and you can experience, witness, and admire it all here in New Jersey. I anticipate, as a scholar of religion, that this will become a popular place of pilgrimage for Hindus from across the world.”
Construction of the temple involved 12,500 volunteers from around the world and has been in progress since 2011. However, it gained significant attention a decade later when a group of immigrant laborers filed a lawsuit against the global organization Bochasanwasi Shri Akshar Purushottam Swaminarayan Sanstha (BAPS), which operates temples worldwide. The lawsuit alleged “shocking” conditions, including forced labor, long work hours, inhospitable living conditions, and caste discrimination.
The initial complaint stated, “For these long and difficult hours of work, the workers were paid an astonishing $450 per month, and even less when Defendants took illegal deductions. Their hourly pay rate came to approximately $1.20 per hour.”
BAPS, however, made a distinction between employment and religious volunteer service, known as seva. A spokesperson for BAPS, Ronak Patel, explained, “The artisans who helped to build our mandir came to the U.S. as volunteers, not as employees. We took care of the artisans’ needs in the U.S., including travel, lodging, food, medical care, and internet and prepaid phone cards so they could stay in touch with their families in India. BAPS India also supported the artisans’ families in India, so they did not suffer financial hardship as a result of the artisans’ seva in the U.S.”
Many of the laborers who participated in the temple’s construction arrived in New Jersey from India on religious visas and belonged to the Dalit community, historically marginalized groups in South Asia’s caste system. The lawsuit claimed that temple leadership enforced the caste hierarchy at work.
The lawsuit has been put on hold, with 12 of the original 21 plaintiffs moving to dismiss their claims. BAPS Akshardham spokespeople have assured that the temple will be a place for people of all creeds and castes to gather in community.
The temple’s walls feature carvings of historical figures like Martin Luther King Jr. and Abraham Lincoln, emphasizing inclusivity. Trivedi commented, “When you come to the mandir, you will see people of all genders, all castes, and social backgrounds living, eating, praying, loving, and serving together.”
However, activists argue that the allegations still raise questions about the line between religious service and work exploitation, which particularly affects vulnerable Dalit communities.
Sunita Viswanath, a civil rights activist and co-founder of the civil rights group Hindus for Human Rights, expressed her concerns, saying, “A place of worship, a temple, is such an important space, especially for an immigrant community who’s making a home in a new country. I would want anybody who goes to the temple to really ask themselves, really do some soul searching, about going to a temple where there are such serious allegations of labor and human rights violations.”
The construction of the temple was no small feat, involving the placement of 2 million cubic feet of stone in Robbinsville Township. The temple is a cultural blend, featuring materials sourced from around the world and nods to American history.
The outside of the temple was built with non-traditional Bulgarian limestone to withstand New Jersey’s cold winters. The interior includes stone from various countries, including Greece, Italy, and India. A traditional Indian stepwell contains waters from 300 bodies in India and all 50 U.S. states. Notably, women played key roles in running the project, a rarity in temple construction.
Trivedi sees the temple’s design as representative of the diverse community that will gather there, with inclusivity reflected on the walls. He said, “That kind of inclusivity is not just talked about, it’s actually seen on the walls.”
This landmark Hindu temple in New Jersey, with its rich cultural diversity and complex history, is poised to become a significant focal point for Hindu and Indian American communities across the nation.
Warren Buffett, a renowned investor, has had a remarkable career marked by astounding returns. Over the span of almost six decades, from 1964 to 2022, his conglomerate, Berkshire Hathaway Inc. (NYSE: BRK), achieved an overall gain of 3,787,464%. This impressive performance significantly outshone the S&P 500, which delivered a return of 24,708% during the same period.
Buffett, known for his investment acumen, doesn’t solely rely on stocks that soar in value; he’s also a proponent of collecting dividends, often stating, “If you don’t find a way to make money while you sleep, you will work until you die.”
Many companies in Buffett’s extensive portfolio pay dividends to their shareholders. In this discussion, we’ll focus on Chevron Corp. (NYSE: CVX), the largest energy stock within Berkshire Hathaway’s holdings.
As of June 30, Berkshire Hathaway held a substantial 123,120,120 shares of Chevron. At that time, the value of this position was estimated at $19.4 billion, making Chevron the fourth-largest publicly traded holding in Berkshire’s portfolio.
The energy sector, driven by oil prices, can be quite volatile, experiencing significant price fluctuations. Chevron’s shares saw substantial gains in 2021 and 2022. However, in 2023, they faced a decline of approximately 6.7%.
Beyond the potential for capital gains through stock trading, investors can also benefit from the dividends offered by the energy giant. Chevron currently maintains a quarterly dividend rate of $1.51 per share, resulting in an annual yield of 3.7%. Given Berkshire’s substantial holding of 123,120,120 Chevron shares, this equates to a potential quarterly dividend income of $184.68 million from the company.
Picture: LinkedIn
The beauty of collecting dividends is that you don’t need to be the “Oracle of Omaha” to take advantage of opportunities like those presented by Chevron.
Growing Dividends from Chevron
In January, Chevron’s board made the decision to enhance the company’s quarterly dividend by 6%, bringing it to $1.51 per share. This increase sets Chevron on course to achieve its 36th consecutive year of boosting its annual dividend payout per share.
Chevron adheres to a quarterly distribution schedule. If an investor’s goal is to accumulate $1,000 per month from Chevron, this translates to $3,000 per quarter. To attain this income level, an investor would need to own approximately 1,986.75 shares of Chevron. This calculation is achieved by dividing the desired quarterly income of $3,000 by the per-share quarterly payout of $1.51.
Considering Chevron’s current stock price of $162.23 per share, amassing 1,986.75 shares would equate to an investment worth approximately $322,311.
For those with a more modest target of earning $200 per month, equivalent to $600 per quarter, they would require approximately 397.35 shares (calculated as $600 divided by $1.51) or an investment totaling around $64,462 in Chevron stock (computed as 397.35 shares multiplied by $162.23).
Although Chevron’s stock has recently experienced a pullback, analyst Nitin Kumar from Mizuho holds an optimistic outlook for the oil supermajor. Kumar has assigned a Buy rating to the company and set a price target of $215, which stands approximately 33% above the current stock price.
It’s important to note that stocks can exhibit considerable fluctuations, and even the most reputable analysts are not infallible. Therefore, conducting thorough research and due diligence before making investment decisions is always advisable.
Calyampudi Radhakrishna Rao, a distinguished figure in the world of statistics who played a pivotal role in shaping modern scientific data analysis, has passed away at the age of 102. Rao’s groundbreaking work, including his development of ‘information geometry’ and data-reduction techniques, has had a profound impact on a wide range of fields, from agricultural sciences and biomedical research to econometrics, industrial engineering, social sciences, and signal processing. His contributions were so influential that they were even instrumental in uncovering the Higgs boson, a significant discovery at CERN, the European particle-physics laboratory near Geneva, Switzerland.
Rao’s remarkable journey began in Hadagalli, India, where he was born. His father, a police inspector, frequently moved due to job postings until the family eventually settled in Visakhapatnam, India. Recognizing Rao’s exceptional mathematical talents, both of his parents encouraged him to pursue bachelor’s and master’s degrees in mathematics at Andhra University in Visakhapatnam.
Picture: IE
In 1941, Rao joined the Indian Statistical Institute (ISI) in Kolkata, which was founded and led by the eminent statistician P. C. Mahalanobis. At the time, the field of statistical inference was still in its formative stages. Rao embarked on a master’s course in statistics at the University of Calcutta in the same year, where he laid the groundwork for many of the data analysis tools in use today. His early work, including his master’s thesis in 1943, introduced the ‘perimeter’ test for comparing multiple experimental groups, which subsequently gave rise to the multivariate analysis of variance (MANOVA) procedure. Rao’s innovative contributions continued with the derivation of the Cramér–Rao inequality in 1943, providing a lower bound for estimating unknown parameters within a statistical population, a concept essential for fields such as medical research.
In addition to his exceptional mathematical contributions, Rao also made a notable foray into archaeology and ethnology in 1946 when he worked at the Museum of Archaeology and Ethnology at the University of Cambridge, UK. There, he analyzed measurements of ancient skulls unearthed from graves in Sudan, enabling the categorization of these remains by tribe and age. During this time, he also began his PhD studies under the guidance of the renowned statistician Ronald Fisher, one of the founding fathers of modern statistics. Rao’s work extended to mapping mouse chromosomes for genetic linkage studies, leading to statistical methodologies that are foundational in modern data analysis.
Rao’s work was not confined to academia. His statistical techniques found applications in the design of experiments and devices, including computer chips. By selecting key parameters for robust product design while minimizing costs, time, and labor, Rao’s contributions led to the development of ‘orthogonal arrays,’ which subsequently played a crucial role in Japan’s industrial quality revolution in the 1970s under the guidance of Japanese engineer Genichi Taguchi.
Returning to the ISI in 1948, Rao was appointed as a professor the following year, marking a remarkable achievement as he was not yet 29 years old. Although he had also applied for a lectureship at Cambridge, he was denied the position with the reason that “foreigners” were not typically appointed to teach English students. Nonetheless, Rao’s leadership at the ISI helped it become one of the world’s foremost statistical institutes. He served as the head of research and training and later as the director.
After his mandatory retirement in 1978, Rao moved to the United States. There, he made a significant impact on statistics programs at the University of Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, where he co-established the Center for Multivariate Analysis. His influence extended to Pennsylvania State University in State College in 1988 and, in 2010, to the University at Buffalo, New York. In 2007, the C. R. Rao Advanced Institute of Mathematics, Statistics, and Computer Science was established in Hyderabad, India, in his honor.
Among Rao’s extensive body of work, two of his books, “Advanced Statistical Methods in Biometric Research” (1952) and “Linear Statistical Inference and its Applications” (1965), stand as iconic texts. These books have played a pivotal role in training generations of statisticians around the world. Notably, just a few months before his passing, Rao received the International Prize in Statistics, becoming the fourth recipient of this prestigious award, which was established in 2017 to advance the understanding of the role of statistics in contemporary life.
Beyond his impressive contributions to the world of statistics, Rao had a passion for south Indian classical dances, photography, and gardening. He was celebrated as an exceptional teacher who instilled in his students the ability to think independently. Rao was known for his humility, soft-spoken nature, and gentle demeanor, leaving an indelible mark on the field of statistics. His loss will be deeply felt, but his legacy will endure as a source of inspiration and innovation.
A recent Gallup report reveals that religious individuals worldwide tend to exhibit more positivity, higher social support, and greater community involvement when compared to their non-religious counterparts. This comprehensive study, spanning a decade of data, highlights the complexity of measuring the well-being of religious people, and it emphasizes that the benefits of religion can vary significantly from one country to another. However, it’s essential to acknowledge that not everyone is equally interested in or receptive to the potential advantages of religious engagement.
The report, released on October 10, states, “Gallup World Poll data from 2012-2022 find, on a number of wellbeing measures, that people who are religious have better wellbeing than people who are not.”
To assess these differences, the study evaluated nine aspects of individuals’ lives, covering positive interactions, social lives, civic engagement, physical health, community basics, optimism, and more. Each of these nine indexes was scored on a scale from 0 to 100, based on responses to a series of questions.
For instance, the positive experience index included questions like “Did you smile or laugh today?” and “Were you treated with respect?” The civic engagement index inquired about charitable donations and assisting strangers, while the physical health index asked about limitations in performing typical age-related activities and the presence of physical pain. The community basics index explored housing and infrastructure.
Religious individuals scored higher than their non-religious counterparts on five of Gallup’s indexes: social life (77.6 compared to 73.7 for non-religious individuals), positive experience (69 to 65), community basics (59.7 to 55.6), optimism (49.4 to 48.4), and civic engagement (35.8 to 31).
In two indexes, religious and non-religious individuals showed similar scores: the “life evaluation” index, which assesses whether individuals are thriving or suffering, and their local economic confidence.
However, religious individuals scored lower on two other indexes: negative experience and physical health.
Notably, these differences between religious and non-religious individuals were most pronounced in highly religious countries. Even small variations can have significant global implications. The report states, “Each one-point difference in index scores between religious and nonreligious people represents an effect for an estimated 40 million adults worldwide.”
For example, the four-point difference in the Positive Experience Index means that approximately 160 million more adults globally have positive experiences due to their religious affiliation.
The report suggests that religion and spirituality might serve as valuable resources for addressing the mental health crisis prevalent in many countries. However, the report also highlights the declining interest in and engagement with religion.
Gallup partnered with the Radiant Foundation for this report. The Radiant Foundation is associated with The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints and promotes a positive view of religion and spirituality.
Jeff Jones, Gallup’s senior editor, commented on the complexity of quantifying the impact of religion and spirituality on well-being, especially as religious landscapes change and spiritual practices evolve. He noted, “With the changing nature of religious landscapes and spiritual practice, it can make quantitative measurement amid the changes challenging, as the traditional forms of spirituality — namely, attending formal religious services, are becoming less common, and people are seeking other ways to fulfill their spiritual needs.”
The report also cites several factors contributing to the decline of religious engagement around the world. These include growing polarization, which pits religious and non-religious individuals against each other, with the latter sometimes viewing the former as a threat. Religious groups, particularly from larger faith traditions, may wield their power in ways that others perceive as harmful.
The report suggests that “religious groups and individuals — particularly from the dominant religious group in a society — who are hostile to other religious groups may promote a cultural context that is harmful to the wellbeing of those outside the group. Resentment toward the dominant group may also tune people out to their messages, both those that are harmful (out-group animosity) but also that are helpful (serving others).”
The Gallup report provides valuable insights into the impact of religion on individuals’ well-being and the intricate dynamics at play in various countries. It underscores the potential benefits of religious engagement while acknowledging the challenges posed by the evolving landscape of spirituality and the declining interest in religion worldwide.
Republicans launched an attack on Robert F. Kennedy Jr. on Monday as the prominent environmental attorney and anti-vaccine activist officially announced his independent bid for the White House. This move has stirred concerns among conservatives that Kennedy, a former Democrat, could siphon votes away from former President Donald Trump in the 2024 election.
The Republican National Committee and Trump’s campaign wasted no time in critiquing Kennedy’s liberal background. Meanwhile, national Democrats remained silent on the matter as Kennedy made it clear in a speech in Philadelphia that he was distancing himself from both political parties.
Trump spokesperson Steven Cheung issued a statement cautioning voters not to be misled by those who feign conservative values. Cheung described Kennedy’s campaign as a “vanity project for a liberal Kennedy looking to cash in on his family’s name.”
This strong reaction highlights the uncertainty surrounding Kennedy’s much-anticipated decision to run as an independent. While it is likely to impact the 2024 race, which is shaping up to be a rematch between Trump and President Joe Biden, the exact implications remain unclear.
Kennedy, a member of one of the most renowned families in Democratic politics, initially pursued an improbable primary bid and surprisingly held more favorability among Republicans than Democrats. Even Trump himself had expressed his positive opinion of Kennedy just two weeks prior, stating, “I like him a lot. I’ve known him for a long time.”
Both Biden and Trump’s allies had, at times, questioned whether Kennedy would act as a spoiler against their respective candidates. Kennedy acknowledged both sides’ concerns, stating, “The truth is, they’re both right. My intention is to spoil it for both of them.”
Speaking from Philadelphia’s Independence Mall, where America’s founding documents were adopted, Kennedy emphasized his desire to distance himself from either political party. He spoke of a “rising tide of discontent” in the nation and expressed his aim to make a “new declaration of independence” from corporations, the media, and the two major political parties.
Hundreds of supporters, holding signs with slogans like “Declare your independence,” and chanting “RFK, all the way!” were enthusiastic about his decision. His supporters comprised a diverse mix of disillusioned Democrats, Trump voters seeking change, and political outsiders whose beliefs did not align with any single party. They believed that Kennedy could bring them together.
Peter Pantazis, a 40-year-old business owner from Delaware, expressed his optimism, saying, “He’s going to win. I’ve been praying that he’s going to decentralize the campaign, get away from the party system, and actually be the candidate of the people for the people. And that’s what he announced today.”
Brent Snyder, a disabled veteran from south Philadelphia, stated, “The last couple of years I’ve been noticing the Republican Party’s been going a way I didn’t like. Not that I agree with everything that’s happening to Trump, but I think right now he has more baggage than his country needs. The division right now is just terrible. We need someone to bring both sides together to make us work.”
The atmosphere among the crowd was filled with joy, hope, and occasionally, the faint scent of marijuana. Kennedy invoked historical figures like John Adams and George Washington to make a case for unity and warned against the pitfalls of partisan politics.
However, Kennedy’s independent campaign faces significant challenges in competing with the well-funded, experienced campaigns of Trump and Biden. During his announcement, there was a brief delay when he found that his speech was loaded upside-down in the teleprompter.
Kennedy’s decision to run independently comes shortly after progressive activist Cornel West abandoned his Green Party bid in favor of an independent presidential run. Additionally, the centrist group No Labels is actively working to secure ballot access for an unnamed candidate.
Recognizing the risk that Kennedy might draw votes away from Republicans, Trump’s allies have begun circulating opposition research aimed at undermining his support among conservative voters. The Republican National Committee released a fact sheet titled “Radical DEMOCRAT RFK Jr.” that highlighted instances of Kennedy’s support for liberal politicians and ideas, as well as his endorsement of conspiracy theories related to COVID-19 and past election claims.
On the other hand, Biden’s allies have largely dismissed Kennedy’s primary campaign as unserious. When asked for comment before the announcement, a Democratic National Committee spokesman responded with an eye-roll emoji. The DNC declined to comment on Monday.
Four of Kennedy’s eight surviving siblings issued a joint statement denouncing his candidacy, expressing concern about the potential harm it could cause to the country. They emphasized that while Bobby shares their family name, his values, vision, and judgment differ significantly from theirs.
Tony Lyons, co-founder and co-chairman of American Values 2024, a super PAC supporting Kennedy, dismissed these comments as part of a strategy to discredit him. He pointed out that disagreements within families are a natural part of democracy.
While Kennedy has historically identified as a Democrat and often invoked the legacies of his late father, Sen. Robert F. Kennedy, and his uncle, President John F. Kennedy, on the campaign trail, he has also developed relationships with far-right figures in recent years. He appeared on a channel associated with Sandy Hook conspiracy theorist Alex Jones and headlined an event on the ReAwaken America Tour, organized by Trump’s former national security adviser Michael Flynn.
Polls indicate that Kennedy is more favorably viewed by Republicans than Democrats. Some far-right conservatives have supported him for his fringe views, including his vocal distrust of COVID-19 vaccines, despite scientific evidence demonstrating their safety and effectiveness in preventing severe disease and death.
Kennedy’s anti-vaccine organization, Children’s Health Defense, is currently involved in a lawsuit against several news organizations, including The Associated Press, alleging antitrust violations related to their actions in countering misinformation about COVID-19 and vaccines. Kennedy had temporarily stepped away from the group upon announcing his presidential run, but he is listed as one of its attorneys in the lawsuit.
Google Cloud unveiled new AI-driven search capabilities designed to assist healthcare professionals in swiftly retrieving accurate clinical information from various medical records. The healthcare sector houses extensive valuable data, but its scattered storage across multiple systems and formats can be an obstacle for clinicians. Google Cloud’s innovative search tool enables doctors to extract data from clinical notes, scanned documents, and electronic health records, consolidating it into a single accessible location. This innovation is expected to significantly save time and enhance efficiency for healthcare workers.
Lisa O’Malley, Senior Director of Product Management for Cloud AI at Google Cloud, highlighted the advantages of this technology, saying, “While it should save time to be able to do that search, it should also prevent frustration on behalf of clinicians and [make] sure that they get to an answer easier.”
With these new capabilities, healthcare professionals can bypass the cumbersome process of sifting through separate notes, faxes, and electronic health records to obtain patient histories. Instead, they can perform specific searches like “What medications has this patient taken in the last 12 months?” and access the relevant information seamlessly.
Furthermore, Google’s search features have broader applications, including accurate billing code assignment and assessing patient eligibility for clinical trials. To address concerns about data accuracy, the technology can trace and link information back to its original source within an organization’s internal data, mitigating doubts about AI-generated responses.
Picture: Bloomberg
These search capabilities are particularly valuable in the context of the healthcare industry, where staffing shortages and excessive administrative work are prevalent. A 2016 study sponsored by the American Medical Association revealed that for every hour physicians spent with patients, they dedicated an additional two hours to administrative tasks. This study also indicated that physicians spent an extra one to two hours on clerical work outside of their regular working hours, commonly referred to as “pajama time.” Additionally, a January 2022 survey by Medscape reported that 53% of physicians experienced burnout, up from 42% in 2018.
Google aims to alleviate these burdens by reducing the time clinicians spend searching through records and databases. Lisa O’Malley expressed the company’s commitment to benefiting patients by making healthcare processes more efficient, stating, “Anything that Google can do by applying our search technologies, our health-care technologies and research capabilities to make the journey of the clinicians and health-care providers and payers more quick, more efficient, saving them cost, I think ultimately benefits us as patients.”
The new search functionalities will be accessible to health and life sciences organizations through Google’s Vertex AI Search platform, an extension of the existing Healthcare API and Healthcare Data Engine products. Aashima Gupta, Global Director of Health Care Strategy and Solutions at Google Cloud, emphasized the importance of seamlessly integrating these capabilities into clinicians’ workflows, ensuring they do not disrupt established routines.
Recognizing the healthcare industry’s historical reluctance to embrace new technology, Google has prioritized providing solutions that are user-friendly and unobtrusive to healthcare workers. Gupta stressed that they are cautious not to introduce friction into healthcare professionals’ daily workflows while empowering them with technology.
While customers can sign up for early access to Vertex AI Search for healthcare and life sciences, Google Cloud has already conducted tests with healthcare organizations such as Mayo Clinic, Hackensack Meridian Health, and Highmark Health.
Mayo Clinic, for example, is initially employing the Vertex AI Search tools for administrative purposes rather than clinical care. Cris Ross, Mayo’s Chief Information Officer, emphasized the organization’s cautious approach, stating that they will only integrate these tools into patient care when they are confident of their readiness.
In the future, Mayo Clinic envisions leveraging Vertex AI Search to assist nurses in summarizing lengthy surgical notes, managing complex medical histories, and rapidly answering specific patient-related queries. However, the organization is taking a gradual approach to assess where Google’s AI solutions can be most beneficial.
Richard Clarke, Chief Analytics Officer at Highmark Health, reported a positive initial response to the search tools within the organization, with more than 200 use-case ideas in the backlog. However, similar to Mayo Clinic, Highmark Health recognizes the challenge of prioritizing and scaling the technology while building trust among employees.
Despite these promising early signs, Google Cloud remains cautious in its deployment strategy, focusing on small-scale implementation with dedicated support. The aim is to ensure that the technology aligns with the unique needs and workflows of healthcare providers.
It’s important to note that Google Cloud does not access customer data for training models, and the service complies with the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) to safeguard patient data.
Aashima Gupta, Global Director of Health Care Strategy and Solutions at Google Cloud, expressed excitement about the potential of Google’s tools to create a more comprehensive and cohesive healthcare experience. She highlighted the role of AI in connecting the dots from a patient’s perspective, making practical use cases in healthcare more feasible.
Google Cloud’s introduction of AI-driven search capabilities has the potential to streamline healthcare workflows, reduce administrative burdens on clinicians, and enhance the overall patient experience. By making it easier for healthcare professionals to access and utilize critical clinical information, Google aims to contribute to the efficiency and effectiveness of the healthcare industry while respecting established workflows and data security standards.
What if a single phrase could change the course of your relationship?
The language and the words you use when you talk with your partner always matter. They are at the core of how successful your relationship is gonna be — they can literally make it or break it.
“But it’s easy to fall into the trap of only seeing what your partner is not doing. You develop a narrative where you’re the one putting in all the effort, and you start to believe it’s true.”
We take the things our partners do for us for granted
We say “thank you” when our colleague or friend brings us a cup of coffee or holds the door for us, but when our partners do the same thing, we keep our gratitude silent.
Think about all the small and thoughtful gestures you and your partner do for each other. For example, you might make a cup of tea for them every morning. They, in turn, might cook your favorite meal every time you’re feeling down.
How often do you say “thank you” to each other?
The thing is, most of us take the little things our partners do for granted and act as if saying “thank you” should be reserved for some special occasions. Over time, we even forget how important saying “thank you” really is.
And it’s really important. Research has shown that romantic partners who express gratitude are more than three times less likely to break up. Another study suggests that individuals who feel appreciated by their partners have better-functioning relationships and are more resilient to internal and external stressors.
How to open a cycle of appreciation and gratitude
When it comes to relationships, “thank you” is the most under-appreciated and under-used phrase.
Saying “thank you” to your partner is like saying “I appreciate you”. You don’t always need grand gestures or big love words to show your appreciation. Those two “humble” words work their magic.
Here are some situations where you or your partner (probably) don’t say thank you to each other but should:
With every little thing you do for each other (making a cup of coffee every morning, washing the dishes when it’s not one’s turn, or bringing home one’s favorite snack).
When you receive a genuine compliment (say “thank you” instead of deflecting the praise by saying something like “oh, it’s nothing”).
When one of you shows patience (e.g., when you run late, or when your partner is having a tantrum).
When one of you actively listens and gives the other one their undivided attention (say “thank you for listening”).
When you support each other, especially in times of need (say “thank you for being there with me when I was going through “X thing”).
Expressing gratitude to your partner might be the single best way to maintain a high-quality relationship.
You don’t have to go around saying thank you to each other 10 times a day, but you should say it often to make each other feel valued and appreciated.
It goes without saying that a good partner should be supportive and considerate but that doesn’t mean you should take the things they do for you for granted — and vice versa.
Every little thing one of you does for the other takes thoughtfulness, time, and energy, and none of you should ever feel your actions go unnoticed and under-appreciated.
Silent gratitude sucks. Be vocal. Say “thank you” more often. A cycle of mutual appreciation and gratitude can work wonders for your relationship.
(Margaret Pan is a freelance writer who writes to help others find love for others and themselves. This article originally appeared on YourTango)
Prof. Sujata Gadkar-Wilcox, associate professor of legal studies and chair of justice and law at the Quinipiac University has been appointed by Connecticut Gov. Ned Lamont as a Commissioner and Member of the Connecticut Commission on Human Rights and Opportunities (CHRO).
Prof. Sujata Gadkar-Wilcox is Chair of the Department of Justice and Law, and Associate Professor of Legal Studies at Quinnipiac University. She is also Executive Director of the Oxford Consortium for Human Rights and a Fulbright-Nehru Scholar.
Gadkar-Wilcox expressed interest in the Commission on Human Rights and Opportunities (CHRO) years ago and was notified when a seat became available. She intends to use her experience in this position as a professor to benefit her students.
“I teach my students to think about the way in which what we learn in the classroom can be utilized outside of the classroom,” said Gadkar-Wilcox. “I believe my position at the CHRO will provide me with new opportunities to learn how nondiscrimination laws in employment, housing and public accommodation are enforced in practice. I look forward to taking this knowledge back to my students and connecting it back to my own research in human rights and constitutional law.”
The goal of the commission is to eliminate discrimination through civil and human rights law enforcement and to establish equal opportunity and justice for all persons within the state, through advocacy and education. Gadkar-Wilcox’s new role entails overseeing the work of the regional staff offices, which receive and resolve cases from individuals who believe they have suffered illegal discrimination. She will also attend monthly meetings and work on compliance, enforcement and monitoring.
Her time in the legal studies field began as a litigation associate at a major law firm in New York in 2005 after graduating from law school. Gadkar-Wilcox subsequently became the director of a non-profit legal education organization to pursue her commitment to public interest law and then she came to Quinnipiac in 2011. She has served as the executive director of the Oxford Consortium for Human Rights for many years, too.
Programs at Quinnipiac, such as the global engagement fellows program, enable students to take the principles they learn in the classroom and build collaborative partnerships with community organizations, as well as show students how the law can serve as a tool for social justice. Gadkar-Wilcox supports and vouches for this program, as it is her deep passion to connect students with local communities.
Now, as she kickstarts her time at the CHRO, she will be able to make a difference both on an academic and state level, using her decades of research and work as support, she said. “As a South Asian woman, it is important to represent a different perspective on the CHRO and in public life that does not always get the same amount of visibility,” said Gadkar-Wilcox. “It is an honor and a privilege to apply my own academic training in a public capacity and to represent Quinnipiac and the South Asian community in this role.”
The verdict is in, and it appears the Moon is not composed of green cheese, as the age-old saying humorously suggested. An extensive investigation published in May has yielded intriguing insights into the Moon’s composition. It turns out that the inner core of the Moon is a solid sphere with a density similar to that of iron. This discovery has the potential to resolve a long-standing debate regarding the Moon’s inner core, shedding light on its history and, by extension, the history of the Solar System.
A team led by astronomer Arthur Briaud from the French National Centre for Scientific Research in France presented their findings. They asserted, “Our results question the evolution of the Moon’s magnetic field thanks to its demonstration of the existence of the inner core and support a global mantle overturn scenario that brings substantial insights on the timeline of the lunar bombardment in the first billion years of the Solar System.”
To gain insight into the interior composition of celestial bodies within the Solar System, scientists typically rely on seismic data. By analyzing the way acoustic waves generated by seismic events travel through and interact with materials inside planets or moons, researchers can create detailed interior maps of these objects.
In the case of the Moon, seismic data collected during the Apollo missions has been available, but its resolution was insufficient for accurately determining the state of the Moon’s inner core. While the presence of a fluid outer core was known, the exact nature of the Moon’s core remained a subject of debate, with models proposing both a solid inner core and an entirely fluid core appearing to fit the available Apollo data.
To definitively settle this question, Briaud and his team compiled data from various space missions and lunar laser ranging experiments to create a comprehensive profile of several lunar characteristics. These included the extent of the Moon’s deformation caused by its gravitational interactions with Earth, variations in its distance from Earth, and its overall density.
The researchers then conducted modeling experiments involving different core compositions to determine which one aligned most closely with the observed data. Their analysis yielded several significant findings.
Firstly, the models that best matched the known properties of the Moon suggested active overturn processes occurring deep within the lunar mantle. This phenomenon involves denser material inside the Moon moving toward its center, while less dense material rises upward. This activity has long been proposed as a potential explanation for the presence of certain elements in lunar volcanic regions, and the team’s research adds further evidence in favor of this hypothesis.
Additionally, the study revealed that the lunar core closely resembles that of Earth, featuring an outer fluid layer and a solid inner core. According to their modeling, the outer core has a radius of approximately 362 kilometers (225 miles), while the inner core has a radius of around 258 kilometers (160 miles). This inner core’s density was estimated to be approximately 7,822 kilograms per cubic meter, remarkably close to that of iron.
Interestingly, in 2011, a team led by NASA Marshall planetary scientist Renee Weber arrived at a similar conclusion using advanced seismological techniques applied to Apollo mission data. They identified evidence of a solid inner core with a radius of approximately 240 kilometers and a density of about 8,000 kilograms per cubic meter. Briaud and his team view their findings as confirmation of these earlier results, forming a compelling case for the presence of an Earth-like core within the Moon.
The implications of this discovery extend to the Moon’s evolution. It is known that shortly after its formation, the Moon possessed a robust magnetic field, which began to decline approximately 3.2 billion years ago. The existence and composition of the lunar core are closely linked to the origin and eventual disappearance of this magnetic field. Understanding these factors could provide valuable insights into the Moon’s history and its magnetic past.
As humanity looks forward to returning to the Moon in the near future, seismic verification of these findings may not be far off. This exciting revelation about the Moon’s inner core composition brings us one step closer to unraveling the mysteries of our celestial neighbor and the broader history of our Solar System.
Google Cloud unveiled new AI-driven search capabilities designed to assist healthcare professionals in swiftly retrieving accurate clinical information from various medical records. The healthcare sector houses extensive valuable data, but its scattered storage across multiple systems and formats can be an obstacle for clinicians. Google Cloud’s innovative search tool enables doctors to extract data from clinical notes, scanned documents, and electronic health records, consolidating it into a single accessible location. This innovation is expected to significantly save time and enhance efficiency for healthcare workers.
Lisa O’Malley, Senior Director of Product Management for Cloud AI at Google Cloud, highlighted the advantages of this technology, saying, “While it should save time to be able to do that search, it should also prevent frustration on behalf of clinicians and [make] sure that they get to an answer easier.”
With these new capabilities, healthcare professionals can bypass the cumbersome process of sifting through separate notes, faxes, and electronic health records to obtain patient histories. Instead, they can perform specific searches like “What medications has this patient taken in the last 12 months?” and access the relevant information seamlessly.
Furthermore, Google’s search features have broader applications, including accurate billing code assignment and assessing patient eligibility for clinical trials. To address concerns about data accuracy, the technology can trace and link information back to its original source within an organization’s internal data, mitigating doubts about AI-generated responses.
These search capabilities are particularly valuable in the context of the healthcare industry, where staffing shortages and excessive administrative work are prevalent. A 2016 study sponsored by the American Medical Association revealed that for every hour physicians spent with patients, they dedicated an additional two hours to administrative tasks. This study also indicated that physicians spent an extra one to two hours on clerical work outside of their regular working hours, commonly referred to as “pajama time.” Additionally, a January 2022 survey by Medscape reported that 53% of physicians experienced burnout, up from 42% in 2018.
Google aims to alleviate these burdens by reducing the time clinicians spend searching through records and databases. Lisa O’Malley expressed the company’s commitment to benefiting patients by making healthcare processes more efficient, stating, “Anything that Google can do by applying our search technologies, our health-care technologies and research capabilities to make the journey of the clinicians and health-care providers and payers more quick, more efficient, saving them cost, I think ultimately benefits us as patients.”
The new search functionalities will be accessible to health and life sciences organizations through Google’s Vertex AI Search platform, an extension of the existing Healthcare API and Healthcare Data Engine products. Aashima Gupta, Global Director of Health Care Strategy and Solutions at Google Cloud, emphasized the importance of seamlessly integrating these capabilities into clinicians’ workflows, ensuring they do not disrupt established routines.
Recognizing the healthcare industry’s historical reluctance to embrace new technology, Google has prioritized providing solutions that are user-friendly and unobtrusive to healthcare workers. Gupta stressed that they are cautious not to introduce friction into healthcare professionals’ daily workflows while empowering them with technology.
While customers can sign up for early access to Vertex AI Search for healthcare and life sciences, Google Cloud has already conducted tests with healthcare organizations such as Mayo Clinic, Hackensack Meridian Health, and Highmark Health.
Mayo Clinic, for example, is initially employing the Vertex AI Search tools for administrative purposes rather than clinical care. Cris Ross, Mayo’s Chief Information Officer, emphasized the organization’s cautious approach, stating that they will only integrate these tools into patient care when they are confident of their readiness.
Picture: AliTech
In the future, Mayo Clinic envisions leveraging Vertex AI Search to assist nurses in summarizing lengthy surgical notes, managing complex medical histories, and rapidly answering specific patient-related queries. However, the organization is taking a gradual approach to assess where Google’s AI solutions can be most beneficial.
Richard Clarke, Chief Analytics Officer at Highmark Health, reported a positive initial response to the search tools within the organization, with more than 200 use-case ideas in the backlog. However, similar to Mayo Clinic, Highmark Health recognizes the challenge of prioritizing and scaling the technology while building trust among employees.
Despite these promising early signs, Google Cloud remains cautious in its deployment strategy, focusing on small-scale implementation with dedicated support. The aim is to ensure that the technology aligns with the unique needs and workflows of healthcare providers.
It’s important to note that Google Cloud does not access customer data for training models, and the service complies with the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) to safeguard patient data.
Aashima Gupta, Global Director of Health Care Strategy and Solutions at Google Cloud, expressed excitement about the potential of Google’s tools to create a more comprehensive and cohesive healthcare experience. She highlighted the role of AI in connecting the dots from a patient’s perspective, making practical use cases in healthcare more feasible.
Google Cloud’s introduction of AI-driven search capabilities has the potential to streamline healthcare workflows, reduce administrative burdens on clinicians, and enhance the overall patient experience. By making it easier for healthcare professionals to access and utilize critical clinical information, Google aims to contribute to the efficiency and effectiveness of the healthcare industry while respecting established workflows and data security standards.
For centuries, Tibetan Buddhism has been guided by the Dalai Lama, an 88-year-old spiritual leader who sought refuge in India in 1959 and has since lived in exile. However, Beijing views the Dalai Lama as a separatist figure and insists that only the Communist Party, an avowedly atheist organization, possesses the authority to designate his next reincarnation, as well as that of other prominent lamas. This control over religious leadership is part of China’s strategy to diminish the Dalai Lama’s influence in Tibet and suppress any challenges to the Communist Party’s dominance. As the Dalai Lama advances in age, tensions escalate over the eventual struggle between Tibetan exiles and Beijing for the legitimate succession of his reincarnation.
Mongolia’s Complicated Role in the Tibetan Buddhist Leadership
Mongolia plays a pivotal role in this complex narrative due to the significant following the Dalai Lama enjoys within its borders. Nearly half of Mongolia’s 3.4 million population identifies as Buddhist. The roots of Tibetan Buddhism in Mongolia run deep, with a history spanning over seven centuries. Nevertheless, the faith faced severe suppression for more than seven decades during Mongolia’s socialist rule, which began in 1924. The resurgence of Buddhism only occurred following democratic reforms in the 1990s.
The veneration of the Dalai Lama has created a challenging situation for the Mongolian government. Mongolia heavily relies on China for virtually all its trade, which puts them in a vulnerable position. Beijing responded to the Dalai Lama’s 2016 visit to Mongolia by closing border crossings, imposing tariffs, and canceling bilateral talks, signaling the consequences of any association with the spiritual leader in the eyes of China.
Mongolia’s Spiritual Leader: The Bogd
The spiritual leader of Tibetan Buddhism in Mongolia is known as the Bogd, formally addressed as the Jebtsundamba Khutughtu. This position boasts a rich history dating back nearly four centuries to the descendants of the Mongol emperor Kublai Khan. Currently, an 8-year-old boy represents the 10th incarnation of the Bogd, succeeding the previous one who passed away in 2012.
Although Tibetan Buddhism does not adhere as rigidly to hierarchical structures as some organized religions, such as the Roman Catholic Church, the Bogd holds one of the most esteemed senior positions in Tibetan Buddhism, ranking after the Dalai Lama and the Panchen Lama. Notably, the Panchen Lama, who was appointed by the Dalai Lama in 1995, was abducted by China and replaced with a monk chosen by Beijing, illustrating China’s aggressive interference in Tibetan religious affairs.
The Enigmatic Process of Lama Selection
The selection process for high lamas is shrouded in mystery. Tibetan Buddhist leaders claim to follow an ancient tradition involving mystical visions and astrology to guide their search. Candidates are subjected to tests to determine if they exhibit qualities considered exceptionally holy. In the case of the boy chosen as the next Bogd, religious officials disclosed that he underwent a secret test as a toddler and successfully identified personal artifacts belonging to the previous Bogd.
Throughout history, this process has been criticized for being influenced by politics and, at times, corruption. In the late 18th century, Emperor Qianlong of China attempted to address these concerns by introducing a system where lots were drawn from a golden urn to select lamas. The Chinese Communist Party has revived this “golden urn” system as part of its efforts to control the appointment of senior monks. However, this system is widely viewed as illegitimate by those outside China.
The intricate relationship between Mongolia, Tibetan Buddhism, and China reflects the challenges and complexities surrounding religious leadership, succession, and external influence. As the Dalai Lama’s advancing age raises questions about his reincarnation, the dynamics between these key players will continue to shape the future of Tibetan Buddhism in the region.
Throughout history, the lens of prominent photographers captured Mahatma Gandhi, but perhaps the most iconic image of him is the one adorning Indian currency notes. As the Father of the Nation, it might seem natural for him to be featured on India’s national currency, but this honor was conferred upon him several decades after India gained independence in 1947. In 1996, Gandhi’s image became a permanent fixture on all denominations of legal banknotes issued by the Reserve Bank of India (RBI), the nation’s central bank entrusted with overseeing India’s banking system. As we approach Gandhi’s birth anniversary, we delve into the origins of this portrait, the symbol it replaced, and the suggestions that have emerged for featuring other iconic figures on Indian banknotes.
The Origins of Gandhi’s Image on Indian Currency
The portrait of Gandhi on Indian banknotes is not a caricature; rather, it is a cut-out of a photograph taken in 1946, where he stands alongside British politician Lord Frederick William Pethick-Lawrence. This particular photograph was chosen because it captured Gandhi with a suitable smile, which was then mirrored to create the iconic portrait. Interestingly, the identities of the photographer behind this image and the person who selected it remain shrouded in mystery.
The responsibility of designing Indian rupee notes lies with the RBI’s Department of Currency Management, which must obtain approval for its designs from the central bank and the Union government. According to Section 25 of the RBI Act, 1934, the central government has the authority to approve the “design, form, and material of banknotes” based on recommendations made by the central board.
When Gandhi First Appeared on INR Notes
Gandhi’s first appearance on Indian currency occurred in 1969 when a special series was issued to commemorate his 100th birth anniversary. These notes, bearing the signature of RBI Governor LK Jha, depicted Gandhi against the backdrop of the Sevagram Ashram.
In October 1987, a series of Rs 500 currency notes featuring Gandhi was introduced.
The Banknotes of Independent India
Following India’s declaration of independence on August 15, 1947, the RBI initially continued to issue notes featuring King George VI from the colonial period. However, this situation changed in 1949 when the government of India introduced a new design for the 1-rupee note. In this new design, King George was replaced with a symbol of the Lion Capital of Ashoka Pillar at Sarnath.
The RBI museum website shares insights from that era, noting that there were deliberations about selecting symbols for independent India. Initially, the idea was to replace the King’s portrait with that of Mahatma Gandhi. Design proposals were even prepared for this purpose. However, the consensus eventually shifted towards choosing the Lion Capital at Sarnath in place of Gandhi’s portrait. The new banknote designs largely followed the earlier patterns.
Consequently, in 1950, the first Republic of India banknotes were issued in denominations of Rs 2, 5, 10, and 100, all bearing the Lion Capital watermark. Over the years, higher denomination legal tenders were introduced, with motifs on the back of the notes evolving to reflect various aspects of new India, from wildlife motifs such as tigers and sambar deer to depictions of agricultural activities like farming and tea leaf plucking in the 1970s. The 1980s saw an emphasis on symbols of scientific and technological advancements as well as Indian art forms, with the Aryabhatta satellite, farm mechanization, and the Konark Wheel featuring on various denominations.
Gandhi’s Portrait Becomes a Permanent Feature
By the 1990s, the RBI recognized the need to enhance the security features of currency notes due to advancements in reprographic techniques such as digital printing, scanning, photography, and xerography. It was believed that inanimate objects would be easier to forge compared to a human face. Consequently, Gandhi was chosen as the new face of Indian currency due to his universal appeal. In 1996, the RBI introduced the ‘Mahatma Gandhi Series’ to replace the former Ashoka Pillar banknotes. This series also incorporated several security features, including a windowed security thread, latent image, and intaglio features designed for the visually impaired.
In 2016, the ‘Mahatma Gandhi New Series’ of banknotes was announced by the RBI, retaining Gandhi’s portrait while adding the Swachh Bharat Abhiyan logo and additional security features on the reverse side.
Demands for Inclusion of Others on Banknotes
In recent years, there have been calls to feature figures other than Gandhi on Indian currency notes. In October 2022, Delhi Chief Minister Arvind Kejriwal appealed to the Prime Minister and the Union government to include the images of Lord Ganesha and goddess Lakshmi on currency notes.
Similarly, in 2014, there were suggestions to include Nobel Laureate Rabindranath Tagore and former President APJ Abdul Kalam on currency notes. However, then Finance Minister Arun Jaitley, addressing the Lok Sabha, revealed that the RBI had rejected these proposals in favor of retaining Gandhi’s portrait. He stated, “The Committee decided that no other personality could better represent the ethos of India than Mahatma Gandhi.”
Furthermore, then RBI Governor Raghuram Rajan emphasized that while India had many great personalities, Gandhi stood out above all others, and other choices could potentially be controversial.
The journey of Mahatma Gandhi’s image on Indian currency is a reflection of India’s evolving identity and the significance attributed to its national icons. While there have been calls to diversify the figures featured on banknotes, Gandhi’s enduring presence continues to symbolize the ethos of India.
Pope Francis has responded to a challenge posed by five conservative cardinals regarding church teachings on homosexuality, indicating the potential for blessings of same-sex unions under certain conditions. The Vatican recently released a letter, dated July 11, written by Pope Francis in response to a set of five questions, or “dubia,” raised by the cardinals a day earlier. In the letter, Pope Francis suggests that the possibility of blessing same-sex unions could be explored, provided it does not confuse such blessings with sacramental marriages.
New Ways Ministry, an organization advocating for LGBTQ+ Catholics, considers this letter a significant step forward in making LGBTQ+ Catholics feel more welcome in the church and a step away from their marginalization.
While the Vatican maintains that marriage is a sacred bond between a man and a woman, it has traditionally opposed same-sex marriage. However, Pope Francis has previously expressed support for civil laws granting legal benefits to same-sex couples. In certain parts of Europe, Catholic priests have been blessing same-sex unions without facing reprimand from the Vatican.
The Pope’s response to the cardinals represents a shift from the Vatican’s official stance. In a 2021 explanatory note, the Congregation for the Doctrine of the Faith stated that the church could not bless gay unions because “God cannot bless sin.”
In his recent letter, Pope Francis restated that marriage is a union between a man and a woman. However, in response to the cardinals’ inquiry about homosexual unions and blessings, he emphasized the importance of “pastoral charity,” which requires patience and understanding. He noted that priests should not merely reject or exclude but should consider forms of blessing requested by individuals that do not convey a mistaken view of marriage.
Pope Francis explained that when a blessing is requested, it is a plea for God’s assistance, a desire to live a better life, and trust in a benevolent higher power. While there are situations that are objectively “not morally acceptable,” he stressed that “pastoral charity” requires treating people as sinners who may not bear full responsibility for their circumstances.
He further advised that dioceses and bishops’ conferences need not establish fixed norms or protocols regarding this issue. Instead, it can be addressed on a case-by-case basis, recognizing that the life of the church operates beyond mere regulations.
Francis DeBernardo, executive director of New Ways Ministry, welcomed the Pope’s stance, stating that allowing pastoral ministers to bless same-gender couples implies recognition within the church that holy love can exist between same-gender couples. He viewed this as a significant step towards greater equality for LGBTQ+ Catholics.
The five cardinals, all of whom are conservative prelates from various parts of the world, had posed several challenges to Pope Francis regarding church teachings on homosexuality, women’s ordination, papal authority, and other matters in their letter. They made this material public just two days before the commencement of a major three-week synod at the Vatican, where LGBTQ+ Catholics and their role in the church were among the discussion topics.
Picture: ABC
These cardinals, who are among Pope Francis’ most vocal critics, are all retired and belong to the doctrinaire generation of cardinals appointed by St. John Paul II or Pope Benedict XVI. The signatories included Cardinals Walter Brandmueller of Germany, a former Vatican historian; Raymond Burke of the United States, who was removed by Pope Francis from his position as head of the Vatican supreme court; Juan Sandoval of Mexico, the retired archbishop of Guadalajara; Robert Sarah of Guinea, the retired head of the Vatican’s liturgy office; and Joseph Zen, the retired archbishop of Hong Kong.
Some of these cardinals had previously signed a set of “dubia” in 2016 challenging Pope Francis’ position on allowing divorced and civilly remarried couples to receive Communion. At that time, they were concerned that his stance contradicted the church’s teaching on the indissolubility of marriage. Pope Francis did not respond to their questions, and two of their co-signatories subsequently passed away.
In response to their latest questions, Pope Francis did reply, although the cardinals found his response unsatisfactory. They revised their five questions, resubmitted them to the Pope, and requested a simple “yes” or “no” response. When they did not receive such a response, they decided to make the texts public and issue a “notification” to the faithful.
The Vatican’s doctrinal office later published the Pope’s reply to them, although it omitted his introductory remarks encouraging the cardinals not to fear the synod.
Light-to-moderate alcohol consumption has long been associated with better heart health, but the exact reasons behind this connection have remained a mystery. Despite the well-known health risks associated with alcohol, including a higher risk of cancer and neurological aging, researchers from Massachusetts General Hospital have shed light on one potential explanation. Their recent study, published in the Journal of the American College of Cardiology, reveals that alcohol may reduce stress signals in the brain, resulting in less strain on the heart.
To unravel this phenomenon, scientists delved into data from over 50,000 individuals from the Mass General Brigham Biobank, a comprehensive research database. Their findings confirmed that light-to-moderate drinking was indeed linked to a significant reduction in the risk of cardiovascular disease. Importantly, the extensive scale of this study enabled them to rule out external factors such as socioeconomic status, physical activity, and genetics that often complicate smaller-scale research. It became evident that something unique was at play, a discovery further illuminated by examining participants’ brain scans.
These brain scans revealed that alcohol could have enduring effects on stress levels within the brain, subsequently relieving the heart from excessive burdens, even days after the last drink. The brain’s stress network is akin to a tug-of-war, with the amygdala, responsible for emotions, on one side, and the prefrontal cortex, governing executive functions, on the other. During stressful situations, the amygdala sends distress signals, while the prefrontal cortex can inhibit the amplification of this alarm throughout the body, including the heart.
Dr. Ahmed Tawakol, a study author and co-director of the Cardiovascular Imaging Research Center at Massachusetts General Hospital, noted that alcohol is known to alleviate the amygdala’s alarm response. However, the researchers posed a unique question: does it exert long-term effects on these systems? Analyzing brain scans from over 1,000 study participants, they discovered that light-to-moderate drinkers experienced sustained reductions in amygdala activity, with prefrontal cortex activity remaining unaffected when alcohol was not in their systems. While the data did not allow researchers to determine whether this effect on the amygdala would diminish if individuals ceased drinking altogether, this dampening of amygdala activity was associated with a notable 22% decrease in cardiovascular disease risk.
Moreover, when the researchers specifically examined light-to-moderate drinkers with a history of anxiety, characterized by an overactive stress network, they observed a doubling of the effect. Dr. Tawakol explained, “Rather than the 22% reduction, people with prior anxiety had a 40% reduction in heart disease.” However, he emphasized, “I know that a lot of people will hear that and say, ‘Well, I’m anxious. That’s why I drink—I guess there’s a benefit.’ But there is no safe quantity of alcohol.”
While these findings are intriguing, Dr. Tawakol highlighted that there are alternative, safer ways to tap into this stress-reducing pathway. Exercise, for instance, is currently being studied by Tawakol and has been shown to increase prefrontal cortex activity, achieving similar stress-reduction benefits. Adequate sleep, too, operates along similar lines. Dr. Tawakol’s ultimate objective, however, is to identify pharmacological interventions that can safely diminish amygdala activity. He stressed the need to move beyond conventional recommendations like “get more sleep and exercise” in light of this newfound pathway that, when targeted, can double the reduction in cardiovascular disease risk.
The United States dollar (USD) stands as one of the world’s most influential currencies, boasting the highest global trade volume. When assessing the strength or weakness of the Indian rupee (INR), the preferred benchmark has consistently been the USD. Remarkably, there was a time when the USD to INR exchange rate was less than 5. However, in 2023, the exchange rate has surged to approximately ₹83 for every 1 US dollar. This article delves into the intriguing history of the USD to INR exchange rate, spanning from pre-independence India to the present day. We’ll explore pivotal economic events that have left an indelible mark on India’s currency landscape.
Here’s the USD to INR history since India’s independence, put concisely for you
Year
Exchange Rate [1 USD to 1 INR]
1947
3.30
1949
4.76
1966
7.50
1975
8.39
1980
6.61
1990
17.01
2000
44.31
2005
43.50
2006
46.92
2007
49.32
2008
43.30
2009
48.82
2010
46.02
2011
44.65
2012
53.06
2013
54.78
2014
60.95
2015
66.79
2016
67.63
2017
64.94
2018
70.64
2019
72.15
2020
74.31
2021
75.45
2022
81.62
2023 (as of October 3, 2023)
83.18
Dollar vs. Rupee: A Historical Perspective
The USD to INR exchange rate encapsulates India’s economic journey, with fluctuations mirroring the country’s economic fortunes over the years. By examining the shift from the 1947 rate of 1 US dollar to the Indian rupee, we can gauge the rupee’s strength over time.
Pre-Independence Era – Before 1947
The pre-independence era was characterized by British colonial rule in India, which exerted a profound influence on the nation’s economy, including its currency. Consequently, the value of the rupee was closely tied to economic conditions in Britain. The British Pound, much like other global currencies, had a fixed conversion rate to the USD, with the US dollar itself pegged to gold under the Bretton Woods Agreement.
In the 1930s, the Great Depression sent shockwaves through the global economy, impacting India, a British colony, even more profoundly. Notably, some argue that in 1947, 1 US dollar had a better value compared to later years, possibly due to the British Pound’s higher value relative to the USD. During this period, £1 was equivalent to ₹13.37 Rupees, suggesting that $1 might have been worth ₹4.16 at that time.
Post-Independence – 1947 to 1991
After gaining independence in 1947, India adopted a fixed exchange rate system aimed at stabilizing international trade by managing exchange rate fluctuations through government interventions. While this approach provided stability, it also limited the currency’s ability to respond to changing economic conditions.
The USD to INR exchange rate remained relatively stable, with occasional disruptions caused by wars with Pakistan and China, which strained India’s foreign exchange reserves. Global events like the 1970s oil crisis triggered inflationary pressures, driving up the dollar rate. India’s efforts to balance economic growth, foreign policy, and currency stability played a pivotal role in determining the USD to INR exchange rate during this period.
In response to the Nixon shock in 1971 and the Smithsonian Agreement, both of which had lasting implications for the USD, the Reserve Bank of India and the Indian government implemented various adjustments to the Indian Rupee’s price. By 1975, the INR transitioned from a par value method to a pegged system and eventually to a basket peg.
During Economic Reforms and Liberalisation – 1991 to 2000
The period from 1991 to 2000 marked a turning point in India’s economic history, significantly impacting the USD to INR exchange rate. In 1991, India initiated economic reforms and liberalization measures designed to open its economy to foreign investments and reduce trade barriers. These reforms shifted the country from a fixed exchange rate system to a more flexible one, allowing greater flexibility in exchange rate determination. During this time, 1 USD to INR was approximately 35.
By 2000, the exchange rate had risen, with 1 USD equating to about 45 INR. Factors contributing to this increase included the need to attract foreign capital, address trade imbalances, and global economic events like the late 1990s Asian financial crisis. India’s modernization efforts further shaped the USD to INR exchange rate during this transformative period.
21st Century – 2001 to 2023
In the early 21st century, spanning from 2001 to 2023, the USD to INR exchange rate reflected India’s dynamic economic landscape and global economic conditions. It commenced at approximately 1 USD to 1 INR at 47 in 2001, weakened to around ₹75 in 2020, and further declined to approximately ₹80 in 2023.
While India experienced robust economic growth, attracting foreign investments, the 21st century also witnessed global events with adverse implications for the INR’s value, such as the 2008 financial crisis. The COVID-19 pandemic introduced additional complexities, influencing exchange rates worldwide, including the INR. During this period, domestic economic factors, foreign investments, and global economic developments have collectively shaped the INR’s exchange rate.
Factors Influencing Exchange Rates
Several factors have a bearing on the USD to INR exchange rate:
Trade Balances:A country’s trade balance, reflecting the difference between exports and imports, can impact its currency’s value. A trade surplus (more exports than imports) can strengthen the currency, while a deficit can weaken it.
Inflation:High inflation rates can erode the purchasing power of a currency, leading to depreciation. Central banks often employ interest rates to control inflation, thereby influencing exchange rates.
Interest Rates:Higher interest rates make a country’s economy more attractive to foreign investors, resulting in increased demand for the currency. This heightened demand strengthens the currency’s value relative to others, causing it to appreciate.
Geopolitical Events:Political stability and international relations can affect investor confidence and currency value.
Foreign Direct Investment (FDI):A country’s appeal to foreign investments can impact its currency. Higher rates of FDI can strengthen the currency, while lower rates can weaken it.
From the pre-independence era, marked by British colonial rule, to the post-independence challenges, economic reforms, and the dynamic 21st century, both domestic and international factors have influenced the value of the Indian rupee. The history of the USD to INR exchange rate provides a captivating journey through India’s economic evolution.
You might think you know all the continents, but what about Zealandia? In 2017, a previously unknown expanse of New Zealand’s shores made global headlines when it was unveiled to the world.
Zealandia, referred to as Te Riu-a-Māui in the Māori language, encompasses over 5 million square kilometers, dwarfing the subcontinent of India in size, being twice its magnitude.
The reason for this lies in the fact that a staggering 95 percent of its landmass is concealed beneath the southwest Pacific Ocean, having submerged eons before human beings walked the Earth. Only a substantial mountain chain, essentially comprising the two islands of New Zealand, along with some petite oceanic islands, protrudes above the water’s surface.
The newly discovered continent, Zealandia, remains shrouded in mystery due to its virtually inaccessible nature. Nevertheless, an international team of geologists has collaborated to create a novel geological map encompassing Zealandia. This map was fashioned through a fusion of ocean-recovered rock samples and advanced geophysical mapping techniques.
During their quest for samples, geologists identified extensive sandstone formations and deposits of basaltic rock pebbles along Zealandia’s outer boundaries. These sandstones are estimated to be approximately 95 million years old and contain older granite and volcanic pebbles, suggesting that when Zealandia was above sea level, it was traversed by rivers streaming from volcanic highlands and filling tectonic basins.
The volcanic highlands were an active geological feature at least 30 to 50 million years prior, but the erosion likely occurred when the sandstone layers were deposited.
Geologists posit that Zealandia underwent a gradual inundation roughly 40 million years ago. This conclusion is substantiated by the discovery of basalt pebbles linked to underwater volcanic activity.
The findings from this research, titled “Reconnaissance basement geology and tectonics of North Zealandia,” have been documented in the 2023 edition of the journal Tectonics.
Mexican-Indian high school student, Uma Sofia Srivastava from New Jersey has been crowned Miss Teen USA 2023, which saw participation from over 50 young women from across the country, in a live-streamed contest in Nevada state. The 16-year-old high school Junior at the Academy of St Elizabeth had become the first Mexican-Indian Miss New Jersey Teen USA earlier this year.
“IS THIS REAL??? I am so grateful and honored that I’m the first Mexican-Indian, first New Jersey, your MISS TEEN USA 2023!!!” Srivastava wrote on social media after winning the coveted title last week.
“This night is truly the best night of my life because I was crowned with the people that have loved and supported me throughout everything cheering for me in the audience.”
Srivastava, who speaks English, Spanish, Hindi and French, hopes to become a UN Ambassador.
She works with the Lotus Petal Foundation to help underprivileged children in India receive a well rounded education, proper nutrition and healthcare.
A co-founder of the Diversity & Inclusion campaign at her school, Srivastava also participates in Mock Trial and Model United Nations, according to her pageant biography.
She has authored and illustrated a book, “The White Jaguar”, which she says, is to inspire people of all ages to embrace what makes them unique.
Also a pianist, Srivastava runs her own blog, That’s Fan Behavior, where she writes about her experience as a woman of colour and current events.
Miss New York Teen USA Stephanie Skinner was named first runner-up and Miss Pennsylvania Teen USA Maggie Ross was second runner-up in the pageant.
Recent images from the James Webb Space Telescope have unveiled intriguing pairs of planet-like objects in the Orion Nebula that defy previous detection. The Orion Nebula, a luminous cloud of dust and gas, is among the most prominent nebulae in the night sky and is recognizable as the “sword” in the Orion constellation. Situated 1,300 light-years from Earth, this nebula has been a focal point for astronomers, offering a plethora of celestial objects to investigate, including planet-forming disks encircling young stars and brown dwarfs, which are celestial bodies with mass falling between that of planets and stars.
Astronomers employed Webb’s near-infrared camera, known as NIRCam, to capture comprehensive images of the Orion Nebula, spanning both short and long wavelengths of light, thereby unveiling unprecedented insights and unforeseen revelations.
In their examination of the short-wavelength image of the Orion Nebula, astronomers Samuel G. Pearson and Mark J. McCaughrean directed their attention to the Trapezium Cluster, a youthful star-forming region approximately one million years old, teeming with thousands of emerging stars. Among these stars, the scientists identified brown dwarfs, celestial objects too small to initiate the nuclear fusion process characteristic of stars. Brown dwarfs possess a mass less than 7% that of the Sun.
While on the quest to locate additional low-mass isolated entities, the astronomers stumbled upon an entirely novel phenomenon: pairs of planet-like objects with masses ranging from 0.6 to 13 times that of Jupiter. These enigmatic objects appeared to challenge some fundamental tenets of astronomical theories, prompting the scientists to christen them “Jupiter Mass Binary Objects,” or JuMBOs.
Although some of these JuMBOs exceed the mass of Jupiter, they are generally comparable in size, only slightly larger. According to Pearson, a European Space Agency research fellow based at the European Space Research and Technology Centre in the Netherlands, “Although some of them are more massive than the planet Jupiter, they will be roughly the same size and only slightly larger.”
The astronomers’ investigation unveiled a total of 40 pairs of JuMBOs and two triple systems, all of which exhibited wide orbits around one another. Despite their paired existence, these objects typically maintained a separation of about 200 astronomical units, equivalent to 200 times the distance between Earth and the Sun. Completing an orbit around each other required a substantial duration, ranging from 20,000 to 80,000 years.
These enigmatic JuMBOs exhibited a temperature range spanning from 1,000 degrees Fahrenheit (537 degrees Celsius) to 2,300 degrees Fahrenheit (1,260 degrees Celsius). These gaseous entities are relatively youthful in astronomical terms, boasting an age of approximately one million years, whereas our solar system has endured for 4.57 billion years
Mark J. McCaughrean, senior adviser for science and exploration at the European Space Agency, aptly characterized these objects as “3-day-old babies” compared to the age of our solar system. Their continued luminosity and warmth stem from the energy they retained at their formation, allowing them to emit detectable light.
To document their discoveries in the Orion Nebula, McCaughrean and Pearson composed two research papers, which have been submitted for publication in academic journals. Preliminary findings are available on the preprint platform arXiv. However, numerous questions about JuMBOs persist, particularly regarding their origins.
The formation of stars typically originates from massive clouds of gas and dust that succumb to gravitational forces, a process accompanied by the emergence of planetary systems. Nevertheless, existing theories fail to account for the formation of JuMBOs or their presence in the Orion Nebula, as McCaughrean noted. While some might liken JuMBOs to rogue planets, objects of planetary mass that roam through space independently of stars, it remains challenging to explain how pairs of these objects were simultaneously expelled while maintaining gravitational connection.
Pearson emphasized the implications of these discoveries, stating, “Scientists have been working on theories and models of star and planet formation for decades, but none of them have ever predicted that we would find pairs of super low mass objects floating alone in space — and we’re seeing lots of them.” This revelation raises questions about the understanding of both planet and star formation.
Picture: CNN
The Orion Nebula ranks among astronomers’ favored targets for observation. As telescopes grow in size and sophistication, they reveal an increasing number of objects within this nebula. Pearson underscored the significance of Webb’s infrared capabilities, stating, “JWST is the most powerful infrared telescope that has ever been built, and these observations simply wouldn’t be possible with any other telescope.”
Future observations scheduled for early 2024 may provide further insights into the atmospheric compositions of JuMBOs. Researchers also seek to refine their understanding of these objects by obtaining precise measurements of their masses. Furthermore, investigations focused on other star-forming regions could determine whether JuMBOs are present beyond the confines of the Orion Nebula.
As Pearson summarized, “The main question is, ‘What?! Where did that come from?’ It’s just so unexpected that a lot of future observations and modeling are going to be needed to explain it.”
The United States could potentially face a significant economic downturn in the near future, and such a scenario would not only impact India’s vital services sector, a key component of the nation’s GDP, but also introduce substantial volatility into both the bond and equity markets, according to a prominent economist.
In an exclusive interview with NDTV, Neelkanth Mishra, the Chief Economist for Axis Bank and part-time chairperson of the Unique Identification Authority of India, expressed his concerns about the United States potentially entering a recession. While initial expectations were that the U.S. would experience a decline in GDP growth, this did not materialize by the end of September, with some believing a “soft landing” was in store.
Mishra offered a counterpoint, highlighting a significant increase in the U.S. fiscal deficit. “Our analysis says, however, that this year, their fiscal deficit has gone up by 4% of their GDP. They had targeted $1 trillion – their fiscal year ends on September 30 – and they ended up with a figure of $2 trillion. If the fiscal deficit is so high, there can’t be a recession,” he explained. However, the challenge lies in maintaining this elevated fiscal deficit to sustain economic growth.
“Even if they manage to keep the fiscal deficit flat next year, which is a problem in itself, the economy will go into a recession. Because of the fiscal deficit being so high, no one is wanting to buy U.S. bonds. Rates are rising because of that, and this is going to lead to a contraction in demand across the world. So, the recession that will happen could be a very deep one,” he cautioned.
Turning his attention to the potential impact on India, Mishra identified four key pathways. Firstly, the services sector, which is already experiencing sluggish growth, could further decelerate, impacting India’s IT services industry and business services exports, which constitute 10% of India’s total exports. This decline could potentially result in a 1% reduction in GDP growth.
The second pathway involves the impact on goods exports, with a drop in demand anticipated. Mishra emphasized that demand for goods is already low in China, Europe, and Japan, and if it also diminishes in the U.S., it could affect India’s goods exports.
The third concern revolves around the risk of product dumping in India. If India remains the sole bastion of demand resilience, manufacturers worldwide may flock to sell their products in India, negatively impacting Indian manufacturers.
Lastly, a U.S. recession could affect the yield on its government bonds, leading to an increase in the cost of capital for other economies. This could particularly affect Indian borrowers, making it harder to secure dollar loans and introducing volatility into financial markets, including bonds and equities.
Addressing how India can prepare for such potential turbulence, Mishra stressed the importance of macroeconomic stability over risk-taking to navigate these uncertain waters. He asserted that macroeconomic stability provides the foundation for sustained long-term growth.
Responding to a question about a recent Morgan Stanley report, which suggested that India’s stock market could rise by 10% with a stable government after 2024 but might fall by 20-60% if stability is not achieved, Mishra challenged this viewpoint. He argued that the central government’s impact on the economy is typically seen over a medium-term horizon, in the range of 3-5 years. State governments, on the other hand, play a more substantial role in short-term economic momentum, influencing foreign and private investments. Mishra highlighted demographic trends in India, such as falling fertility rates and increasing net savings, as indicators of economic strength that are relatively impervious to changes in the central government.
He underlined that this sensationalist forecasting does not align with the economic realities in India. Housing construction, a significant driver of the Indian economy, is unlikely to be significantly affected by changes in the government.
Regarding advice for the middle class in the face of potential economic turbulence, Mishra recommended caution in the coming year or year-and-a-half, as the global economy could experience significant volatility. However, he also expressed optimism about India’s economic trajectory over the next 5-7 years, suggesting that there is no cause for undue concern.
Neelkanth Mishra, a prominent economist, has voiced concerns about the possibility of a deep recession in the United States and its potential impact on India, emphasizing the importance of macroeconomic stability and challenging sensationalist forecasts about the Indian economy. He advised caution in the short term but expressed optimism about India’s longer-term economic prospects.
In a clear demonstration of ongoing economic strength, American payrolls experienced a significant increase of 336,000 in September, as reported by the Labor Department on Friday. This growth, nearly double what economists had predicted, reaffirmed the robustness of the labor market and the resilience of the economy, which has been grappling with various challenges.
Remarkably, this marked the 33rd consecutive month of job expansion, with September’s surge being the most substantial since January. Meanwhile, the unemployment rate, based on household surveys, remained stable at 3.8 percent, maintaining a level below 4 percent for nearly two years—an achievement not witnessed since the late 1960s.
Samuel Rines, an economist and managing director at Corbu, a financial research firm, commented, “This is an economy on fire,” reflecting the enthusiasm surrounding the economic performance.
Notably, data revisions also brought good news, with hiring figures for July and August being adjusted upwards, revealing an additional 119,000 jobs compared to previous records. These revisions underscored employers’ confidence in the ongoing economic recovery and their belief that there is ample room for further growth.
Andrew Flowers, a labor economist at Appcast, a firm specializing in online recruiting, pointed out that “Fears of an imminent recession have been easing since the spring, allowing businesses to revisit hiring plans they put on hold.”
The release of these figures drew considerable attention from Federal Reserve policymakers, who have been grappling with the challenge of balancing wage and price control through interest rate adjustments. Robust job growth often triggers a sell-off among investors due to concerns over potential rate hikes, which can negatively impact stock and bond prices.
Surprisingly, the market’s response on Friday was generally positive, primarily because the report indicated that the economy was still expanding while wage growth remained moderate, leading many to believe that the Federal Reserve would maintain steady interest rates. Average hourly earnings for workers showed a 0.2 percent increase from the previous month and a 4.2 percent increase from September 2022. While these figures were solid, they fell slightly short of expectations, with the one-year growth rate being the slowest since March 2020.
David Cervantes, founder of Pine Brook Capital Management, an asset management firm, emphasized, “I don’t think the headline jobs number necessarily means an inflationary impulse because average hourly earnings gains are going down,” providing reassurance for those concerned about the inflationary impact of rising wages.
Officials from the Biden administration hailed the report as unequivocally positive, with Jared Bernstein, chair of the White House Council of Economic Advisers, stating, “Simply put, good news is good news, full stop,” highlighting the persistently strong job market under Bidenomics.
The economy’s resilience, more than three years into the recovery from Covid pandemic shutdowns, is evident in various ways. Inflation-adjusted economic growth has accelerated over the summer, even as overall price increases have slowed compared to a year ago. While spending has moderated since its rapid pace in 2021, demand for travel, hospitality, and event tickets remains high, and jobless claims are at their lowest levels since February 2020.
Furthermore, the accumulated savings of Americans during the pandemic have endured longer than expected. In 2019, U.S. households held approximately $980 billion in “checkable deposits,” including checking, savings, and easily cashable money market accounts. In 2023, this figure has surged to over $4 trillion.
However, there are reasons for caution. The suspension of mandatory federal student loan repayments, a pandemic relief measure, is ending this month. The housing market has been affected by a shortage of supply and rising interest rates, resulting in nearly frozen activity and record high home prices.
Consumer sentiment, as measured by the University of Michigan’s index, has improved significantly compared to the previous year but remains well below late 2010s levels. Additionally, it appears that high interest rates will persist for an extended period, posing challenges not only for households but also for businesses in need of fresh financing.
Nevertheless, for the time being, economic activities continue to progress steadily. The MetLife and U.S. Chamber of Commerce Small Business Index, which gauges confidence among small business owners, reached its highest level this quarter since the beginning of the pandemic. This score is roughly in line with late 2019 levels, with 66 percent of small businesses reporting that business conditions are healthy, and 72 percent expressing comfort with their cash flow, despite increased labor costs.
Tom Sullivan, vice president of small business policy at the U.S. Chamber of Commerce, observed, “Main Street employers are showing remarkable resiliency in the face of high inflation and a shortage of workers,” adding that small business owners are feeling more optimistic compared to a year ago, with recession fears receding and inflation gradually easing.
Throughout this year, there has been an ongoing struggle between an economy delivering greater-than-expected overall growth and the concerns of many American families still grappling with the impact of two years of significant increases in living costs. The reduction of federal aid and tax credits has led to an increase in poverty, and energy prices have experienced unpredictable fluctuations.
Most leading indicators, which aim to identify and predict significant shifts in the business cycle, still exhibit warning signs. However, some argue that these data may be influenced by the peculiarities of an economy returning to normalcy after the shock of the pandemic.
Michael Kantrowitz, chief investment strategist at Piper Sandler & Company, noted, “The reality of the business cycle is that there are only two times when ‘all’ the data are moving in the same direction: a recovery and a recession,” indicating that mixed and less clear data outside of these extreme phases should not be dismissed.
As markets grapple with uncertainty, many workers are advocating for a larger share of the still-expanding economic pie. While nonsupervisory employees have seen recent wage increases, private sector hourly workers are currently averaging approximately $17 per hour this year, according to payroll processor ADP. Nevertheless, many workers continue to feel that their wages do not adequately meet their needs.
Jonathan Quito, a 27-year-old ramp agent at La Guardia Airport, shared his perspective, stating that despite a $1 per hour raise last year, he finds it insufficient to cover the rising costs of living in New York City, including groceries, public transportation, and rent. He emphasized the importance of worker advocacy and unionization efforts to secure better wages and improved living conditions.
He concluded, “Eventually, you know, I want to be able to start my own family and stuff,” highlighting his aspiration for a more secure financial future.
Iran’s most prominent human rights advocate, Narges Mohammadi, who is currently imprisoned in Evin Prison, was awarded the 2023 Nobel Peace Prize in an effort by the Norwegian Nobel Committee to support women’s rights in Iran.
Ms. Mohammadi, aged 51, has spent the majority of the past decade in and out of prison, facing charges of “spreading anti-state propaganda” and is currently serving a 10-year sentence, as part of Iran’s ongoing campaign to suppress her activism.
Despite her incarceration, she has remained one of the most vocal critics of Iran’s government. She organized protests within the prison, penned opinion pieces, and conducted weekly workshops for female inmates on their rights, particularly in response to a significant uprising led by women in Iran last year after the death of Mahsa Amini, a 22-year-old who died in the custody of the country’s morality police.
Ms. Mohammadi’s family released a statement on her behalf, vowing to continue her activism within Iran even if it meant spending the rest of her life in captivity. She stated, “Standing alongside the brave mothers of Iran, I will continue to fight against the relentless discrimination, tyranny, and gender-based oppression by the oppressive religious government until the liberation of women.”
The Nobel committee not only recognized Ms. Mohammadi’s efforts but also acknowledged the hundreds of thousands of people who have protested against Iran’s discriminatory policies against women. Berit Reiss-Andersen, who leads the committee, noted, “Her struggle has come at tremendous personal cost.”
Iranian authorities remained silent in response to the news of Ms. Mohammadi’s award, with state-affiliated media dismissing it as a Western plot to incite further unrest. However, her family, human rights activists, and supporters celebrated the recognition.
Kenneth Roth, former executive director of Human Rights Watch, praised Ms. Mohammadi’s resilience, stating, “She even treats prison as an opportunity to document and publicize that repression.”
While the international attention may eventually lead to Ms. Mohammadi’s release, her family expects Iran to increase pressure on her in captivity in the short term.
Ms. Mohammadi’s activism has focused on various issues, including Iran’s hijab law, violence and sexual harassment against women, the status of women under the religious government, the rights of death row prisoners, and the transition to democracy in Iran.
She is the 19th woman to be awarded the Nobel Peace Prize since its inception in 1901 and the second Iranian woman to win, following Shirin Ebadi in 2003. Ms. Ebadi, a human rights lawyer and Ms. Mohammadi’s mentor, expressed hope that the recognition would lead to the release of political prisoners and bring freedom and democracy to Iran.
Narges Mohammadi’s journey began in her hometown of Zanjan, Iran, where she was born into a middle-class family. Her activism started with childhood memories of her mother visiting her uncle in prison and listening to the names of executed prisoners on television. She pursued a degree in physics in college and quickly became involved in activism, founding women’s hiking and civic engagement groups.
Picture: NYT
Her activism intensified after her employer was forced to terminate her in 2008, and she was banned from working in engineering. She authored the book “White Torture,” which documented psychological torture and abuse of prisoners in Iran. Earlier this year, she received PEN America’s Barbey Freedom to Write Award and was named one of the recipients of the United Nations’ World Press Freedom Prize.
Last year, Ms. Mohammadi’s activism gained renewed urgency following the nationwide uprising triggered by the death of Mahsa Amini in the custody of the morality police. The Iranian government responded with force, resulting in numerous deaths, arrests, and protests. Despite the government’s actions, Ms. Mohammadi remained steadfast in her commitment to change within Iran.
The Nobel Peace Prize recognizes Narges Mohammadi’s unwavering dedication to human rights and women’s rights in Iran, even in the face of adversity and imprisonment. Her story serves as an inspiration to those fighting for justice and freedom around the world.
In September, the gross national debt of the United States reached a staggering $33 trillion, a new record following its previous milestone of $32 trillion earlier in the year. This alarming figure is accompanied by a concerning trend: the U.S. is currently spending more on paying interest on its national debt than on its national defense, as reported by the Treasury’s monthly statement.
The fiscal year up to August saw the Treasury disbursing $807.84 billion in interest payments on its debt securities, while the Department of Defense’s budget for military programs amounted to only $695.44 billion during the same period. This juxtaposition becomes even more significant when considering that the United States outspends every other nation on defense.
The recent years have been marked by significant government spending, leading to a deficit, which occurs when government expenditures exceed tax revenues in a fiscal year. The COVID-19 pandemic triggered the approval of several substantial bills, including the American Rescue Plan Act, with a price tag of $1.9 trillion. The Congressional Budget Office estimates that the debt ceiling package signed into law in the summer to prevent a national default could reduce the deficit by $1.5 trillion over the next decade. However, the Committee for a Responsible Budget (CRFB), a nonprofit organization specializing in federal budget and fiscal matters, suggests that the actual savings could be closer to $1 trillion, depending on “side deals” outside the agreement.
CRFB President Maya MacGuineas emphasized the necessity of addressing healthcare, Social Security, and the tax code to regain control over the national debt.
The government’s borrowing spree in recent years took place during a period of historically low interest rates. However, as interest rates rise and prices continue to climb, the cost of servicing this debt is set to increase. According to the Peter G. Peterson Foundation, nearly $2 billion is spent daily on interest payments for the national debt.
Furthermore, the government’s substantial debt levels can crowd out other borrowing opportunities in the economy, making it more difficult for corporations to secure loans. As Phillip Braun, a clinical professor of finance at Northwestern University’s Kellogg School of Management, explained, “There’s only so much money in the economy, and so with the government borrowing such large amounts, there’s only so much that people are willing to lend overall in the economy, so it pushes out other types of borrowing.” The government had an opportunity to refinance its debt when interest rates were low, but this opportunity was missed, leading to unnecessarily higher borrowing costs.
Who Owns America’s National Debt?
The national debt in the United States is diverse, similar to having various types of personal debt like credit cards, mortgages, and car payments. The U.S. Department of the Treasury manages the national debt, classifying it into two categories: intragovernmental debt and debt held by the public.
Intragovernmental debt, accounting for approximately $6.8 trillion of the national debt, represents obligations between different government agencies. The larger portion of the debt, around $26.2 trillion, is held by the public. This segment includes ownership by foreign governments, banks, private investors, state and local governments, and the Federal Reserve, primarily in the form of Treasury securities, bills, and bonds.
Foreign governments and private investors are among the most significant holders of public debt, possessing roughly $8 trillion. Approximately 50% of this debt is owned by private and public domestic entities, while the Federal Reserve Bank holds approximately 20%. However, there is a silver lining concerning the debt held by the Federal Reserve.
Phillip Braun explained, “The Federal Reserve owns a lot of government debt. The Treasury does pay interest payments to the Federal Reserve, but then the Federal Reserve turns around and gives it back to the Treasury — that alleviates some of the issues.”
A Warning Signal
Rising interest rates are poised to exacerbate the national debt crisis, complicating the government’s ability to respond to economic slowdowns. Michael A. Peterson, CEO of the Peter G. Peterson Foundation, warned, “As we have seen with recent growth in inflation and interest rates, the cost of debt can mount suddenly and rapidly. With more than $10 trillion of interest costs over the next decade, this compounding fiscal cycle will only continue to do damage to our kids and grandkids.”
Viewers can catch ZEE5 Global’s unmissable slate and stock up on their yearlong entertainment by subscribing to the Annual pack and grabbing the limited-time special offer price.
ZEE5 Global is the digital entertainment destination launched by Zee Entertainment Enterprises Limited (ZEEL), a global Media and Entertainment powerhouse. The platform launched across 190+ countries in October 2018 and has content across 18 languages: Hindi, English, Bengali, Malayalam, Tamil, Telugu, Kannada, Marathi, Oriya, Bhojpuri, Gujarati, Punjabi, including six international languages Malay, Thai, Bahasa, Urdu, Bangla and Arabic. ZEE5 Global is home to 200,000+ hours of on-demand content. The platform brings together the best of Originals, Movies and TV Shows, Music, Health and Lifestyle content in one destination. In addition, ZEE5 Global offers features like 15 navigational languages, content download options and Voice Search.
ZEE5 Global, the world’s largest streaming platform for South Asian content, announces the world digital premiere of the biggest Hindi blockbuster of the year, ‘Gadar 2’ today. After a successful theatrical run collecting 63M USD in India and still counting, Gadar 2 is set for another successful innings on ZEE5 Global on 6th October. Produced by Zee Studios and directed by Anil Sharma, the superhit sequel to the 2001 hit ‘Gadar’ will see Sunny Deol, Ameesha Patel and Utkarsh Sharma reprise their roles as Tara Singh, Sakeena and Charanjeet “Jeete” Singh respectively.
Gadar 2 brings back India’s most loved family of Tara, Sakeena & Jeete; 22 years after its predecessor. Set against the backdrop of Indo-Pakistan war of 1971, Tara Singh, once again, will face every enemy to protect the honor of his country and family. This time, the narrative will delve deeper into the enduring love of Tara Singh and Sakeena and additionally, will see a strong father-son bond between Tara Singh and Charanjeet as the latter lands in Pakistan and ends up being caught and tortured. While the last time, Tara Singh visited Pakistan to get his wife back, this time, he will return to rescue his son.
So, gear up for bigger, better and bolder action sequences from Sunny Deol and a repeat of his most popular dialogue “Hindustan zindabad tha, zindabad hai aur zindabad rahega” which will continue to echo in every Hindustani’s heart for a long time. The movie will also see Sunny Deol reprise his famous handpump scene and sing and dance to the original chartbusters (from the 2001 film) like ‘Udd Jaa Kaale Kaava’, ‘Main Nikla Gaddi Leke’ and recreate the same magic from 2001.
Archana Anand, Chief Business Officer, ZEE5 Global said, “Bollywood blockbusters have always transcended geographical boundaries and resonated with global viewers through their powerful and emotionally charged stories. With the World Digital Premiere of Gadar 2, ZEE5 Global is thrilled to present our global viewers with the sequel to one of Hindi cinema’s all-time blockbuster hits that has captivated audiences for over 22 years”.
Shariq Patel, CBO, Zee Studios said, “Gadar 2 brought back India’s most loved family of Tara Singh, Sakeena and Jeete; 22 years after its predecessor. Hindustan Ka Asli Blockbuster will make history once more with its digital premiere on ZEE5 Global”.
Sunny Deol said, “We are absolutely delighted with the overwhelming response that ‘Gadar 2’ has received in theatres. Now with its World Digital Premiere on ZEE5 Global, I am very excited for the movie to reach a wider, global audience. Gadar 2 is a perfect family entertainer which will keep the viewers completely engaged and entertained. I urge everyone to watch it if you haven’t already and watch it again if you have”.
Ameesha Patel said, “Sakeena is a character who has stayed with me throughout my career, and I was so excited to revisit her in ‘Gadar 2.’ The chemistry between Tara and Sakeena is timeless, and the sequel reignites that magic for our fans. ZEE5 Global’s platform allows us to connect with a global audience, and I’m thrilled that viewers from around the world will have the opportunity to witness this epic love story, all over again but with more twists and action”.
Director Anil Sharma said, “The story of ‘Gadar’ is etched in the memories of every movie lover and with Gadar 2, we have tried to recreate the same magic. I am beyond thrilled that Gadar 2 has become one of the most successful Hindi films of all time and now with its World Digital Premiere on ZEE5 Global, I hope that the film breaks more records and reaches more people across the world”.
Arya Samaj of Chicago land also hosted Mega Multikund Maha Yajna on Sunday, October 1st, 2023 at 700 Hillview Ave., West Chicago, IL. The event was a celebration of 200 Years of Maharshi Dayanand SaraswatiJi – An Uplifting Socio-Spiritual Celebration
The Prime Minister of India, Shri Narendra Modi inaugurated the year-long celebrations commemorating the 200th birth anniversary of Maharishi Dayanand SaraswatiJi, at Indira Gandhi Indoor Stadium in Delhi on February 12th, 2023 and it is echoed by all Arya Samajs around the world.
“When the British imposed the policy of appeasement on the Indians, Arya Samaj started the Vedic movement in the country. Arya Samaj has been a vibrant movement in India. There was a time when Arya Samaj was dominant from Basti to Karachi,” said the chief minister addressing the Golden Jubilee Mahotsav of Arya Samaj in Basti.
Maharshi Dayanand SaraswatiJi was born on 12th February 1824. Maharishi Dayanand SaraswatiJi was a social reformer who founded Arya Samaj in 1875 to counter social inequities prevalent during the times. Maharshi Ji had played crucial role in the Indian Freedom movement, united all Hindus, Women Rights, Child Marriage, Important of Vedas. Arya Samaj has played a crucial role in the cultural and social awakening of the country through its emphasis on social reforms and education.
Ajay Gharia Ji and Ash Perti Ji along with Dr. Ashok MehtaJi and all board members of Arya Samaj of Chicago land had planned the Multikund Maha Yajna. Devotees from all over Chicago land joined the celebration and 21 families joined as Yajmans. It was a wonderful program with three havan kunds set outside. Dr. Kamlesh Chokshi Ji – One of the top scholars from India who retired as Director/Professor from Gujarat University had performed the Havan with vadic mantras. AsmitaJi and SarlaJi had sung the ardas/prayer. Pratibha Jairath Ji along with Shree Kamath Ji, Shaila Khedkar Ji and Jitendra Bulsara Ji sang the melodious bhajans. Dr. Ashok Mehta Ji, Ramesh Malhan Ji and Om Dhingra Ji had thanks everyone.
Indian lawmakers have wrapped up their final session in the current Parliament building before relocating to a new facility, in response to a call from Prime Minister Narendra Modi. During the
session, Modi celebrated India's parliamentary history and highlighted the recently concluded Group of 20 (G20) summit.
This move comes after major opposition parties boycotted the inauguration of the new Parliament back in May, deeming it extravagant. It marked a rare instance of unity against Modi’s Hindu nationalist ruling party, which has held power for nine years and is now seeking a third term in the upcoming elections.
The new Parliament building, characterized by its triangular shape, came with an estimated price tag of $120 million. It’s a part of a broader $2.8 billion renovation project in central New Delhi, aimed at modernizing British-era offices and residences. This comprehensive initiative, known as the “Central Vista” spans over 3.2 kilometers (1.9 miles) and encompasses new government ministry and department buildings, as well as Modi’s upcoming private residence.
During his speech in the lower house, Modi praised his government for its role in the G20 summit. This summit witnessed India’s pivotal role in brokering compromises among divergent
global powers on crucial global matters. Modi specifically underscored India's efforts in bringing the African Union into the G20 fold. He also mentioned the recent successful lunar mission, in which India’s spacecraft landed near the moon’s southern pole.
Modi’s address didn’t solely focus on recent achievements; he also delved into Parliament’s historical significance and highlighted some major decisions made by his government within the parliamentary context.
The announcement of this five-day special session last month drew criticism from opposition lawmakers, who argued that the Modi government had not been transparent about its
parliamentary agenda. Only last week did the government release a "tentative list" that outlined four proposed bills, including a contentious one expected to alter the process of appointing India’s chief election officer.
The new Parliament building is situated in close proximity to the old one, a circular structure designed by British architects in the early 20th century. The new facility, spanning four stories,
boasts a total of 1,272 seats across two chambers, nearly 500 more than the previous one.
BAPS Swaminarayan Akshardham, the largest Hindu temple in the United States, opened its doors on Sunday, October 8th, in New Jersey. Situated in the city of Robbinsville, New Jersey, this temple is heralded as the largest Hindu temple outside of India in the modern era.
In a letter to BAPS Swaminarayan Akshardham, Prime Minister Narendra Modi conveyed the profound spiritual significance of this occasion for devotees worldwide, stating, “It is an occasion of profound spiritual significance for the vast legion of devotees worldwide.” The temple will be accessible to the public starting from October 18th.
Architectural Marvel
This magnificent temple is a testament to unparalleled craftsmanship. Its construction involved four distinct varieties of marble from Italy and limestone from Bulgaria. These precious materials embarked on an extraordinary journey, spanning thousands of miles from their origins to India and ultimately reaching their final destination in New Jersey, as reported by the Associated Press. On-site, skilled artisans meticulously assembled these intricately carved pieces, akin to assembling a colossal jigsaw puzzle, resulting in the creation of this monumental Hindu temple.
Covering an expansive 126-acre area, this architectural masterpiece owes its existence to the unwavering dedication of artisans and volunteers who devoted approximately 4.7 million hours to painstakingly hand-carve around two million cubic feet of stone, according to the report.
The temple’s walls are adorned with carvings of historical figures, including prominent figures like Martin Luther King Jr. and Abraham Lincoln, as highlighted by Yogi Trivedi, a temple volunteer and a scholar of religion at Columbia University, in a statement to NBC News. He marveled at the temple’s beauty, saying, “I wake up every morning and scratch my eyes thinking, ‘Am I still in central New Jersey?’ It’s like being transported to another world, specifically to India.”
Construction Efforts
The construction of the Akshardham temple, a collaborative effort involving 12,500 volunteers from around the world, commenced in 2011, according to PTI.
This monumental achievement marks a significant milestone for the Hindu community in the United States and stands as a symbol of the dedication, craftsmanship, and unity of its creators. As it opens its doors to the public, it is poised to become a source of inspiration and a place of spiritual significance for devotees and visitors alike.
On October 7th, Israel experienced a shockingly unexpected attack, reminiscent of the 1973 October War, which brought the nation to the brink 50 years ago. This recent assault by Hamas from the Gaza Strip, occurring on a holiday morning and taking Israel off guard, draws parallels with historical conflicts that reshaped their respective landscapes. Similar to the Tet Offensive during the Vietnam War, the Hamas attack demonstrated unforeseen capacities, briefly overwhelming a superior military, and prompting a reevaluation of the conflict’s nature.
The prevailing assumption in Israel that the Palestinian conflict could be “managed” rather than resolved is now in question. Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu discarded this notion, declaring that the country was “at war,” not engaged in a mere operation or round of conflict. This shift in perspective has far-reaching implications, not only for Israel but also for global political and military leaders who must reconsider the potential outcomes of this conflict.
This attack has cast doubt on a potential peace deal between Israel and Saudi Arabia that hinged on the presumed acceptance of the status quo by the occupied Palestinians. It also challenges America’s longstanding hope to shift its focus away from the Middle East and rekindles the competition between global powers in the region. Once again, Israel and the Palestinians become pivotal players in the near future of geopolitics.
Picture: France 24
Israel had grown accustomed to brief, one-sided battles with Gaza militants, often fought using drones or fighter jets. Israeli officials even humorously referred to these encounters as “cutting the grass.” This routine became a stark military aspect of “managing the conflict,” a strategy that has dominated for decades. It operates on the assumption that there is no political solution to the contest for land between Jewish Israelis and Palestinians, both of whom lay claim to the same territory.
In the West Bank, home to 3 million Palestinians and around 500,000 Jewish settlers, much of the management falls under the purview of a robust internal security apparatus overseen by Palestinian National Authority President Mahmoud Abbas, also known as Abu Mazen. Abbas wagered that quelling violent resistance, including from Hamas, a rival to his Fatah party, would lead to negotiations resulting in a Palestinian state. However, this bet has not paid off.
Unlike the West Bank, the Gaza Strip, housing 2.2 million Palestinians, saw the departure of Jewish settlers and the Israeli military in 2005. Since then, it has been governed by Hamas, or the Islamic Resistance Movement, and sealed off by Israel. While Israel exerts control over Gaza’s power supply, telephone systems, and much of its economy, managing it has proven more challenging. Poverty is widespread, and the young population has limited options for leaving. Israeli security relied heavily on fences and walls, which Hamas guerrillas tunneled under in 2014 and demolished on October 7th, using paragliders.
The events that followed have left a deep impact on Israelis, who, in addition to possessing the region’s most powerful military, carry a reservoir of trauma. In the chaotic hours of that Sabbath morning, everything was overwhelmed: the Israel Defense Force, the Iron Dome missile defense system, and the sense of security that had led hundreds of young people to an overnight rave in the desert where the paragliders landed and opened fire. Some of these terrified revelers became among the approximately 100 hostages, including Israelis and foreign citizens, taken into Gaza.
The abduction of individuals, including the bodies of soldiers, has been a recurring tactic in the asymmetrical warfare faced by Israel. It provides bargaining leverage following hit-and-run operations. These actions, along with civilian casualties, ensure sympathy for Israel and afford it latitude in its responses. Prime Minister Netanyahu vowed to turn parts of Gaza “to rubble,” but doing so while dozens of Israeli hostages are in harm’s way presents a complex challenge.
The surprise attack by Hamas on Israel has shattered assumptions about managing the Israeli-Palestinian conflict. It has led to a shift in perspective from “management” to being officially “at war.” This development has far-reaching implications, influencing not only the regional dynamics but also global politics. The events that unfolded on that fateful day have left deep scars on the collective psyche of Israelis, and the situation remains fluid, with complex challenges ahead.
Republicans launched an attack on Robert F. Kennedy Jr. on Monday as the prominent environmental attorney and anti-vaccine activist officially announced his independent bid for the White House. This move has stirred concerns among conservatives that Kennedy, a former Democrat, could siphon votes away from former President Donald Trump in the 2024 election.
The Republican National Committee and Trump’s campaign wasted no time in critiquing Kennedy’s liberal background. Meanwhile, national Democrats remained silent on the matter as Kennedy made it clear in a speech in Philadelphia that he was distancing himself from both political parties.
Trump spokesperson Steven Cheung issued a statement cautioning voters not to be misled by those who feign conservative values. Cheung described Kennedy’s campaign as a “vanity project for a liberal Kennedy looking to cash in on his family’s name.”
This strong reaction highlights the uncertainty surrounding Kennedy’s much-anticipated decision to run as an independent. While it is likely to impact the 2024 race, which is shaping up to be a rematch between Trump and President Joe Biden, the exact implications remain unclear.
Kennedy, a member of one of the most renowned families in Democratic politics, initially pursued an improbable primary bid and surprisingly held more favorability among Republicans than Democrats. Even Trump himself had expressed his positive opinion of Kennedy just two weeks prior, stating, “I like him a lot. I’ve known him for a long time.”
Both Biden and Trump’s allies had, at times, questioned whether Kennedy would act as a spoiler against their respective candidates. Kennedy acknowledged both sides’ concerns, stating, “The truth is, they’re both right. My intention is to spoil it for both of them.”
Picture: WPTV
Speaking from Philadelphia’s Independence Mall, where America’s founding documents were adopted, Kennedy emphasized his desire to distance himself from either political party. He spoke of a “rising tide of discontent” in the nation and expressed his aim to make a “new declaration of independence” from corporations, the media, and the two major political parties.
Hundreds of supporters, holding signs with slogans like “Declare your independence,” and chanting “RFK, all the way!” were enthusiastic about his decision. His supporters comprised a diverse mix of disillusioned Democrats, Trump voters seeking change, and political outsiders whose beliefs did not align with any single party. They believed that Kennedy could bring them together.
Peter Pantazis, a 40-year-old business owner from Delaware, expressed his optimism, saying, “He’s going to win. I’ve been praying that he’s going to decentralize the campaign, get away from the party system, and actually be the candidate of the people for the people. And that’s what he announced today.”
Brent Snyder, a disabled veteran from south Philadelphia, stated, “The last couple of years I’ve been noticing the Republican Party’s been going a way I didn’t like. Not that I agree with everything that’s happening to Trump, but I think right now he has more baggage than his country needs. The division right now is just terrible. We need someone to bring both sides together to make us work.”
The atmosphere among the crowd was filled with joy, hope, and occasionally, the faint scent of marijuana. Kennedy invoked historical figures like John Adams and George Washington to make a case for unity and warned against the pitfalls of partisan politics.
However, Kennedy’s independent campaign faces significant challenges in competing with the well-funded, experienced campaigns of Trump and Biden. During his announcement, there was a brief delay when he found that his speech was loaded upside-down in the teleprompter.
Kennedy’s decision to run independently comes shortly after progressive activist Cornel West abandoned his Green Party bid in favor of an independent presidential run. Additionally, the centrist group No Labels is actively working to secure ballot access for an unnamed candidate.
Recognizing the risk that Kennedy might draw votes away from Republicans, Trump’s allies have begun circulating opposition research aimed at undermining his support among conservative voters. The Republican National Committee released a fact sheet titled “Radical DEMOCRAT RFK Jr.” that highlighted instances of Kennedy’s support for liberal politicians and ideas, as well as his endorsement of conspiracy theories related to COVID-19 and past election claims.
On the other hand, Biden’s allies have largely dismissed Kennedy’s primary campaign as unserious. When asked for comment before the announcement, a Democratic National Committee spokesman responded with an eye-roll emoji. The DNC declined to comment on Monday.
Four of Kennedy’s eight surviving siblings issued a joint statement denouncing his candidacy, expressing concern about the potential harm it could cause to the country. They emphasized that while Bobby shares their family name, his values, vision, and judgment differ significantly from theirs.
Tony Lyons, co-founder and co-chairman of American Values 2024, a super PAC supporting Kennedy, dismissed these comments as part of a strategy to discredit him. He pointed out that disagreements within families are a natural part of democracy.
While Kennedy has historically identified as a Democrat and often invoked the legacies of his late father, Sen. Robert F. Kennedy, and his uncle, President John F. Kennedy, on the campaign trail, he has also developed relationships with far-right figures in recent years. He appeared on a channel associated with Sandy Hook conspiracy theorist Alex Jones and headlined an event on the ReAwaken America Tour, organized by Trump’s former national security adviser Michael Flynn.
Polls indicate that Kennedy is more favorably viewed by Republicans than Democrats. Some far-right conservatives have supported him for his fringe views, including his vocal distrust of COVID-19 vaccines, despite scientific evidence demonstrating their safety and effectiveness in preventing severe disease and death.
Kennedy’s anti-vaccine organization, Children’s Health Defense, is currently involved in a lawsuit against several news organizations, including The Associated Press, alleging antitrust violations related to their actions in countering misinformation about COVID-19 and vaccines. Kennedy had temporarily stepped away from the group upon announcing his presidential run, but he is listed as one of its attorneys in the lawsuit.
Avinash Gupta, a distinguished Indian-American physician has been elected as the president of the Federation of Indian Associations of New York, New Jersey, and Connecticut (FIA) for the year 2024.
FIA held its Annual General Body Meeting on October 4th, 2023 at Akbar Restaurant, Edison in New Jersey. Present on the occasion were the FIA’s board of Trustees, Senior Advisors Mr H.R. Shah & Dr Sudhir Parikh and the Executive Team along with others from different members associations.
Dr. Gupta, who currently holds the positions of Chief of Cardiology, President of Medical Staff at Monmouth Medical Center Southern Campus, and Member of the Ocean County Board of Health, previously served as the Executive Vice President of FIA. He has now been elected as the President of this diaspora organization, a long-standing and extensive non-profit grassroots umbrella organization.
The newly unveiled executive team for 2024 includes Saurin Parikh as Executive Vice President, Smita Miki Patel as Vice President, Deepak Goel as 2nd Vice President, Priti Patel as General Secretary, Mahesh Dubal as Joint Secretary, Sanjeev Singh as Treasurer, and Haresh Shah as Joint Treasurer.
FIA Chairman Ankur Vaidya expressed his appreciation for the hard work of the 2023 executive team. Gupta, reflecting on his experience as the FIA Vice President, described it as a valuable learning curve. He expressed his commitment to guiding FIA to new heights during his one-year tenure as president. Collaborating with his new team, Gupta aims to reinforce India-US relations.
Gupta’s vision encompasses several key objectives. He intends to champion the interests and well-being of the Indian diaspora in the United States. This will involve promoting cultural exchange and understanding, advocating for the community’s needs, and solidifying FIA’s role as a non-profit grassroots umbrella organization.
Furthermore, Gupta has articulated his dedication to social welfare projects and humanitarian initiatives. These efforts will not only support the Indian diaspora but also benefit the broader local community.
FIA, a venerable non-profit grassroots organization, revealed its 2024 executive team during its Annual General Meeting. Gupta’s presidency aims to enhance India-US ties, advocate for the Indian diaspora, promote cultural exchange, and engage in social welfare projects.
The newly elected President Dr Avinash Gupta said that he has learnt a lot this year during his tenure as the Vice President and thanked his team for all their support. He said that he looks forward to his tenure and would endeavor hard to take FIA to new heights with the support from his new Executive Team and was sure that all of them together will make their motherland India proud.
Dr Avinash Gupta said, he will work towards promoting the interests and welfare of the Indian diaspora in the US, fostering cultural exchange and understanding, advocating for the community’s needs, and strengthening the organization’s role as a non-profit grassroots umbrella organization. Dr Gupta will work on various social welfare projects and humanitarian efforts to support not only the Indian diaspora but also the broader local community.
Dr. Avinash Gupta, chief of Cardiology and president-elect of the medical staff at Monmouth Medical Center Southern Campus (MMCSC) in New Jersey has been elected the Executive Vice President of The Federation of Indian Associations. Current President Kenny Desai will continue in his 2nd term as the President of the FIA.
on Sunday, December 4th, 2023. The general body meeting was to share an overview of the compliance of all member organizations and to assess the overall workings of the FIA and its activities. In addition, the meeting motioned and approved 6 FIA resolutions to the FIA bylaws.
Dr. Avinash Gupta was awarded the Humanitarian Award in October this year, for his exemplary work in public health and social service during the pandemic, in the U.S. and in India. He is an alumni of the Rajendra Institute of Medical Sciences in Ranchi
In the U.S., Gupta led a team of 50 doctors and healthcare professionals to vaccinate 3,500 Indian Americans in Ocean County, New Jersey. As a president of Monmouth Country American Association of Physicians from India (AAPI), he helped raise $150,000 to Monmouth and Ocean County Food Bank. Gupta led the community leaders’ team in establishing the Siddhivinayak Temple and Indian Cultural Center in Toms River in 2012.
Dr. Gupta is very active in community service and has served as President of the Monmouth Ocean County Association of Physicians from India (MOCAAPI) and Bihar Jharkhand Association of North America (BJANA).
He also holds the prestigious title of Chief of Cardiology at Monmouth Medical Center and President of the Medical Staff at Monmouth Medical Center Southern Campus.
He is chairman of Shree Siddhivinayak Temple of USA, Indian Cultural & Community Center in Toms River, and was recently elected as Executive Vice President of FIA.
Dr. Gupta was recently honored for his exemplary work in public health and social service, especially for COVID-19-related relief and humanitarian work in India and the US. “Being involved with community groups and helping others has always been my passion. Community service is very rewarding and fulfilling. It has enriched me as a person,” said Gupta who received the humanitarian award from the Monmouth Medical Center-Southern Campus Gupta at a function in New Jersey on Diwali eve.
Dr. Gupta is married to Dr. Geeta Gupta for over 35 years. They have one son, Abhinav who is currently in his surgical residency. Dr. Gupta has made numerous contributions to healthcare, including initiatives both in the local area and in India to promote vaccinations against COVID-19. He was recognized as an honoree at MMCSC Humanitarian Gala in October last year.
California Governor Gavin Newsom vetoed a bill on Saturday that aimed to explicitly prohibit caste discrimination within the state. This legislation, which had gained approval from the California legislature the previous month, sought to identify caste as a subset of ancestry in the state’s civil rights laws, granting residents legal recourse in cases of caste-based discrimination.
India’s caste system, evolving over centuries, established a rigid social hierarchy based on ideas of purity, with an individual’s caste assigned at birth. Although India formally outlawed caste discrimination shortly after gaining independence in 1947, caste-based bias and inequality persist and have spread to other nations.
Picture: CNN
In his explanation for vetoing the bill, Newsom argued that it was “unnecessary” because the state already prohibited discrimination based on caste. He stated, “In California, we believe everyone deserves to be treated with dignity and respect, no matter who they are, where they come from, who they love, or where they live. That is why California already prohibits discrimination based on sex, race, color, religion, ancestry, national origin, disability, gender identity, sexual orientation, and other characteristics, and state law specifies that these civil rights protections shall be liberally construed.”
Some groups, including individuals of Indian descent, opposed the California measure, contending that it unfairly generalized an entire community. While caste is most commonly associated with India and Hinduism, it has extended to other South Asian countries and religions.
In recent years, individuals who have experienced caste-based oppression in the United States, particularly in Silicon Valley where a substantial number of employees are South Asian immigrants, have begun to speak out about the discrimination they face.
A coalition of civil rights organizations, faith-based groups, and progressive legal scholars supported the bill’s effort to amend the state’s Fair Employment and Housing Act, the Unruh Act, and the Education Code to include “caste” and other aspects of ancestry. Nevertheless, the bill faced fervent opposition from some Indian Americans and Hindu organizations who argued that it unfairly stigmatized South Asians and Hindus.
Equality Labs, an advocacy organization representing Dalits, those at the lowest rung of India’s caste hierarchy, supported the bill. Despite Newsom’s veto, Equality Labs regarded it as a victory. Thenmozhi Soundararajan, Executive Director of Equality Labs, expressed, “While it is heartbreaking to receive the Governor’s veto, it is not a reflection of the incredible democratic power that our communities showed. We did the impossible. Caste-oppressed people have been mobilizing for years to fight against this form of historical violence and will continue to do so.”
Earlier in the year, Seattle became the first U.S. city to prohibit caste discrimination. Several higher education institutions, including Brown University, the California State University System, Colby College, and Brandeis University, have also incorporated caste protections into their nondiscrimination policies.
In 2020, California filed a lawsuit against the tech giant Cisco and two of its engineers, alleging discrimination against an Indian employee because of his lower caste status. Although the state later dropped the case against the two engineers, litigation against Cisco remains ongoing. Cisco stated at the time that it was dedicated to fostering an “inclusive workplace.”
Caste has been a contentious issue in California over the past two decades, particularly regarding the portrayal of Hinduism in textbooks. Some Hindu groups argued that proposed textbook language perpetuated bias and stereotypes against Hindus and lobbied for the removal or modification of certain references to the caste system.
Reactions began pouring in thick and fast on Saturday as soon as California Governor Gavin Newsom vetoed the controversial and groundbreaking caste discrimination Bill SB 403, a legislation that would have added caste to the anti-discriminatory clause of state law. It is no surprise that California’s Democratic Governor Newsom has shamefully vetoed the statewide bill that would have banned caste discrimination. Just days ago, Newsom (who is a multimillionaire himself) outrageously vetoed a bill backed by WGA, SAG-AFTRA, and other labor unions, which would have given unemployment benefits to workers on strike.
This veto on the bill to ban caste discrimination is not coincidentally coming at a time when US imperialism, led currently by President Biden and the Democrats, is courting the regime of Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi and his far-right BJP.
In fact, the Biden administration has said that the Modi regime is a “linchpin” in the US agenda in the New Cold War. And the Hindu right-wing organizations, such as the Hindu American Foundation, which opposed the anti-caste-discrimination bill, are closely aligned with the Modi regime.
It’s clear that Biden and the Democratic Party care far more for the strategic relations of the American ruling class with the reactionary Modi regime than they do for oppressed-caste and other marginalized people.
This is a setback, and it’s important activists and working people learn the lessons and understand why we won in Seattle but not in California.
As Socialist Alternative and I have said since we won our historic first-in-the-nation Seattle legislation against caste discrimination in February, we won because we built a fighting struggle of rank-and-file activists and workers, not putting our faith in Seattle’s Democratic Party establishment.
Here in Seattle too, Democrats, including self-described progressive ones, were initially opposed to our bill, some of them repeating Hindu right-wing talking points.
Seattle Democrats were forced to vote YES only because of the strength of our grassroots, working-class campaign. If anything, given the high stakes in a prominent state like California, such a fighting strategy was even more necessary.
Unfortunately, the NGOs that led the California effort failed to take this approach. They instead worked in collaboration with Democratic politicians, and refused to build a fighting campaign.
Ajay Shah, Convenor, HInduPACT and President of World Hindu Council of America (VHPA) said: “When politically motivated California assembly and senate succumbed to an 18-year long systematic multi-pronged attack engineered by forces inimical to Hindus in various forms, Hindus kept their struggle for truth, justice and equality alive. Today, we thank Gov. Newsom for rejecting Hinduphobic SB-403. SB-403 would have targeted Hindus kids in the elementary schools and Hindu professionals and business owners. It would have led to the bullying of Hindu children and baseless and yet relentless persecution and prosecution of Hindu professionals as we have seen in the CISCO case. I want to especially remember community organizer Milind Makwana who sacrificed his life as he fought against this Bill”
Rakhi Israni, HinduPACT Executive Director, Legal said: “We are grateful to Governor Newsom for standing up for the privacy of Californians. SB-403 would have made it easier for companies to collect and sell our personal information without our knowledge or consent. This is a critical issue, and we appreciate the Governor’s leadership in protecting our privacy. Governor Newsom’s veto of SB-403 is a victory for privacy. It sends a clear message that California will not stand for companies that track and sell our personal information without our consent. We urge the Legislature to sustain the Governor’s veto.”
Amitabh Mittal, General Secretary of World Hindu Council of America (VHPA) said: “Thank you, Gov Newson, for vetoing this draconian bill that attempted to harass and divide the entire Hindu community under the garb of a non-existent “caste” issue in the US. Congtulations to all Hindu, Buddhist, Sikh and Jain American Community members for this crucial victory. We’re proud of all the Leaders who worked relentlessly to make it happen. Nefarious designs of hate, divide and destroy have no place in these United States.
Tejal Shah, Convenor of HMEC (Hindu Mandir Empowerment Council), an initiative of World Hindu Council of America (VHPA), representing hundreds of North American temples said: “The impact of SB-403 on the Hindu temples and culture would have been devastating. Chanting of Sanskrit mantras during prayers would have been construed as castetist act. Today, we thank Gov. Newsom for protecting the right of Hindus to practice their religion in privacy and freely.”
Newsom’s veto of these pro-working-class and anti-oppression bills is a reminder, once again, of how the Democratic Party is as tied to the interests of the ruling class as the Republicans are. Working people and those fighting against caste discrimination and other forms of oppression need to build independent movements and fight to build our own political organizations, because the Democratic Party is a graveyard of social movements.
Scientists Pierre Agostini, Ferenc Krausz and Anne L’Huillier won the 2023 Nobel Prize in Physics for creating incredibly short pulses of light that can capture processes inside atoms and molecules, in work which could advance medical diagnostics and electronics.
The discovery
The trio was honoured for experimental methods that generate pulses of light that last attoseconds.
To understand how an electron travels, the scientists had to look at an extremely short time period — one-quintillionth of a second (known as an attosecond) — just like photographers use a quick shutter speed while photographing hummingbirds.
Applications
At this point, this science is about understanding our universe, but the hope is that it will eventually have many practical applications in electronics, diagnosing diseases and basic chemistry.
Potential applications of the discovery include medical diagnostics, where the shortest pulses can be used to identify molecules, and in electronics for understanding and controlling how electrons behave in a particular material.
Meet the scientists
Agostini, a French-American, works at the Ohio State University in Columbus. Krausz, who was born in Hungary, is director at the Max Planck Institute of Quantum Optics in Garching, Germany, as well as professor at the Ludwig-Maximilians-Universitaet in Munich. French-born L’Huillier is a professor at Lund University in Sweden.
And the money
The three will share the 11 million Swedish kronor (USD 1 million) drawn from a bequest left by the award’s creator, Swedish inventor Alfred Nobel, who died in 1896. The prize money was raised by 1 million kronor this year because of the plunging value of the Swedish currency.
Last year’s winner
Three scientists Alain Aspect (France), John Clauser (US) and Anton Zeilinger (Austria) jointly won the physics prize in 2022 for groundbreaking work in the field of quantum entanglement, where two particles are linked regardless of the space between them – something that unsettled Einstein himself who once referred to it as “spooky action at a distance”.
Nearly five years ago, acting on a warrant from a federal judge in New York, Canadian police arrested a high-profile Chinese businesswoman, Meng Wanzhou, as she was changing planes at Vancouver’s international airport on her way from Hong Kong to Mexico City and points beyond.
The charges against Meng, the chief financial officer of Chinese mobile phone and electronics giant Huawei, had nothing to do with Canada. They involved allegations that she had knowingly used a Huawei subsidiary, Skycom, to do business with Iran in violation of U.S. sanctions against that country. In arresting her, Ottawa was merely complying with a U.S. request in accordance with standing extradition arrangements between the two countries. But it also complied for another, less tangible reason: Canada and the United States have long been among the world’s closest allies.
Picture: FP
The economic, military, and civilian ties linking two countries with similar histories, and which stretch along either side of the world’s longest border, is so solid that one hears little hyperventilation or chest-beating about it in either country. It’s nothing like the United States’ relationship with Britain, which seems to require constant political reminders of the greatness of their partnership, or with Japan, which gets its own slightly less ritualized restatements of its importance to the United States.
In fact, Canada paid a high price for living up to its side of the relationship with Washington. Beijing condemned Meng’s arrest as arbitrary and illegal, warning Canada that there would be “grave consequences” for its actions. This proved no idle threat: Nine days after Meng’s arrest, China detained two Canadians, Michael Kovrig, a former diplomat, and Michael Spavor, an entrepreneur, on espionage charges. The two were held for the next three years, effectively as hostages, until Meng and her lawyers reached a deferred prosecution agreement with the U.S. government, allowing her to fly home. China, in return, released Kovrig and Spavor.
This saga, which consumed Canadian public attention from start to finish but rarely generated comparable attention south of Canada’s border, has been in my mind as I’ve watched Canada work its way through another sticky and delicate international spat. In this recent crisis, Prime Minister Justin Trudeau publicly expressed suspicion that India had been involved in the assassination of a Sikh activist named Hardeep Singh Nijjar on Canadian soil. This drew a furious response from New Delhi, resulting in the two countries expelling some of each other’s diplomats and India suspending new visas for Canadian applicants, among other measures.
India is learnt to have told Canada to withdraw around 40 diplomats from the country by October 10 amid worsening ties between the two nations, according to reports. The reports have said that New Delhi has conveyed to Canada that if the diplomats are not withdrawn by the deadline, they will lose their diplomatic immunity.
There are more than 60 Canadian diplomats posted in India.
Last month, after Canadian Prime Minister Justin Trudeau had alleged in Parliament that Indian intelligence agents may have been involved in the murder of Sikh pro-Khalistan hardliner Hardeep Singh Nijjar, the diplomatic relations have hit an all time low between the two nations. Following Trudeau’s allegations, both the countries had expelled a diplomat each. India had also termed Canada’s allegations as “politically driven”.
External Affairs Ministry spokesperson Arindam Bagchi had said: “Yes, we’ve informed the government of Canada that there should be parity in strength in our mutual diplomatic presence. Their number is very much higher than ours in Canada… I assume there will be a reduction from the Canadian side.”
Three years after the first mRNA-based vaccines became available, to prevent COVID-19, the Nobel Prize in Physiology and Medicine was awarded to two scientists who made those vaccines possible. Katalin Kariko and Dr. Drew Weissman were recognized for their work modifying the genetic material mRNA to make it more useful in treatments like vaccines.
Picture: USA Today
When they met at the University of Pennsylvania in the 1990s, Kariko had been a longtime champion of mRNA technology, but struggled to convince the rest of the scientific community of its promise since RNA was notoriously unstable and had not produced any meaningful treatments. Weissman was working on developing an HIV vaccine, and thought an mRNA approach might be worth a try. The rest is now Nobel history.
Here are some of the highlights of their journey:
mRNA theoretically held a lot of promise in being able to treat genetic and infectious diseases, but also tended to aggravate the immune system, creating a dangerous inflammatory reaction.
Kariko and Weissman spent decades figuring out that changing the mRNA code slightly would make it less prone to stimulating this aggressive inflammatory response.
Their discovery made the COVID-19 vaccines possible, and is now being
The winners
Hungarian scientist Katalin Kariko and her US colleague Drew Weissman, who met for the first time while waiting in the queue for a photocopier before making mRNA molecule discoveries, paving the way for Covid-19 vaccines, won the 2023 Nobel Prize for Medicine on Monday.
The discovery
The discoveries by the two Nobel Prize scientists were critical for developing effective mRNA vaccines against Covid-19 during the pandemic that began in early 2020.
Through their groundbreaking findings, which have fundamentally changed our understanding of how mRNA interacts with our immune system, they contributed to the unprecedented rate of vaccine development during one of the greatest threats to human health in modern times.
The research
Kariko, 68, and Weissman, 64, longstanding colleagues at the University of Pennsylvania in the US, have already won a slew of awards for their research.
In recognising the duo this year, the Nobel committee broke with its usual practice of honouring decades-old research, aimed at ensuring it has stood the test of time.
While the prizewinning research dates back to 2005, the first vaccines to use the mRNA technology came out just three years ago and is now being used to develop other treatments for diseases and illnesses such as cancer, influenza and heart failure.
Prize money
The pair will receive their prize, consisting of a diploma, a gold medal and a $1 million cheque, from King Carl XVI Gustaf at a formal ceremony in Stockholm on December 10, the anniversary of the 1896 death of scientist Alfred Nobel who instituted the prizes in his last will and testament.
Last year’s winner
Last year’s medicine prize went to Swede Svante Paabo for sequencing the genome of the Neanderthal and other past winners include Alexander Fleming, who shared the 1945 prize for the discovery of penicillin.
Charitable giving is a deeply ingrained tradition in the United States, reflecting a blend of entrepreneurial spirit, social consciousness, and religious values. The Philanthropy Roundtable reports that over 80% of all donations to charities and nonprofit organizations in the US come from individuals, and Americans outpace their European counterparts in giving by a factor of seven. Canadians, often known for their generosity, lag behind, contributing about half as much.
The philanthropic landscape in the US can be attributed to three unique elements:
1.Entrepreneurial Spirit: The American dream is synonymous with achieving success and giving back. Many individuals and corporations consider it a duty to help those less fortunate once they’ve achieved their goals.
2.Social Consciousness: From national organizations like the ACLU to local food banks and disaster relief funds, Americans have a rich tradition of assisting their neighbors in times of need.
3.Religion: The United States remains one of the most religious countries globally, with regular giving to churches, synagogues, mosques, temples, and other religious institutions forming an integral part of many Americans’ lives.
Now, let’s delve into the details of charitable giving in the US.
Percentage of American Households Engaging in Charitable Giving
The Philanthropy Roundtable reports that 60% of American households engage in charitable giving, reflecting the nation’s commitment to helping those in need.
Trends in Charitable Giving
Even amidst the global COVID-19 pandemic in 2020, charitable giving in the US continued to follow an upward trajectory. Charity Navigator, a watchdog for charities and nonprofits, notes that since 1977, Americans have increased their giving every year, with a few exceptions in 1987, 2008, and 2009. In this sense, 2020 simply continued the trend of giving more than the previous year.
Religious Giving
Determining which religious group is the most charitable is a complex task due to the diversity of America’s religious makeup. However, recent studies shed some light:
– Jews and Muslims donate more to public society benefit organizations involved in civil rights and social inequalities compared to their Christian and non-Christian counterparts.
– Among Christian groups, Mormons emerge as the most generous, followed by Evangelicals, Protestants, and American Catholics, particularly in the areas of family, children, and human services and causes.
– Jews stand out for their donations to non-Jewish organizations, showcasing the varied giving habits across different beliefs and traditions.
Average Charitable Contributions
The average annual charity donation for Americans in 2020 stood at $737 according to Giving USA. However, this figure can be misleading due to disparities:
– High net worth families donated an average of $29,269.
– For the general population, the average donation was only $2,514.
– The average online donation amounted to $177.
– Non-profit websites received an average of $1.13 from each visitor.
– Many Americans also contribute in-kind donations, such as goods to organizations like Goodwill, the Salvation Army, and local charities, as well as food pantries, which are often not monetarily quantified.
Thus, the average charitable contribution varies significantly based on income, donation method, and recipient.
Charitable Giving by Month
December is the peak month for charitable giving, maintaining its status as the preferred time for generosity in both 2019 and 2020. However, there are interesting nuances:
– In 2020, during the height of the pandemic, charitable giving experienced significant declines in March, April, and May, as reported by Nonprofit Source.
– Charities with recurring monthly giving programs receive an average of $52 each month per donor, showing the effectiveness of this approach.
– Donors who set up recurring monthly donations give 42% more than one-time givers, according to Nonprofit Source.
The Psychology of Asking for $19 a Month
Charities often request donations of $19 a month for two key reasons:
1.Psychology: Studies on consumer behavior suggest that prices ending in numbers like 4, 7, and 9 are perceived as more affordable and appealing. Thus, $19 appears more manageable than $20 to potential donors.
2.IRS Requirements: Charities and nonprofits must provide receipts for annual donations totaling $250 or more. Requesting $19 monthly ensures that the yearly total ($228) falls below this threshold, saving time and costs associated with sending receipts.
Charitable Giving Demographics
Understanding the demographics of charitable donors provides valuable insights:
Age Group: The average age of US donors is 64, predominantly representing the Baby Boomer generation.
Geographical Distribution: Utah stands out as the most charitable state in the US, with over half of the top ten states for total giving located in the South. This correlates with the generosity of Mormons and Evangelical Christians, who are among the country’s most significant donors.
Motivations for Charitable Giving
Research has identified seven key reasons why people give to charities:
1.Happiness: Giving triggers the release of dopamine, the “feel-good” chemical in the brain, leading to increased happiness.
2.Empowerment: Donors feel empowered when they witness their contributions directly benefiting their chosen causes.
3.Personal Connection: Many donors have personal or emotional ties to specific charitable causes.
4.Trustworthiness: Donors prefer charities and nonprofits with a track record of tangible impact.
5.Community: Being part of a larger community and making a difference motivates donors across various sectors, from animal welfare to the arts.
6.Awareness: Charities that effectively capture donors’ attention through advertising, social media, or community events tend to receive more support.
7.Tax Benefits: Tax deductions for charitable donations motivate a significant portion of donors, including those with modest incomes.
Charitable Giving by Income Group
A closer look at charitable giving by income brackets reveals some unexpected trends:
Those earning less than $50,000 annually donate a higher percentage of their income to charity.
Conversely, those with incomes ranging from $100,000 to $500,000 give the least in terms of total charitable donations relative to their gross income.
Charitable Giving Across Generations
Let’s delve into the fascinating world of charitable giving across different age groups, from the tech-savvy Millennials to the seasoned members of the Silent Generation.
Millennials: The Tech-Savvy Donors
Millennials, often associated with digital innovation, contribute an average of $481 to charitable causes annually, with a remarkable 84% engaging in philanthropy. They have a strong penchant for online giving, frequently opting for recurring donations, with over 40% setting up monthly deductions from their credit or debit cards. Furthermore, Millennials are avid users of mobile devices, employing phones, tablets, and laptops to research charities, make donations, and advocate for various causes.
The causes that resonate most with Millennials are children’s charities, health and medical nonprofits, local places of worship, and human rights and international affairs groups.
Generation X: Balancing Giving and Volunteering
Generation X, with an average donation of $732 per individual per year, boasts a 59% participation rate in charitable giving. While their donations may be fewer in number compared to Millennials, Gen Xers are more inclined to initiate fundraising campaigns and actively volunteer for charitable endeavors. Email outreach stands out as the most influential method for engaging this generation in philanthropy.
Gen Xers’ charitable preferences align with local social and human services organizations, animal-related causes, children’s charities, and local places of worship.
Baby Boomers: Generosity Knows No Bounds
Baby Boomers exhibit remarkable generosity, averaging $1,212 in annual donations per person. An impressive 72% of the Baby Boomer generation contributes to charitable causes, representing a significant 43% of all yearly donations. Many of these Boomers, who were once 1960s activists, continue to support causes related to social justice, world peace, and environmental issues.
Their charitable support primarily gravitates toward local social services nonprofits, animal organizations, children’s charities, human rights and international affairs, and local places of worship.
The Silent Generation: Quiet Yet Impactful Giving
The Silent Generation, born between 1927 and 1946, donates an average of $1,367 annually per person, with a remarkable 88% of them participating in charitable giving. Despite comprising only 11% of the US population, they contribute a significant 26% of all charitable donations. Their giving preferences lean toward organizations that reach out via direct mail and causes featured in the news.
Silent Generation donations predominantly support veterans’ causes, local social services, emergency and disaster relief efforts, and local places of worship.
Generational Giving Trends in 2020
In 2020, amidst the challenges posed by the pandemic, only two sub-sectors of nonprofit organizations witnessed notable growth in donations. Local human and social services organizations experienced a 12% surge in giving, while faith-based giving increased by 3%. Conversely, medical researchers and arts and culture subsectors faced declines in donations.
Medical research may have been affected due to the government’s extensive investments in COVID-19 research, potentially overshadowing other medical causes. Additionally, the dominance of COVID-19 news coverage may have diverted donors’ attention away from other health-related issues. Arts, culture, and humanities groups struggled to raise funds due to the limitations imposed by pandemic-related restrictions.
Religious and Church Charitable Giving
Religious giving holds a significant place in the philanthropic landscape, with all four major generational groups contributing to local places of worship.
Most Charitable Giving by Religion
Jewish individuals top the list, contributing an average of $2,526 annually, followed by Protestants at $1,749, Muslims at $1,178, and Catholics at $1,142. Jewish and Muslim donors often direct their contributions to social and human rights organizations, while Christian giving preferences vary by denomination. Nevertheless, 32% of all donations in the US find their way to local places of worship or faith-based nonprofits.
Average Family Contributions to Local Places of Worship
On average, Americans donate $17 weekly to their local places of worship, but surprisingly, 37% of weekly attendees do not contribute at all. Only 5% of congregants are consistent givers. The average weekly church donation per person has experienced a slight decline, dropping nearly 1% since the Great Depression. During the 1930s, Christians contributed 3.3% of their total income to churches, whereas today’s faithful allocate 2.5%.
An intriguing observation is that 75% of non-religious, non-affiliated Americans engage in charitable giving, with many directing their contributions toward faith-based organizations.
Religious Organizations’ Annual Revenue: A Closer Look
Religious organizations are a significant recipient of monetary donations, with approximately one-third of all annual donations flowing in their direction. In 2020, this amounted to a substantial $128.17 billion, as revealed by an extensive survey of IRS tax returns.
Picture: Giving USA
While religious giving has maintained its stability at around the 30% mark for several years, recent trends suggest potential shifts on the horizon. Religious affiliation and regular attendance have been on a decline, with only 36% of American adults claiming to participate in weekly worship.
Volunteer Fundraising Insights: Statistics, Facts, and Trends
We’ve already established that Baby Boomers tend to be the most active volunteers, but there are other intriguing aspects to consider when it comes to volunteering.
The Volunteer Landscape
In the United States, a remarkable 77.34 million adults, equivalent to 30% of the adult population, engaged in volunteering in 2020. These dedicated individuals collectively contributed over 1.6 billion hours of their time, reflecting the spirit of community service.
Volunteer Time Investment
On average, American volunteers devoted 3.5 hours per week to their chosen causes, resulting in an estimated total value of unpaid labor and services amounting to a staggering $255 billion, as reported by Americorps.
Shifting Volunteer Demographics
Notably, there have been discernible shifts in the demographics of volunteers. In 2020, the typical volunteer was more likely to be:
– Married
– Female
– Aged 35-44
– White
– Possessing higher or secondary education
– A parent with children under 18
However, this trend may not persist, given the influence of the pandemic. The pandemic necessitated adjustments, particularly for working mothers who switched to remote work to accommodate their children’s needs when schools closed. This cohort may have chosen to contribute their available “non-lockdown” time to fulfill community needs and simply to escape their homes. Additionally, older generations of volunteers expressed reduced willingness to volunteer due to COVID-19 health concerns.
While Baby Boomers traditionally lead in overall volunteering, in 2020, the younger Gen X and older Millennial mothers emerged as the most active volunteers.
Corporate Giving: A Look into Corporate Generosity
Now, let’s explore corporate philanthropy and what businesses contributed in the previous year.
Average Corporate Contributions
Corporate donations to nonprofit organizations amounted to $24.8 billion in 2020, reflecting a 6% decline, according to Giving USA’s report. Corporate giving closely aligns with pre-tax profits, in contrast to individual giving, which exhibits a stronger correlation with stock market performance. Last year, the stock market thrived while many corporations faced profit reductions due to the pandemic’s economic impact.
Leading Corporate Donors in America
In 2020, Pfizer emerged as the most charitable corporation in the United States, according to the Chronicle of Philanthropy. Completing the list of the top five most generous organizations are:
Pfizer
Gilead Sciences
Merck and Company
Walmart
Google
Corporate Contributions to Religious Organizations
Kroger stands out as Double the Donation Organization’s leading corporation in support of churches and other religious institutions. They generously contribute millions in both monetary funds and products to aid hunger relief, homeless support, and various programs managed by local religious entities.
School Fundraising Statistics: Impact of the Pandemic
In 2020, fundraising for K-12 schools experienced a notable 4.6% decline, as reported by Giving USA. Typically, schools generate approximately $5000 per school each year through fundraising activities. The closure of schools due to the pandemic likely contributed to this decrease in fundraising revenues.
Online Giving Trends: A Digital Perspective on Philanthropy
Online charitable giving experienced substantial growth in 2020, which can largely be attributed to the pandemic’s influence.
Online Charitable Giving Growth
In 2020, every sector witnessed a minimum of a 15% increase in charitable giving compared to previous years, with the overall charitable giving growth rate surging by 20%.
Insights into Giving Tuesday
The popularity of Giving Tuesday has continued to rise since its inception in 2012, with $380 million raised in the most recent year.
Origins of Giving Tuesday
Giving Tuesday was initiated in 2012 by the United Nations Foundation in New York City. It falls on the first Tuesday following the Thanksgiving holiday.
Online Crowdfunding Insights
Online crowdfunding has become an essential tool for nonprofits, with notable campaigns achieving substantial success.
Notable Crowdfunding Campaigns
Two nonprofit crowdfunding campaigns that achieved significant success were conducted by Save the Children and the American Red Cross, raising $20 million and $4.7 million, respectively.
Key Factors Influencing Crowdfunding Success
Success in crowdfunding campaigns largely depends on several factors, including:
– Extensive sharing on social media, with success rates increasing with the number of social media contacts. For instance, having 10 friends share increases success by 9%, while 100 friends lead to a 20% boost.
– Comprehensive campaign descriptions ranging from 300 to 500 words.
– Regular updates to engage and inform supporters; campaigns with updates every 5 days garner three times more donations.
– The inclusion of videos in campaign appeals, resulting in a 150% increase in donations compared to campaigns without video content.
Global Nonprofit Landscape
The world boasts 1.54 million nonprofits registered with the IRS, as documented by the National Center for Charitable Statistics. This expansive array of organizations offers numerous causes to support.
In Conclusion
Even in a year characterized by unprecedented uncertainty and upheaval like 2020, the spirit of giving has endured and, remarkably, flourished. Americans continued to give, and their generosity seemed to grow even amidst adversity, social unrest, and political divisions.
This enduring generosity reflects a remarkable facet of American society.
John Kelly, the former White House chief of staff under Donald Trump, has delivered a scathing critique of the ex-president in an exclusive statement to CNN. Kelly chose to set the record straight by confirming, on the record, several troubling accounts of remarks made by Trump behind closed doors, targeting U.S. service members and veterans. Kelly recounted a series of objectionable comments that he personally witnessed Trump make.
When asked to weigh in on his former boss, Kelly responded, “What can I add that has not already been said?” He proceeded to highlight Trump’s derogatory attitudes towards those who serve in the military and veterans. Kelly recalled Trump referring to them as “suckers” and insinuating that there was nothing in it for them. Trump’s reluctance to be seen with military amputees was another point of concern for Kelly. Additionally, Kelly emphasized Trump’s open contempt for Gold Star families during the 2016 campaign and his derogatory comments about fallen heroes.
Picture:CoopWB
Kelly continued to outline his grievances, noting Trump’s lack of honesty on various issues, including the protection of unborn life, women’s rights, minority rights, evangelical Christians, Jews, and the working class. Kelly expressed his belief that Trump had a fundamental misunderstanding of American values and principles. He accused Trump of showing admiration for autocrats and murderous dictators while displaying contempt for democratic institutions, the Constitution, and the rule of law.
In conclusion, Kelly remarked, “There is nothing more that can be said,” before adding, “God help us.”
Kelly’s statement serves as confirmation, on the record, of several details from a 2020 article in The Atlantic by editor-in-chief Jeffrey Goldberg. This includes an incident where Trump, standing at Arlington National Cemetery’s Section 60 on Memorial Day 2017, questioned, “What was in it for them?” regarding the soldiers killed in Afghanistan and Iraq.
The Atlantic article also delved into Trump’s inability to comprehend the respect given to former prisoners of war and those shot down in combat. Trump’s public dismissal of Senator John McCain’s war hero status and his private labeling of McCain and former President George H. W. Bush as “losers” are among the details confirmed by Kelly.
CNN reached out to the Trump campaign for comment, revealing that a former administration official had confirmed details from The Atlantic’s 2020 story without naming Kelly. The Trump campaign responded by attacking the character and credibility of retired Joint Chiefs of Staff Chairman General Mark Milley, who was not involved in the story. A Trump campaign spokesperson later dismissed Kelly’s statement as “debunked stories.”
Kelly’s statement also sheds light on a story from the book “The Divider: Trump in the White House, 2017-2021,” by Susan Glasser and Peter Baker. In this account, Trump expressed his desire to exclude wounded veterans from a military parade planned in his honor. Trump’s reasoning was that their presence did not “look good for me.” Kelly emphasized that wounded veterans are heroes, and their exclusion contradicted societal values.
This revelation aligns with a recent article by Jeffrey Goldberg in The Atlantic, profiling retired Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff General Mark Milley. The article recounted Trump’s discomfort upon seeing severely wounded Army Captain Luis Avila singing “God Bless America” at an event. Trump’s reaction was, “Why do you bring people like that here? No one wants to see that, the wounded.”
Kelly’s statement also alludes to a comment made by Trump in response to the same article. This article, published in the final days of Trump’s presidency in 2020, detailed how General Milley received intelligence suggesting that the Chinese military was concerned that Trump might order a military strike against them. Acting with authorization from Trump administration officials, Milley reassured his Chinese counterparts that such an attack was not imminent.
In 2021, the revelation of this phone call was first made public in the book “Peril” by Bob Woodward and Robert Costa. However, Trump recently commented on his social media platform, characterizing the call as “an act so egregious that, in times gone by, the punishment would have been DEATH.”
When asked about the suggestion that he deserves execution, Milley declined to provide a direct response but emphasized his commitment to upholding the Constitution in an interview with Norah O’Donnell on “60 Minutes.”
Kelly’s statement to CNN follows an interview with former Trump White House aide Cassidy Hutchinson, who was promoting her new book, “Enough.” During the interview, Hutchinson issued a warning to the public, stating that “Donald Trump is the most grave threat we will face to our democracy in our lifetime, and potentially in American history.”
Interestingly, Hutchinson’s book, “Enough,” includes a scene in which she and then-White House communications director Alyssa Farah Griffin push back against Goldberg’s 2020 story. Griffin had issued a statement to The Atlantic after the story was published, denying its accuracy.
In response to inquiries over the weekend, Griffin remarked, “Despite publicly praising the military and claiming to be the most pro-military president, there’s a demonstrable record of Trump bashing the most decorated service members in our country, from Gen. Mattis to Kelly to Milley, to criticizing the wounded or deceased like John McCain. Donald Trump will fundamentally never understand service the way those who have actually served in uniform will, and it’s one of the countless reasons he’s unfit to be commander in chief.”
It is noteworthy that no other presidential candidate in history has faced such significant criticism from former members of his inner circle. Mark Esper, Trump’s former secretary of defense, conveyed his view to CNN in November 2022, stating, “I think he’s unfit for office. … He puts himself before country. His actions are all about him and not about the country. And then, of course, I believe he has integrity and character issues as well.”
Similarly, Trump’s former attorney general, Bill Barr, shared his perspective with CBS in June, characterizing Trump as “a consummate narcissist” who consistently engages in reckless behavior. Barr emphasized that Trump prioritizes his own interests and ego above all else, including the country’s interests, rendering him unfit for leadership.
In a groundbreaking move, Dalmia Bharat Group has achieved the distinction of becoming the first corporate entity in India to adopt a historic monument classified under the Green category of the Monument Mitras program. The Dalmia Bharat Group has undertaken the adoption of the iconic Red Fort, a 17th-century marvel located in Delhi, committing a staggering sum of INR 250 million (INR 25 crores) for a duration spanning five years. This remarkable achievement saw them outshine competitors like IndiGo Airlines and the GMR Group, securing one of the most prestigious contracts available through the Indian government’s ‘Adopt A Heritage’ initiative.
The adoption of the Red Fort in Delhi was made possible through the ‘Adopt a Heritage’ project, a visionary concept developed in collaboration with the Ministry of Tourism, Ministry of Culture, and the Archaeological Survey of India. This project was officially launched on September 27, 2017, coinciding with World Tourism Day, by President Ram Nath Kovind. It was conceived to provide corporate entities, public sector organizations, or individuals with the opportunity to become Monument Mitras, essentially friends of heritage sites. Through these adoptions, the Central Government seeks to facilitate the development of monuments, heritage sites, and tourist destinations across India.
Controversy Surrounding the Red Fort Adoption
The adoption of the Red Fort by the Dalmia Bharat Group has sparked vigorous debates among historians, writers, academicians, and cultural enthusiasts. These discussions revolve around the ethical implications of the project, with some critics questioning how the government could seemingly “pawn off” a significant portion of India’s historical legacy as if it were their “family heirlooms.” On the other hand, proponents argue that the monuments have merely been “adopted” and not “purchased,” emphasizing that this approach could ultimately reduce the government’s overseas loans by diverting funds from the maintenance of India’s heritage sites.
Prominent voices from both sides of the debate have shared their opinions:
“There’s a huge difference between Dalmia adopting, say, a haveli in Old Dilli and adopting the Red Fort itself. Tier 1 monuments are a nation’s crown jewels. They should not be played around with. It’s even more worrying that corporates cannot be held responsible for any damage.”
— William Dalrymple
“Main issue is interest, knowledge, and expertise. If a non-governmental entity has a proven track record in this area like the Aga Khan Trust, there is less of an issue. What is Dalmia’s track record of maintaining heritage monuments?”
— Patralekha Chatterjee
“If you hire someone to clean your house doesn’t mean you are selling your house to them. No, Red Fort is not being sold. It’s an innovative way to save the government some money and preserve a monument.” — Chetan Bhagat
Red Fort and Gandikota Fort: The Adoption Agreement
According to the Memorandum of Understanding, Dalmia Bharat Group is not only adopting the Red Fort but also the Gandikota Fort in Kadapa, Andhra Pradesh. This dual adoption arrangement represents a significant commitment to preserving India’s historical treasures. In the past, similar agreements were reached for the adoption of the Mt. Stok Kangri trek route in Ladakh, Jammu and Kashmir, as well as the Gangotri Temple Area & Trail in Gaumukh, Uttarakhand. These agreements were signed by the Adventure Tour Operators Association of India and the State of Jammu & Kashmir. In total, approximately 90 monuments have been earmarked for adoption, categorized as Green, Blue, and Orange based on their importance and popularity among tourists.
The Green category includes not only the Red Fort but also the Taj Mahal in Agra, Qutub Minar in Mehrauli, and the Konark Temple in Odisha. In the Blue category, you will find Jantar Mantar and Purana Quila, both located in Delhi, while the Orange category encompasses monuments like Tipu Palace in Bengaluru and the Sanchi Stupa in Madhya Pradesh. Entities interested in becoming Mitras can choose to adopt from the Blue or Orange category, or a combination of the three categories. However, they are not permitted to solely adopt monuments or heritage sites from the Green category.
Corporate Adoption of India’s Monumental Heritage
The Dalmia Bharat Group’s adoption of the Red Fort sets a significant precedent, but it is not an isolated instance. Letters of Intent have been awarded to several other prominent entities for the adoption of various monuments. Among them, the Sun Temple in Konark, Odisha, Udayagiri & Khandagiri Sites in Bhubaneshwar, Orissa, Gol Gumbaz in Bijapur, Karnataka, and Kotla Feroz Shah in Delhi have been chosen for adoption by the Dalmia Bharat Group.
Furthermore, a diverse array of industries, including hospitality, travel, and banking, have also received Letters of Intent for the adoption of other monuments. Some of the entities involved in this monumental initiative include Yes Bank, SBI Foundation, TK International Limited, Yatra Online Pvt Limited, ITC Hotels, and NBCC. These Letters of Intent have been issued in different phases to facilitate the adoption of over 90 heritage sites, contributing to the preservation and promotion of India’s rich historical legacy.
In a dramatic twist of events, both the House and Senate successfully passed a measure on Saturday, ensuring that government funding remains in place until mid-November. This timely bipartisan effort materialized after months of fruitless negotiations within a divided Congress, leading many in Washington to brace themselves for an imminent government shutdown.
Had a bill not been passed by midnight, it would have marked the fourth government shutdown in the past decade. This would have dire consequences, affecting hundreds of thousands of federal workers and government contractors who would have been left without pay until a resolution was reached. However, as Saturday afternoon progressed, it became evident that both sides were diligently working towards a compromise to avert this crisis. Republican House Speaker Kevin McCarthy, despite facing resistance from the far-right faction of his party, made a surprising move by introducing a clean stopgap bill. He understood that the bill could only pass with substantial support from Democratic members of the House.
In McCarthy’s words, “It’s alright if Republicans and Democrats join together to do what is right. If somebody wants to make a motion against me, bring it. There has to be an adult in the room.” This measure extended government funding for approximately 45 days and included a $16 billion allocation for disaster relief. Notably, it lacked funding for Ukraine, which had faced opposition from many far-right Republicans. Furthermore, it did not incorporate border security provisions, which had been a priority for many House Republicans. Lawmakers pledged to address both of these issues through separate initiatives.
The swift and suspenseful developments on Capitol Hill on Saturday showcased the precarious position of the functioning federal government. Shortly after passing the House, the Senate also approved the measure with a vote of 88 to 9, forwarding the bill to President Joe Biden, who is expected to sign it before the midnight deadline.
This strategic move appeared to be McCarthy’s last-ditch effort to demonstrate that Republicans were committed to keeping the government operational after their initial attempts to pass their own stopgap bill had failed on Friday. However, it also exposed McCarthy to political risks, as he grapples with ongoing threats from the far-right wing of his party, who have vowed to remove him from the speakership if he collaborates with Democrats on funding. In essence, McCarthy decided to take a gamble on his political future in order to ensure the uninterrupted operation of federal agencies.
With House Republicans facing the challenge of governing with a slim five-seat majority, McCarthy’s leadership is most directly threatened by Florida Rep. Matt Gaetz and at least four other conservative hardliners. Gaetz remarked, “I’ve said that whether or not Kevin McCarthy faces a motion to vacate is entirely within his control because all he had to do was comply with the agreement that he made with us in January. Putting this bill on the floor and passing it with Democrats would be such an obvious, blatant, and clear violation of that. We would have to deal with it.”
Before the vote, House Republican leadership expressed a sense of inevitability, asserting that they had explored all other options. Dissident conservatives had previously derailed an earlier plan, leaving them with little choice but to pass a bill extending funding at the current annual rate of $1.6 trillion through November 17th. This closely aligned with the Senate’s approach, except for the absence of emergency funds worth $6 billion for Ukraine.
The decision to temporarily exclude Ukraine aid represents a significant setback for the White House and President Volodymyr Zelensky. Zelensky had met with President Biden just a week earlier and had urgently requested new weapons systems, including F-16 fighter jets and longer-range ATACMS missiles. The White House had requested $20.6 billion from Congress to support Ukraine in its ongoing conflict with Russia. A House Democrat revealed that Senate Democrats would initiate efforts to secure supplementary funding for Ukraine as early as the following week.
Rep. Mike Quigley of Illinois, the sole House Democrat to vote against the short-term measure, cited the absence of Ukraine funding as his reason, stating, “Putin is celebrating. We’ve got 45 days to fix it.” House Democratic leadership emphasized that Ukraine funding remained a top priority, asserting that they expected McCarthy to advance a bill supporting Ukraine for an up-or-down vote when the House reconvened.
McCarthy’s decision to advance the legislation on Saturday marked a significant departure for the Speaker, who had spent months attempting to appease a dissident faction within his party. Despite offering spending bills with substantial cuts and additional restrictions on migrants, he had failed to secure the necessary support from within his caucus. McCarthy expressed his frustration earlier on Saturday, remarking, “I have tried for eight months…I couldn’t get 218 Republicans.”
Picture: Yahoo
Rep. Steve Scalise, a Louisiana Republican and the majority leader, declared that his party would recommence the appropriations process on Monday. They would continue advocating for border security restrictions and spending cuts until the November 17th deadline. Scalise emphasized, “Believe me, this is not the end. This is the beginning of our continued fight to secure our border, to get government spending under control, and to get our economy back on track.”
The drama on Saturday extended to the Democratic side when Rep. Jamaal Bowman of New York inadvertently triggered a fire alarm in one of the Capitol office buildings. This prompted a building-wide evacuation at a critical moment when House GOP leadership was scrambling to pass the bill and Democrats were requesting more time to comprehend its contents. Bowman later clarified that it was a mistake, and he was hurrying to secure votes. However, Republican leadership has called for an ethics investigation into the incident, alleging that it was an attempt to delay the vote. Republican Rep. Nicole Malliotakis, also from New York, drafted a resolution to expel Bowman from Congress over the incident.
The passage of this legislation on Saturday concluded a nerve-wracking week in Washington, during which federal agencies prepared for a government shutdown that many believed was imminent. Essential workers, including the armed forces, air traffic controllers, and airport security personnel, faced the grim prospect of working without pay until the standoff was resolved.
While Congress successfully avoided an immediate shutdown, they have essentially deferred their problems to mid-November, when the latest legislation is set to expire. Congress has yet to make significant progress on the 12 annual appropriations bills that fund several federal agencies, raising the possibility that a shutdown could still occur, potentially during the Thanksgiving holiday period.
After a pause of more than three years due to the economic upheaval caused by the coronavirus pandemic, student loan payments officially resume this Sunday. The Biden administration has made the decision to reactivate all student loan accounts, affecting over 28 million borrowers. Despite ongoing resistance from advocates and concerns about a potential government shutdown, this move has been met with mixed reactions.
Natalia Abrams, President and Founder of the Student Debt Crisis Center, expressed her dismay, saying, “It’s a sad day for student loan borrowers and for the country that student loans have to come back on, especially with the threat of a looming government shutdown, potentially on the same day. It’s just wild.”
A survey conducted by Life and My Finances in July revealed that half of borrowers claimed they did not earn enough to afford their student loan payments, and at the time, only 22 percent had a plan in place for repayment. Some borrowers have resorted to a “student debt strike,” refusing to make payments as a form of protest against the system.
President Biden, who had made relief for student loan borrowers a central promise of his 2020 campaign, has introduced an “on-ramp” repayment plan. Under this plan, borrowers can miss their monthly payments for the next year with fewer consequences than before. The Department of Education will not label borrowers as delinquent, garnish their wages, or send them to debt collectors if they miss payments. However, interest will continue to accrue on their loans, potentially affecting their credit scores, even though missed payments will not be reported to credit card companies.
Jacob Channel, Senior Economist and Student Loan Repayment Expert at Lending Tree, explained, “There could be situations where potentially because you’re not making your payments, the value of your loan is increasing because it’s collecting interest, so you will owe more money. The credit bureau takes that into account, and maybe your credit score gets dinged a little bit.”
Before the pandemic-induced pause, it was already evident that student loans were causing financial strain for millions of Americans, influencing significant life decisions. Nearly half of student loan borrowers in 2019 postponed homeownership due to their educational debt, according to real estate platform Clever.
Natalia Abrams highlighted the broader impact, stating, “In typical pre-COVID times, when people are paying their student loans, they’re not buying their children’s medication, they’re not able to save for a house or retirement. We know from polling borrowers for so many years that they were using their COVID pandemic money to pay for basic needs, and so the worry is that now they won’t be able to.”
The Biden administration has taken measures to alleviate the burden on borrowers before the repayment restart. This includes forgiving $117 billion in student loans for more than 3.4 million borrowers, primarily stemming from the borrower defense program, which forgives the debt of individuals defrauded by their schools.
President Biden had initially attempted to forgive at least $10,000 in student loans for all 45 million borrowers, but the Supreme Court rejected this plan in June. Nonetheless, the administration introduced a new income-driven repayment (IDR) program known as the Saving on Valuable Education (SAVE) plan, implemented in two phases.
The first phase, set to commence this year, increases the income exemption from 150 percent to 225 percent above the federal poverty guidelines. This means that an individual borrower earning up to $32,800 annually would have monthly payments of $0 on their student loans. A family of four with an income below $67,500 would also have monthly payments of $0.
Another significant change this year is the cessation of interest growth on unpaid balances for borrowers. In the following year, additional changes will be introduced, including halving monthly payments from 10 percent of discretionary income to 5 percent.
Natalia Abrams noted the significance of the SAVE plan for certain borrowers, saying, “The SAVE plan is a lifeline if you’re able to get on a $0 payment, and we have worked with some borrowers, especially older borrowers on Social Security, to get on that plan.” However, she also pointed out that the plan may not be beneficial for those whose income increased during the pandemic, as they could face higher payment requirements if they were previously on a different IDR plan.
As the resumption of student loan payments looms, a divide among politicians and policymakers has taken center stage. With 45 million borrowers, only 28 million are set to restart repayments in October, while others remain in various states of account suspension, including those still in school, in default, or awaiting debt discharge.
Republicans have welcomed the impending repayment restart, contending that delays and Biden administration promises have left borrowers in an unfavorable position. Adam Kissel, a visiting fellow at the Heritage Foundation’s Center for Education Policy, emphasized the need to address the root issue, stating, “This conversation distracts us from the core problem, which is making student loan money too easy, which causes tuition to rise and does not address what’s needed, which is that colleges need tough love to end their addiction to tuition.”
The Republican perspective has long centered on the argument that federal student debt relief is inequitable to those who never attended college or managed to pay off their student loans independently. They have put forward their proposals aimed at increasing transparency in the cost of college education.
“Republicans have brought forth a solution that holds colleges accountable for rising costs and empowers students and families to make the best decisions for their college careers and beyond. But if Congress fails to act, students will continue to drown in debt without a path to success,” emphasized Sen. Bill Cassidy (R-La.), ranking member of the Health, Education, Labor, and Pensions Committee.
The revival of student loan payments also coincides with Congress’s ongoing struggles to keep the government operational. Even before the shutdown debate emerged, it was clear that student loan servicers were grappling with customer service challenges due to insufficient funding, potentially affecting wait times for borrowers seeking assistance.
Picture: ABC
However, according to the White House, a government shutdown, particularly if prolonged, could exacerbate the situation. Karine Jean-Pierre, Biden’s press secretary, noted, “So, you know, if this happens, if Republicans in Congress, you know, go down this road of shutting down the government, we anticipate that key activities at Federal Student Aid will continue for a couple of weeks.” She added that “an extreme Republican shutdown, if this occurs, could be disruptive.”
The resumption of repayments also arrives just a year before the 2024 presidential election, a politically sensitive time to displease student loan advocates. Progressive Democrats are expected to exert more pressure on President Biden to provide greater student debt relief than he has been willing to consider thus far.
Even prior to a Supreme Court ruling, prominent Democrats like Senate Majority Leader Chuck Schumer (N.Y.) and Sen. Elizabeth Warren (Mass.) had been advocating for $50,000 in student loan relief for all borrowers. Warren, in particular, had asserted, “It’s the right number, it’s where a lot of people intersect that we could transform an entire generation.”
In response, the Department of Education is actively pursuing an alternative path to provide some relief. They intend to utilize the negotiated rulemaking process under the Higher Education Act. While the department has unveiled its initial policy considerations for the new plan, these seem to be considerably more targeted than the broad relief previously promised.
The administration aims to offer targeted relief for specific groups of borrowers. However, these considerations are not set in stone, and the first meeting regarding the future proposal is scheduled for October 10th and 11th. Finalizing any plan is expected to extend well into 2024, with potential legal challenges likely to further delay any relief.
The imminent resumption of student loan repayments has reignited political debates, with Republicans emphasizing accountability in higher education costs and Democrats, particularly progressives, pushing for more extensive debt relief. Amidst these political divisions, the Department of Education is exploring alternative avenues for targeted relief, but any significant changes are still on the horizon and subject to potential legal battles.
U.S.-based pharmaceutical company Johnson & Johnson (J&J) has made a significant announcement, declaring that it will not exercise patent rights for Sirturo, its brand name for bedaquiline, in 134 low- and middle-income nations. This decision comes in response to global pressure urging the company to refrain from pursuing additional patents for its groundbreaking tuberculosis drug. Notably, the Indian Patent Office rejected J&J’s application for a secondary patent related to the fumarate salt of bedaquiline.
Bedaquiline represents a groundbreaking development in tuberculosis (TB) treatment, being the first drug for TB to receive global approval in more than four decades. It stands out for its reduced toxicity and enhanced effectiveness compared to conventional TB treatments.
Picture: PREPP
The commitment to not enforcing bedaquiline patents in specific regions is seen as a significant step toward ensuring broader access to affordable generic versions of the drug for individuals in low- and middle-income countries, particularly those suffering from drug-resistant TB. The announcement has been met with praise from the Access Campaign, a part of Médecins Sans Frontières (MSF), an international medical humanitarian organization.
The Access Campaign applauds this development, attributing it to the persistent efforts of TB activists, civil society, and countries prioritizing public health above corporate interests. They also highlight that after the rejection of J&J’s attempt to extend its monopoly in India, national TB treatment programs in Ukraine and Belarus have also requested the company to relinquish its secondary patents within their borders.
Furthermore, the South African Competition Commission’s recent investigation is noted as having exerted considerable pressure on J&J, likely contributing to the company’s decision.
Looking ahead, the Access Campaign now urges Japanese pharmaceutical giant Otsuka to follow suit and publicly commit to not enforcing secondary patents in low- and middle-income countries for another critical TB drug, Delamanid. Notably, Otsuka’s primary patent for Delamanid is set to expire shortly in India and several other nations. Delamanid plays a vital role in combination with bedaquiline, particularly in the treatment of pediatric TB cases.
In response to these developments, at least three Indian pharmaceutical companies, namely Lupin, Natco, and Macleods, have expressed their preparations to introduce generic versions of bedaquiline. This move is expected to further enhance the availability of affordable TB treatment options.
In a quaint neighborhood located in Venice, California, there exists a row of unassuming, similar residences inhabited by ordinary people going about their finite lives, engaging in activities like sharing pizza with friends, celebrating birthdays by blowing out candles on cakes, and indulging in late-night television binges. However, in the midst of this typical scene, halfway down the street, resides Bryan Johnson, a 46-year-old tech entrepreneur of substantial wealth, who has dedicated the past three years to an extraordinary pursuit: the quest for immortality.
Johnson, a centimillionaire, has invested over $4 million in the development of a life-extension system known as Blueprint. This system entails relinquishing all decisions regarding his physical well-being to a team of medical experts who employ data-driven methods to devise a strict health regimen aimed at reducing what Johnson terms his “biological age.” This regimen entails the daily consumption of an astounding 111 pills, the use of a cap emitting red light onto his scalp, the collection of his own stool samples, and the attachment of a miniature jet pack to his penis during sleep to monitor nocturnal erections—a regimen that categorizes any action hastening the aging process, such as enjoying a cookie or sleeping fewer than eight hours, as an “act of violence.”
Bryan Johnson is not alone in his pursuit of defeating the ravages of time among middle-aged, ultra-wealthy individuals. Figures like Jeff Bezos and Peter Thiel have previously invested in Unity Biotechnology, a company dedicated to developing therapeutics targeting age-related diseases. Elite athletes also resort to various therapies to maintain youthful bodies, from hyperbaric chambers to cryotherapy, along with specialized “recovery sleepwear.” However, Johnson’s mission transcends conventional means of preserving health and vitality; it is about surrendering his entire being to an anti-aging algorithm, with the firm belief that death is a choice he refuses to make.
Outsourcing the management of his body, in Johnson’s view, necessitates triumphing over what he terms his “rascal mind”—the part of human nature inclined toward post-dinner ice cream, 1 a.m. amorous encounters, or late-night beer with friends. The ultimate objective is to rejuvenate his 46-year-old organs to mirror the vitality and function of 18-year-old counterparts. Johnson asserts that the data amassed by his medical team suggests that Blueprint has already bestowed upon him the bones of a 30-year-old and the heart of a 37-year-old. This experiment has led him to assert that “a competent system is better at managing me than a human can,” marking a profound breakthrough that, in his perspective, redefines the essence of human existence. His rigorous dietary and exercise regimen, he contends, holds a place in history alongside the Italian Renaissance and the invention of calculus; while Michelangelo had the Sistine Chapel, Johnson extols his special green juice.
However, when I arrived at Johnson’s residence one Monday in August, my intention was not solely to ascertain the effectiveness of his intricate anti-aging strategies. Given my family’s history of cancer and my personal penchant for pepperoni pizza, I harbored doubts about my own prospects for longevity. Instead, I dedicated three days to observing Johnson’s lifestyle, aiming to understand what life governed by an algorithm would entail and whether this “next evolution of being human” would retain any semblance of humanity. If living akin to Johnson promised eternal life—a considerable if!—would such an existence be desirable at all?
Kate Tolo, Johnson’s 27-year-old chief marketing officer and ardent follower, greeted me at the door. Originally from Australia, Tolo had committed to Blueprint just two months prior, becoming the first individual besides Johnson to test its effects on a female body. Tolo is known as “Blueprint XX.”
Picture: Bible.com
Upon entering Johnson’s residence, I was struck by its exquisite simplicity, devoid of clutter, with expansive floor-to-ceiling windows offering vistas of the pool and luxuriant green surroundings—an ambiance reminiscent of an Apple Store set amidst a jungle. Tolo presented me with a small bowl of specially prepared chocolate, meticulously processed to eliminate heavy metals and sourced exclusively from regions with a high polyphenol density. Regrettably, it tasted quite disagreeable. Additionally, she prepared a juice-like concoction containing chlorella powder with spermidine, an amino complex, creatine, collagen peptides, cocoa flavanols, and ceylon cinnamon. Tolo and Johnson affectionately referred to it as the “Green Giant,” yet its appearance leaned more toward obsidian, resembling the residue washed off a duck following an oil spill. She deftly mixed it, avoiding any spillage on her pristine white jumpsuit, and informed me that its transit through the digestive system could vary among individuals. I hesitantly took a sip, finding it akin to Gatorade but gritty.
Johnson entered the room, attired in a green T-shirt and minuscule white shorts. His physique resembled that of an 18-year-old, though his visage bore signs of extensive cosmetic procedures undertaken in pursuit of a perpetually youthful appearance. His complexion radiated a pale, luminescent glow, partly attributed to numerous laser treatments and the absence of body hair. Johnson clarified that the hair on his head was not dyed, but he employed a “gray-hair-reversal concoction” infused with “an herbal extract” to impart a dark brown hue to his hair. Gesturing toward my glass of the Green Giant and then to the nearby bathroom, he inquired if Tolo had issued any warnings. I feigned another sip.
The following day, Johnson meticulously elucidated his morning routine, offering a step-by-step account. Although he had risen at 4:53 a.m., he had deferred most activities until my 7 a.m. arrival to facilitate observation. His bedroom appeared almost austere, devoid of photographs, books, television, or any items one might typically find in a bedroom—no glass of water, phone charger, chair laden with discarded clothing, neglected dry cleaning, towels, mirrors, or any other accoutrements. “I only sleep in here,” he stated. “No work, no reading.” The sole furnishings in the room, aside from his bed, comprised a laser face shield employed for collagen enhancement and wrinkle reduction, and the device attached to his penis during sleep to gauge nocturnal erections. “I experience an average of two hours and 12 minutes of nightly erections of a certain quality,” he disclosed. “To emulate an 18-year-old, it should be three hours and 30 minutes.” Johnson emphasized that nighttime erections serve as a “biological age marker for sexual function” with implications for cardiovascular fitness. The erection monitoring device resembled a petite AirPods case featuring a turquoise strap, resembling a purse for a unique purpose. (It is imperative to clarify that no visual observation of male genitalia occurred during the research for this article.)
When Johnson awakens and detaches the device, he steps onto a scale utilizing “electrical impedance” to gauge his weight, body mass index, hydration level, body fat, and a metric called “pulse wave velocity,” the specifics of which he elucidates but I struggle to fully comprehend. “I’m within the top 1% for ideal muscle fat,” he asserts. Following this, he engages a light-therapy lamp (emulating sunlight) for two to three minutes to reset his circadian rhythm. Monitoring changes in his body, he measures his inner-ear temperature. He initiates his day with two ferritin pills to boost his iron levels, accompanied by vitamin C. Afterward, he proceeds to cleanse his face, apply an anti-wrinkle cream, and dons a laser light mask for five minutes, featuring red and blue lights designed to stimulate collagen production and manage blemishes. By this time, it’s typically around 6 a.m., and Johnson descends to commence his day.
The Blueprint supplement regimen is meticulously laid out on Johnson’s kitchen counter, meticulously organized from left to right. It begins with eye drops intended for pre-cataract care. He then employs a small vibrating device against the side of his nose, purportedly stimulating a nerve that aids in tear production. Johnson prepares his “Green Giant” concoction, a blend he consumes alongside additional pills while sipping a dark-green sludge. “It’s what my body demands,” he remarks. Is there ever a pang of longing for coffee, even a hint? “I adore coffee; it’s such a delight,” he acknowledges. “It’s an addictive escalator for me.”
At this juncture, he embarks on specialized exercises to bolster his grip strength. Subsequently, he proceeds to his home gym, adorned with floor-to-ceiling wallpaper featuring a forest photograph. He partakes in a one-hour routine, even though Johnson is capable of leg-pressing 800 pounds, his daily workout doesn’t differ significantly from that of an exceedingly enthusiastic individual at the gym: a regimen involving weights, planks, and stretches. He adheres to this regimen seven days a week, supplementing it with a high-intensity workout three days a week. On certain occasions during these high-intensity workouts, he wears a plastic mask to gauge his VO2 max, the maximum oxygen consumption rate during physical exertion. Johnson asserts that his VO2 Max places him in the top 1.5% bracket compared to 18-year-olds.
Following his workout, Johnson consumes a meal comprising steamed vegetables and lentils, blended to a consistency resembling that of a sea lion’s skin. He and Tolo eschew conventional meal labels like “breakfast,” “lunch,” or “dinner,” opting instead for “first meal,” “second meal,” and so forth. This is his “first meal.” He extends an offer of “nutty pudding,” a concoction composed of macadamia nut milk, ground macadamia and walnuts, chia seeds, flaxseed, Brazil nuts, sunflower lecithin, Ceylon cinnamon, and pomegranate juice. It possesses the hue of a pencil eraser and offers a somewhat dusty taste, reminiscent of vegan yogurt if you have a palate for it.
Johnson contends that all of these practices are driven by a broader purpose beyond sculpting his physique and preserving a youthful appearance. “Most individuals assume that death is inevitable. We are essentially endeavoring to extend the time available to us before our demise,” he asserts. He further maintains that, until now, there has not been a historical era when Homo sapiens could assert with sincerity that death might not be an unavoidable fate.
However, experts hold a sharply contrasting viewpoint. “Death is not a choice; it is ingrained in our genetic makeup,” asserts Dr. Pinchas Cohen, the dean of the Leonard Davis School of Gerontology at the University of Southern California. Cohen underscores that while extending human life expectancy is conceivable — over the course of the 20th century, life expectancy surged from around 50 to over 80 years — achieving immortality is an implausible aspiration. “There is absolutely no substantiated evidence to support it,” Cohen contends, “and no existing technology even hints at such a possibility.”
Dr. Eric Verdin, CEO of the Buck Institute for Research on Aging, concurs, adding, “If you desire immortality, you should turn to a church.” He expresses skepticism not only about Johnson’s claims regarding attaining immortality but also about his assertions regarding age reversal. “He professes to be transparent in his approach, but as a scientist, it’s exceedingly challenging to comprehend the methods he employs to assess his age,” Verdin comments. He notes that the Buck Institute attempted to collaborate with Johnson on research but received no response. Johnson’s disinclination to engage in collaborative efforts with independent scientists deepened Dr. Verdin’s skepticism. “I believe that if he wishes to convince the scientific community that his methods are credible, he should be open to scrutiny and challenges from fellow researchers,” Verdin insists. (Johnson, on the other hand, claims not to recall ignoring Verdin’s invitation and asserts that he and Verdin have recently exchanged amicable emails.)
Some scientists believe that limited age-reversal is within the realm of possibility. In a provocative and hotly debated endeavor, researchers at Harvard Medical School claim to have rejuvenated older mice and are now in the process of investigating whether the aging process can be reversed in human skin and eye cells. However, their experiments adhere to established scientific protocols. In contrast, Brian Johnson, a visionary entrepreneur, has chosen to be a human guinea pig by embracing a multitude of age-related treatments simultaneously, aiming to discern their effectiveness.
Medical professionals not only question Blueprint’s potential to achieve immortality but also express concerns about the health implications of Johnson’s regimen. Dr. Nir Barzilai, the director of the Institute for Aging Research at the Albert Einstein College of Medicine in New York City, met Johnson at a recent retreat for the Academy for Health & Lifespan Research and was disconcerted by his appearance. Dr. Barzilai noted that Johnson looked unwell, with a pallid complexion and a distinct change in his facial features. He also raised alarms about Johnson’s low body fat, an essential component for bodily functions. Dr. Barzilai emphasized the potential dangers of Johnson’s approach, where numerous supplements and treatments are combined, suggesting that these treatments could interact adversely. He pointed out that conventional medical research typically focuses on the effects of one drug at a time, rather than studying the cumulative effects of over a hundred pills concurrently. Dr. Barzilai firmly stated that Blueprint is not an experiment accepted by the scientific or medical community.
Johnson has not made his personal medical team available for interviews, nor has he provided detailed information about his team. Nevertheless, he intends to share Blueprint with the public. Johnson makes all his biological measurements, ranging from resting heart rate to plaque index to images of his intestines, available online. His YouTube videos detailing his exercise routine and therapeutic experiments have garnered millions of views, and approximately 180,000 people subscribed to his newsletter in the first five months. Blueprint’s inaugural commercial product, a cholesterol-reducing olive oil, is available on his website and features a black box adorned with a red-lit image of Johnson, accompanied by the slogan “Build your autonomous self.” Johnson himself consumes this olive oil, constituting fifteen percent of his daily diet, and it has quickly sold out.
As Johnson, his associate Tolo, and I prepare to enjoy our “first meal” on his expansive rust-colored couch, Johnson directs my attention to a bookshelf filled with biographies of historical figures like Ben Franklin, Harry Truman, Winston Churchill, and Napoleon. He emphasizes his affinity for the 25th century more than the 21st century, asserting that he is more concerned with how future generations will perceive him.
Johnson believes that artificial intelligence (AI) represents the most significant development in the galaxy’s history. He contends that in response to the impending AI revolution, allowing algorithms to manage the human body is the ultimate form of human-AI “alignment.” Johnson argues that as AI optimizes various aspects of human life, from marketing to legal research to retail, it is logical for algorithms to also oversee human physiology. He views this as an evolutionary adaptation to an AI-dominated future.
I inquire about the intangible aspects of human existence, the emotions and experiences that define us beyond mere biological functions. Johnson’s perspective is starkly different. He asserts that everything, from love to sex to attending a baseball game, can be reduced to biochemical states in the body. He believes that humanity is heading into a future where control over these aspects will diminish, leading to a divorce from traditional human customs, including philosophy, ethics, morals, and happiness.
I attempt a different angle, questioning the implications of living forever. I ask Johnson to imagine outliving everyone he knows, including his children and grandchildren. He compares this scenario to the feelings of separation experienced during “senior night” in high school, where individuals bid farewell to friends with the understanding that they may never meet again. Johnson suggests that life is a series of transitions, and each stage prompts the question of whether it’s worth continuing.
Tolo, who has been quietly enjoying her nutty pudding on a separate corner of the couch, has not contemplated this aspect. She expresses hope that as many people as possible can embark on the journey of immortality.
In the pursuit of immortality and a future deeply intertwined with AI, Brian Johnson’s Blueprint experiment challenges conventional wisdom, stirring both fascination and skepticism within the scientific and medical communities. While Johnson’s unorthodox approach raises numerous questions, it undeniably provokes contemplation about the boundaries of human existence and the potential for radical transformations in our understanding of life itself.
Johnson voices his perspective once more, stating, “I think your question reflects Homo sapiens for the 21st century. The underlying assumption is, they have roughly 70 years of life. That’s their starting frame: I’m going to die soon, and I can’t do anything about it. So I’m optimizing in this window of time… If you change the frame, and death is not inevitable, none of the previous practiced thought patterns work.”
My 21st-century Homo sapien mind remained skeptical. Johnson seemed to imply that for humans to thrive in a future harmonized with AI, they might have to relinquish some of their innate humanity. It brought to mind “Tuck Everlasting,” the 1975 children’s book about an immortal family who, due to their inability to age, became disconnected from the world, forever isolated.
After leaving Johnson’s residence, I headed to the DoubleTree hotel in Marina Del Rey. At the front desk, as is customary at DoubleTrees, I was offered a chocolate chip cookie. My impulse was to indulge, but I recognized it as an act that would expedite my inevitable demise. So, I left it on the counter and took my Blueprint-approved dinner—steamed broccoli, cauliflower, and lentils, doused in $75 olive oil but utterly devoid of flavor—up to my room.
Johnson’s path to this perspective was far from straightforward. He grew up in a small Mormon community in Utah, where his grandfather owned a farm with horses. Johnson and his four siblings spent most of their time outdoors, assisting with the harvesting of alfalfa and corn. He served as a Mormon missionary in Ecuador, pursued education at Brigham Young University, and later attended business school at the University of Chicago. He married, became a father of three, and in 2007, he established Braintree, a payment-processing company. Five years later, Braintree acquired Venmo, and in 2013, the merged entity was sold to PayPal for approximately $800 million, leaving Johnson with over $300 million.
Despite his financial success, Johnson describes this period as agonizing. He plunged into a deep depression in 2004, which lasted for a decade. The challenges of building his company while raising three young children overwhelmed him. Neither medication nor therapy provided relief. He found himself 50 pounds overweight and deeply unhappy.
Within a year of selling his company, Johnson divorced and left the Mormon church. In 2014, he invested $100 million in creating the OS Fund, which focuses on companies operating in what he terms the “programmable physical world.” These are companies utilizing AI and machine learning to develop new technologies in therapeutics, diagnostics, and synthetic biology. In 2016, he established Kernel, a neurotechnology company that employs a specially designed helmet to measure brain activity. The company’s objective is to detect cognitive impairment at its earliest stages, with a current focus on identifying biomarkers for psychiatric conditions. It can also serve as a somewhat quirky hobby to measure the age of his own brain.
During my visit, we drive to Kernel’s offices, located approximately 20 minutes from Johnson’s home. Despite his mission to “not die,” he still drives himself around Los Angeles in an electric Audi, albeit at a notably sedate pace. Before pulling out of his driveway, he repeats his pre-driving mantra: “Driving is the most dangerous thing we do.” Johnson is aware that his unwavering commitment to living indefinitely could render an accidental death rather ironic. He muses, “What would be more beautiful irony than me getting hit by a bus and dying?”
In Kernel’s open-plan office, I am ushered into a small room where a technician equips my head with what resembles a ski helmet fitted with numerous circular probes. I am instructed to sit and watch a screensaver-style video featuring soft, crystalline shapes morphing into one another. Later that day, I receive my results via email, revealing that despite being 34 years old, my brain’s age is 30.5.
On the way back home, Johnson repeats his pre-driving mantra as he cautiously navigates the streets of LA at around 16 miles per hour. As he elucidates once more why Blueprint represents “the most significant revolution in the history of Homo sapiens,” a black Chevy truck emerges from a Trader Joe’s parking lot. He swerves to avoid it, scarcely missing a beat before returning to his comparisons with explorers like Magellan and Lewis and Clark. Johnson clarifies, “I’m not a biohacker. I’m not an optimization enthusiast. I’m an explorer, concerned with the future of human existence.”
In the not-so-distant past, even individuals with the most futuristic aspirations were once ordinary humans. Tolo initiated contact with Johnson back in 2016 when she was immersed in the world of fashion in New York City. The dawn of the AI revolution was on the horizon, and she strongly believed that the future of our species necessitated a symbiotic relationship with AI. Her motivation stemmed from encountering a quote by Johnson in a tech newsletter, where he advocated for humans to “merge with AI.” It was at that point she resolved to work alongside him. After years of persistent efforts, an opportunity eventually materialized, leading Tolo to accept a lower job title and reduced pay to become Johnson’s assistant at Kernel. She reminisces about the countless hours spent in his office, engaging in discussions about the trajectory of humanity.
At the outset of her tenure with Johnson, Tolo was your typical twenty-something individual. She enjoyed alcoholic beverages, creamy lattes, fast food, and late-night dancing escapades with her friends. However, earlier this year, she and Johnson began deliberating whether she should embrace Blueprint, an endeavor to understand how this lifestyle would affect a female body. Before fully committing, Tolo requested a 30-day trial period, during which she adhered to a stringent regimen. This included a meticulously structured sleep schedule, Johnson’s precise dietary protocol, the ingestion of over 60 pills daily, and a rigorous exercise routine consisting of 13 minutes of intense activity and 39 minutes of moderate exercise daily. Tolo also closely monitored her ovulation and menstrual cycle.
Reflecting on her trial period, Tolo recalls attending brunches with friends while bringing her Blueprint-compliant food. She experienced a tinge of melancholy as her friends savored delectable dishes while she adhered to her prescribed regimen. Ultimately, she decided to fully commit to Blueprint, convinced that the health benefits outweighed the lifestyle adjustments. Tolo’s friends adapted to her Blueprint lifestyle, and she shifted her social engagements to earlier hours to safeguard her sleep pattern. They grew accustomed to her habit of bringing her own vegetable concoctions to restaurants. This decision was more than just a commitment; it was a definitive choice. Tolo expressed, “It would also be the final decision in a way. It’s like, I’m deciding to no longer decide again.”
As Blueprint XX, Tolo has relinquished numerous aspects of her life that she had come to cherish. She and Johnson view themselves as contemporary versions of Adam and Eve, contemplating even an Adam-and-Eve themed photoshoot to convey the magnitude of the revolution they advocate for the entire human race. Although Tolo is positioned as vital to humanity’s future, she served and plated all the meals during the visit and appeared to handle most of the household chores.
Currently single, Johnson spends the majority of his time with his 18-year-old son, Talmage. While Talmage adheres to the Blueprint diet, rest, and exercise routines, he opts out of the anti-aging therapies. He briefly donated blood plasma to his father as part of an experiment to assess its impact on aging but discontinued after the results proved inconclusive. Talmage, on the verge of embarking on his freshman year of college, shares many of his father’s attitudes towards lifestyle and life extension. He remarks, “The idea of having pizza is more painful than pleasurable for me.”
Johnson acknowledges that his lifestyle makes dating a challenging prospect, citing “10 reasons why [women] will literally hate me.” These reasons include early dinner times, a lack of sunny vacations, a strict bedtime of 8:30 pm, aversion to small talk, solitary sleeping habits, and prioritizing matters above relationships.
Throughout the visit with Johnson, the interviewer contemplated the concept of “the emergent self,” a notion esteemed by Johnson. It is a self guided “more by computational guidance and less by human want.” However, the innate human trait of desire cannot be discounted. The experience of wanting is profoundly human. Observing Johnson’s commitment to his unconventional lifestyle, questions arose: What did he truly want? Did he miss indulging in birthday cake, staying up late dancing, or savoring hot dogs and beer during baseball games? Johnson yearned for eternal life, but what is life without desires?
There existed numerous desires, each potentially leading to life’s eventual end. The desire to meet a friend for cocktails in Santa Monica, to luxuriate in a hotel bed while watching TV, or to engage in late-night text conversations with friends. The longing to FaceTime with a daughter, one who had led to a joyful weight gain during pregnancy due to buttery pasta and cheese pizza indulgence. The craving for eggs and bacon for breakfast. A fundamental realization surfaced: the richness of life is intertwined with desires, and the pursuit of these desires, despite potential consequences, is an inherent aspect of being human. Life is too brief to cease wanting.
The Vatican is set to host a significant ecclesiastical event from October 4th to 29th, bringing together Catholic clergy and laypeople from around the world. This assembly, known as a synod, serves as a platform for discussions on the concept of synodality, with a particular focus on the themes of communion, participation, and mission within the Church.
While some might perceive this event as merely a gathering to discuss gatherings, the term “synodality” has taken on a broader meaning under the leadership of Pope Francis, reflecting his vision for dialogue and decision-making within the Catholic Church.
Addressing concerns about the perceived complexity and insularity of the event, Pope Francis acknowledged, “I am well aware that speaking of a ‘Synod on Synodality’ may seem something abstruse, self-referential, excessively technical, and of little interest to the general public.”
This synod will bring together a diverse group of 464 participants, including Catholic clergy, laypeople, and women, to engage in discussions on pressing issues confronting the Church, ranging from sexual abuse and LGBTQ inclusion to the ordination of women. Pope Francis emphasized the significance of this gathering, stating, “It is something truly important for the church.”
Understanding the Synod on Synodality
The Synod on Synodality is the culmination of a two-year process that commenced in September 2021 when the Vatican released a preparatory document and guidelines for preparing for the synod. Catholic communities worldwide then convened in their parishes to deliberate on the questions posed by the synod. The outcomes of these local conversations were subsequently relayed to their respective bishops’ conferences.
After thorough discussions and debates among bishops, their conclusions were forwarded to the Vatican. In September 2022, a group of approximately 30 experts, theologians, and pastoral workers convened in Frascati, near Rome, to craft a guiding document for the next phase, titled “Enlarge the Space of your Tent.” This document was dispatched to Continental Assemblies, comprising groups of bishops divided by continents. Additionally, Eastern churches and Catholic advocacy groups offered their perspectives on the synodal topics.
The outcomes of these continental discussions were once again communicated to the Vatican. The synod office then produced another document, “Instrumentum Laboris 2,” which will shape the discussions at the forthcoming synod.
Key Dates and Events
The synod’s official activities will commence with a consistory on September 30th, during which 21 new cardinals will be appointed. This will be followed by an ecumenical vigil in St. Peter’s Square. Subsequently, synod participants will embark on a spiritual retreat in the town of Sacrofano, where they will have the opportunity to interact and converse with one another until the eve of the synod on October 3rd.
Picture: Catholic Review
On October 4th, Pope Francis will preside over the inauguration Mass for the synod. In an announcement made in April, the Vatican revealed that the synod will be extended, with participants reconvening for a second session in the fall of 2024.
Throughout the month-long synod, various significant gatherings and events are scheduled, including Masses, pilgrimages, retreats, and a prayer session for migrants and refugees on October 19th. On October 25th, attendees will gather in the Vatican gardens to recite the rosary.
Location of the Synod
In a departure from tradition, the synod will be hosted at the larger Pope Paul VI Hall, which can accommodate over 6,000 individuals. This choice reflects the growing number of participants attending the synod.
Notably, representatives from Eastern churches and high-ranking members of the Roman Curia will also be in attendance. Pope Francis personally selected 120 delegates. To foster a synodal atmosphere and encourage what the “Instrumentum Laboris” describes as “conversations in the spirit,” there will be spiritual assistants, 28 theologians, and 34 facilitators. While the spiritual assistants will participate in the retreat alongside synod attendees, the facilitators and theologians will remain in Rome to prepare for the summit. These theologians and facilitators will be encouraged to document their reflections and observations during the synod proceedings.
Remarkably, two bishops from China will participate, having received approval from Beijing authorities and the Vatican’s endorsement. This marks the second time that Chinese bishops have been permitted to attend a synod, with the first instance occurring during the synod on young people in 2018. It’s worth noting that the Vatican and China lack formal diplomatic relations, although they recently renewed an agreement regarding the appointment of bishops.
Participants in the synod were selected by their respective bishops’ conferences, with guidance from the Vatican, which recommended the inclusion of laypeople and, notably, women. However, it’s important to note that there are participants, such as U.S. Cardinal Raymond Burke, who dissent from the synod itself, with Burke having referred to it as a “Pandora’s box.” Additionally, the synod will host several German attendees who support the Synodal Way, a consultative process involving bishops and lay Catholics in Germany that unfolded between 2019 and 2023 and proposed progressive positions on issues related to sexuality and the inclusion of women.
The upcoming synod, a significant event in the Catholic Church’s calendar, aims to revolutionize the way synodality is put into practice. Traditionally, synods involved lengthy speeches by a panel of speakers, often criticized for their predetermined outcomes. Pope Francis has hinted at this issue in past synods led by his predecessors.
In this unique synod, participants will present their views briefly, followed by a moment of silent reflection and prayer. The event is structured into five modules: Synodality, Communion, Participation, Mission, and a final assembly for voting. Following the general assembly’s public speeches and testimonies, attendees will be divided into language groups such as English, Italian, French, Spanish, and Portuguese.
These working groups, known as “circoli minori,” will delve into the topics in detail, commencing their discussions with a prayer for guidance from the Holy Spirit. Theologians and facilitators will only participate in plenary sessions, not within the working groups. Summaries of the discussions generated by the smaller groups will be forwarded to the Secretariat of the Synod office, led by Cardinal Mario Grech. This office will compile all the information and provide a digital copy to the theologians who attended the synod. These theologians will be responsible for crafting a final synthesis, which will be submitted for a vote during the plenary assembly.
Rev. Orm Rush, a professor at Australian Catholic University and a member of the theological commission on the synod, likened the process to the unfolding of a mystery novel. Interestingly, the Vatican has opted to keep the conversations at the synod confidential. While the opening session will be livestreamed to the public, the subsequent plenary sessions and discussions within the circoli minori will be conducted behind closed doors. Journalists covering the synod will rely on occasional briefings from the Vatican’s communication department.
This decision, according to Rush, is not intended to exclude journalists but rather to create an environment where participants can engage without the distractions of external influences and animosity. The aim is to foster a spirit of constructive dialogue.
The Significance of the Synod
The organizers of the synod acknowledge that predicting the outcomes of the discussions is impossible, as they assert that the process will be guided by the Holy Spirit. However, the path leading to the event offers insights into the expectations of participants and observers.
At the parish level, synodal discussions highlighted the need for reflection on the role of women in the church, the inclusion of gay and lesbian Catholics, and the possibility of a married priesthood. These concerns resonate not only in Western churches but also among faithful in parishes worldwide, who grapple with aligning these issues with their beliefs.
Synod organizers have affirmed that these concerns will be central to the discussions, with the “Instrumentum Laboris” containing questions addressing them. The synod also provides an opportunity to reconsider decision-making processes within the church’s hierarchy, emphasizing the importance of bishops collaborating with parish councils, assuming responsibility for their dioceses, and ensuring accountability in cases of sexual abuse.
Although the Vatican has yet to confirm the production of an official synod document, it is likely that participants will vote on such a document emerging from their conversations. This document will probably be sent back to the local church level for further discussion and potential amendments before the 2024 summit.
It’s important to note that changes in doctrine and morality are not on the table, according to Vatican officials. However, reshaping decision-making processes and power structures within the historically hierarchical institution could pave the way for future changes in these areas.
The Times Higher Education (THE) has unveiled its 20th edition of the World’s Best Universities rankings. Notably, the prestigious University of Oxford from the United Kingdom has secured the top spot for an astonishing eighth consecutive year. Stanford University, representing the United States, has clinched the second position, asserting itself as the highest-ranked American institution. Meanwhile, the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT) proudly occupies the third place.
In this extensive 2024 edition of the World University Rankings, a staggering 1,904 universities hailing from 108 different countries and regions have been meticulously evaluated. The assessment takes into account a comprehensive array of 18 performance indicators that scrutinize research-intensive universities, assessing their prowess across crucial domains such as teaching, research, knowledge transfer, and internationalization.
The top 10 positions in this list continue to be heavily dominated by American institutions. The rankings in order are as follows: University of Oxford, Stanford University, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Harvard University, University of Cambridge (UK), Princeton University, California Institute of Technology, Imperial College London, University of California, Berkeley, and Yale University.
The United States stands prominently in the top 20, boasting 13 institutions, and in the top 200, where a staggering 56 American universities have secured their places. In fact, the U.S. remarkably claims the highest representation with a total of 169 universities featured in the rankings, surpassing all other nations. In a noteworthy shift, Asia has emerged as the most prominently represented continent, overtaking Europe since the 2021 rankings. Notably, Africa and South America have also shown significant presence, with each region contributing more than 100 universities to the rankings.
Picture: NDTV
The United Kingdom has demonstrated its academic prowess as well, with three universities securing positions in the top 10. In addition to Oxford’s top-ranking position, the University of Cambridge stands at fifth place, while Imperial College London claims the eighth spot. As a collective, the UK is home to a total of 104 ranked universities, making it the third-highest represented country. Impressively, 11 British universities find their place within the top 100, and 25 are listed in the top 200.
However, while the United States and the United Kingdom continue to lead the pack in the global rankings, THE reports that their positions are facing challenges, with diminishing numbers of universities in the top 200. Since 2021, both countries have seen a decline of four and three institutions, respectively, in this segment.
In Europe, Switzerland’s ETH Zurich emerges as the highest-ranked institution outside the UK, securing the 11th position. Germany also makes a strong showing with 49 ranked universities, and the Technical University of Munich shares the 30th position. Germany boasts eight universities within the top 100 and an impressive 21 in the top 200. Spain’s top-ranking institution is the University of Barcelona, which has made significant progress by moving up 30 places to secure a joint 152nd position.
This year, the rankings welcome four new European entrants: Kosovo, Bosnia and Herzegovina, North Macedonia, and Armenia. Turkey’s highest-ranked universities include Koç University, Middle East Technical University, and Sabancı University, all falling within the band ranging from 351 to 400. Europe, as a whole, is the second-most represented continent, following Asia, with a total of 664 ranked universities.
China’s ascent in global academia is unmistakable. The country has two universities positioned in the top 20, seven in the top 100, and an impressive 13 in the top 200. This stands in stark contrast to the 2018 edition of the rankings, where China only had two universities in the top 100. The number of Chinese institutions securing positions in the top 400 has doubled since 2021, rising from 15 to 30. Tsinghua University is the standout performer among Chinese institutions, securing the 12th position. China’s overall representation includes 86 ranked universities, positioning it as the fifth-highest represented country globally.
Asia reigns supreme as the most represented continent, boasting an impressive total of 737 universities featured in the rankings. Singapore’s National University secures the 19th position, while Nanyang Technological University (NTU) follows closely at 32nd place. Japan takes second place in terms of the number of ranked universities, with a total of 119. The University of Tokyo remains Japan’s highest-ranked institution, holding the 29th position.
India has achieved a significant milestone, with a record-breaking 91 universities featured in the rankings. The Indian Institute of Science represents the country’s highest-ranking institution, positioned in the 201–250 band. Neighboring Pakistan also enjoys a notable presence with 39 ranked universities, with Quaid-i-Azam University leading the way in the 401–500 band.
In the Middle East and North Africa, Saudi Arabia, the United Arab Emirates, and Israel have made their mark with universities securing positions within the top 250. Egypt’s Egypt-Japan University of Science and Technology (E-JUST) has significantly improved its ranking, moving up 30 places from 182 to the joint 152nd position.
The African continent has witnessed remarkable growth, with a 16% year-on-year increase in participation. The rankings now feature 113 institutions from Africa, marking the largest increase among all continents. The University of Cape Town stands tall as the highest-ranking African university, securing the 167th position.
The Latin America and Caribbean region have witnessed a record-breaking presence, with 144 universities from 12 countries securing positions in the rankings. Brazil’s University of São Paulo continues to lead the region, falling within the 201–250 band. The top three in the region is completed by Brazil’s University of Campinas (351–400) and Chile’s Pontificia Universidad Católica de Chile (401–500). Both Colombia and Chile have seen a substantial number of new entrants, with six newly-ranked universities in Colombia, five in Chile, and two in Brazil. Among the new entrants, Colombia’s University of la Costa stands out, securing a position in the 801–1,000 band.
Mexico’s two highest-ranked universities, Monterrey Institute of Technology and National Autonomous University of Mexico, have both moved up a band, securing positions in the 601–800 and 801–1,000 bands, respectively.
In a noteworthy development, this year’s rankings introduce 165 universities that are ranked for the first time. Of these, 89 hail from Asia, 38 from Europe, 19 from Africa, 14 from South America, and five from North America. At the country level, India leads with 20 newly-ranked universities, followed by Turkey with 14, Pakistan with 11, and Algeria and Iran with nine each. Among these newly-ranked institutions, Daegu Gyeongbuk Institute of Science and Technology (DGIST) in South Korea emerges as the top performer, securing a position in the 351–400 band.
THE’s World University Rankings have evolved significantly over time, starting with 200 universities and now encompassing an impressive 2,000 institutions. This extensive coverage makes it the most comprehensive and globally inclusive ranking system.
For those interested in the updated methodology for the 20th edition of the World University Rankings, the details are available for review.
Indian students have once again set a record by obtaining over 90,000 US student visas during the summer months of June, July, and August, marking the third consecutive year of record-breaking numbers. The US Embassy in India revealed that nearly one in four student visas issued globally this summer was granted to Indian students. These figures underscore India’s position as the second-largest source of international students for the United States, following China. The strained relations between India and Canada are expected to further boost the influx of Indian students to countries like the US, UK, and Australia
Picture: US Embassy
Indians Account for Over 10% of Global Visa Applicants
Indians have emerged as a dominant force in the realm of US visa applications, constituting more than 10% of all visa applicants worldwide. This surge in interest reflects the enduring allure of the United States for Indian travelers.
20% of All Student Visa Applicants
Notably, Indian students have displayed a remarkable affinity for American education, with 20% of all student visa applicants hailing from India. This statistic underscores the reputation of US universities as a preferred destination for higher education among Indian scholars.
65% of H&L-Category (Employment) Visa Applicants
In the professional arena, Indians are making a significant mark, constituting a whopping 65% of all H&L-category (employment) visa applicants. This reflects the strong economic ties and opportunities that the United States offers to Indian professionals.
Surpassing Pre-Covid Levels
The US Mission in India has not only met but exceeded its pre-pandemic benchmarks, with visa application numbers soaring by 20% compared to 2019. This resurgence in interest signifies the gradual return of normalcy in international travel post-Covid.
Personal Touch from US Ambassador
US Ambassador to India, Eric Garcetti, personally presented the one millionth visa to a delighted couple. Their journey to the United States to attend their son’s graduation at MIT symbolizes the dreams and aspirations that many Indian families have of American education and opportunities.
Looking Ahead to 2024
As the year progresses, the mission continues to process visa applications at an accelerated rate, indicating sustained enthusiasm among Indians for visiting the United States. This bodes well for fostering cultural exchange, educational pursuits, and economic partnerships between the two nations.
A Lasting Impression
Ambassador Garcetti, affectionately referring to the couple as “Mr. and Mrs. One Million,” engaged with them, sharing insights and recommendations for their upcoming trip. This personal touch exemplifies the warmth and hospitality extended by the US Embassy to Indian visa applicants.
Previous Year’s Success
Last year, over 1.2 million Indians visited the United States, reaffirming the enduring bond between the two nations and the ever-growing interest of Indians in exploring the vast opportunities that the United States has to offer.
A substantial portion of the global population is aging, and India is no exception to this trend. According to the India Ageing Report 2023 by the United Nations Population Fund, there is a stark reality on the horizon. The population aged 60 and above is projected to double from 10.5% or 14.9 crore individuals (as of July 1, 2022) to 20.8% or 34.7 crore by the year 2050. This means that one in every five people will be a senior citizen, with far-reaching implications for healthcare, the economy, and society as a whole.
In regions like Kerala and West Bengal, a growing elderly population is experiencing solitude as their children migrate in search of better opportunities. While advancements in healthcare have contributed to increased life expectancy, and declining fertility rates are observed in various countries, including India, there are formidable challenges in providing for a burgeoning elderly population. Within this overarching demographic shift, there are numerous other noteworthy statistics. Notably, elderly women outnumber their male counterparts. A 60-year-old person in India can anticipate living another 18.3 years, with women having a slightly longer life expectancy of 19 years compared to men at 17.5 years. In India, where female labor force participation stands at a meager 24%, it is imperative to ensure economic and social security for women to prevent their increased vulnerability in old age.
Furthermore, there are substantial variations between states. In 2021, most southern states reported a higher proportion of elderly citizens compared to the national average, and this gap is expected to widen by 2036. In contrast, states with higher fertility rates, such as Bihar and Uttar Pradesh, are also projected to witness an increase in the elderly population’s share by 2036, but it will remain below the national average. Overall, more than two-fifths of the elderly population belong to the poorest wealth quintile, ranging from 5% in Punjab to a staggering 47% in Chhattisgarh. Additionally, 18.7% of the elderly have no source of income, which exacerbates their economic vulnerability. A significant portion of the elderly population resides in rural areas and often faces economic hardships. Addressing these challenges necessitates a comprehensive societal approach that encompasses physical and mental health, basic necessities like food and shelter, income security, and social care. Geriatric care should be tailored to their distinct healthcare requirements.
While there are several government schemes aimed at assisting the elderly, many remain unaware of them or find the application process overly complex. The National Policy on Older Persons from 1999 and the Maintenance and Welfare of Parents and Senior Citizens Act of 2007 establish guidelines for the care of the elderly. However, to ensure that senior citizens can lead dignified lives, both public and private policies must create a more supportive environment.
India is witnessing a significant demographic shift with a rapidly aging population. This transformation has profound implications for various aspects of society, including healthcare, the economy, and social well-being. To address the challenges posed by this demographic transition, it is imperative to implement a holistic approach that encompasses healthcare, economic security, and social support. Furthermore, raising awareness about existing government schemes and simplifying access to them is essential to ensure that the elderly receive the assistance and care they deserve in their later years.
Hyundai and Kia are initiating a recall of over 3 million vehicles and advising owners to park them outside due to the risk of engine compartment fires. The companies are urging drivers to keep their vehicles away from homes and structures until they can take them to a dealership for a free repair.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) issued a warning, stating that fires can occur both when the vehicle is parked and turned off or while it’s in motion. The NHTSA identified specific issues in certain Hyundai and Kia models that could lead to these fires.
For Hyundai, the concern is centered around the anti-lock brake system in 13 different models, which may leak fluid and trigger an electrical short circuit that could result in a fire. In the case of Kia, the fire risk is linked to the hydraulic electronic control unit in 10 separate models.
The Hyundai recall includes approximately 1.6 million vehicles, including the following models:
– 2012-2015 Accent
– 2012-2015 Azera
– 2011-2015 Elantra
– 2013-2015 Elantra Coupe
– 2014-2015 Equus
– 2011-2015 Genesis Coupe
– 2013-2015 Santa Fe
– 2013 Santa Fe Sport
– 2011-2015 Sonata HEV
– 2010-2013 Tucson
– 2015 Tucson Fuel Cell
– 2012-2015 Veloster
– 2010-2012 Veracruz
Additionally, Kia is recalling approximately 1.7 million vehicles, including the following models:
– 2014-2016 Cadenza
– 2011-2013 Forte/Forte Koup
– 2015-2017 K900
– 2010-2015 Optima
– 2011-2013 Optima Hybrid
– 2011-2017 Rio
– 2010 Rondo
– 2011-2014 Sorento
– 2011-2013 Soul
– 2010-2013 Sportage
To check if your vehicle is affected, you can visit NHTSA.gov/recalls and enter your 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN).
As of now, there have been 21 fires associated with the Hyundai recall and 22 “thermal incidents,” including visible smoke, burning, and melting. In the case of Kia, there have been four fires and six thermal incidents. Fortunately, there have been no reported crashes, injuries, or fatalities linked to these recalls, according to the NHTSA.
In the period from 2010 to December 2022, both Kia and Hyundai issued recalls for more than 7 million vehicles, with over 3,100 Kias and Hyundais catching fire. This resulted in 103 injuries and one death, according to the nonprofit Consumer Reports.
It’s worth noting that while Hyundai and Kia are distinct brands, Hyundai Motor Company holds a 33.88% majority stake in Kia Motors, and they often share parts from the same suppliers. Consumer Reports suggests that a shared four-cylinder engine could be a possible culprit behind these recalls and fire incidents.
The current crisis between India and Canada has brought to light a significant divergence in their perspectives on Sikh separatism. This divide was laid bare when Canadian Prime Minister Justin Trudeau suggested that India might have had a hand in the assassination of Hardeep Singh Nijjar, a Sikh separatist leader in British Columbia, back in June. New Delhi responded by emphasizing a long-standing grievance: that Canada harbors dangerous anti-India extremists whom Ottawa refuses to rein in. This is a contentious claim, and Ottawa has never officially endorsed it.
In India’s view, individuals like Nijjar epitomize these anti-India elements. Nijjar is known for his support of the Khalistan movement, which seeks to establish a separate Sikh homeland in India’s Punjab state. Indian officials accuse him of leading the Khalistan Tiger Force (KTF), a banned violent group, and formally designated him as a terrorist in 2020. Recent leaked Indian intelligence reports have alleged that Nijjar financed terrorism in India and organized arms training camps in Canada.
India’s response to this situation included issuing a new travel advisory cautioning Indians to “exercise utmost caution” in Canada and suspending visa services for Canadians. The intention behind this move is to convey that with anti-India elements allegedly operating freely in Canada, Indians are at risk. In response, Canada issued its own travel advisory advising Canadian citizens in India to “stay vigilant and exercise caution.” Additionally, Indian External Affairs Ministry spokesman Arindam Bagchi referred to Canada as a “growing reputation as a safe haven for terrorists, for extremists, and for organized crime.”
When it comes to counterterrorism, India typically aligns its positions, especially on Islamist militancy, with those of Washington and other Western capitals. However, Sikh extremism presents a different story.
Mourners carry the casket of Sikh community leader and temple president Hardeep Singh Nijjar during Antim Darshan, the first part of a day-long funeral service for him, in Surrey, British Columbia, Sunday, June 25, 2023. Canada expelled a top Indian diplomat Monday, Sept. 18, as it investigates what Prime Minister Justin Trudeau called credible allegations that India’s government may have had links to the Sikh activist’s assassination. (Darryl Dyck/The Canadian Press via AP)
In the aftermath of 9/11, counterterrorism was a central focus of U.S.-India cooperation, especially following the 2008 Mumbai attacks attributed to Lashkar-e-Taiba (LeT), a Pakistan-sponsored terrorist group. These attacks resulted in the deaths of 166 people, including six Americans. Both U.S. and Indian officials identified LeT as the perpetrator and, subsequently, Washington increased its covert presence in Pakistan to gather intelligence on LeT.
While the U.S. and India generally see eye to eye on the threats posed by groups like LeT, al-Qaida, Jaish-e-Mohammad, and the Islamic State, Western officials have not explicitly condemned violent Sikh separatism. U.S. officials and lawmakers did denounce two incidents involving pro-Khalistan protesters at the Indian Consulate in San Francisco this year. However, Washington hasn’t officially designated any violent Khalistan groups as terrorist organizations, although it did designate the Baluchistan Liberation Army in Pakistan as such in 2019.
Several factors may explain why India’s warnings about Sikh separatism haven’t garnered stronger support from Western governments. Firstly, unlike Islamist terrorism, the Khalistan movement rarely poses a direct threat to the West. Its violence primarily targets India, though there have been instances of threats against Indian diplomats in the West, and in 1985, Sikh terrorists bombed an Air India jet departing from Montreal, killing all on board, most of whom were Canadians.
Moreover, Sikh separatist violence has diminished in recent years, reducing its visibility in Western headlines. Many in the West, especially outside Canada, may be unaware of the seriousness of this threat in the past. During the 1980s and 1990s, a Khalistan insurgency raged in India, and U.S. officials expressed significant concern at the time. A declassified CIA memo from 1987 referred to Sikh extremism as a “long-term terrorism threat.” In 1984, radical Khalistan supporters seized a Sikh temple in Amritsar, India, leading to a violent government crackdown and the assassination of Prime Minister Indira Gandhi by two of her Sikh bodyguards. This triggered reprisal attacks on Sikhs, resulting in significant religious violence, one of the worst since the 1947 Partition of British-ruled India.
However, these historical events are not as well-remembered in the West, contributing to reduced threat perceptions. Democracy also plays a role in Western restraint. While India believes that many dangerous Sikh separatists are based in Western countries such as Canada, Great Britain, Australia, and the U.S., these nations uphold democratic principles that allow nonviolent Sikh activists to gather and demonstrate. They are cautious about implementing policies that might conflate a small number of violent Sikh separatists with a larger community of nonviolent Sikh individuals, some of whom advocate peacefully for a separate Sikh state.
In the coming days, India is likely to press Washington on the growing Khalistan threat originating from Western soil and the need for the U.S. and its Five Eyes allies to take more decisive action against it. This will be a sensitive discussion, not only due to New Delhi’s perception of Western inaction but also due to growing concerns among Sikhs in the U.S., intensified by FBI warnings, about potential threats to their safety. Furthermore, historical grievances come into play. Some prominent Indians, including Indira Gandhi and former senior intelligence officer B. Raman, have alleged that the U.S. covertly supported Sikh separatists in the 1970s and 1980s when Washington was allied with Islamabad, a likely sponsor of the Khalistan movement. While there is no concrete evidence to support this claim, it underscores the lingering mistrust in U.S.-India relations, despite their deepening partnership, particularly in the context of countering Chinese power. The differing U.S. and Indian positions on Khalistan today serve as a reminder that historical baggage can persist even in otherwise strong relationships.
As New York City approaches a gradual recovery from the economic setbacks caused by the pandemic, Manhattan, the city’s financial hub, has reached a sobering milestone. It now boasts the most substantial income inequality of any large county in the United States.
In a city already renowned for its stark contrasts between opulent living and severe poverty, this widening income gap is particularly striking. According to 2022 census data, recently released this month and analyzed by demographic data firm Social Explorer, the top 20 percent of Manhattan residents had an average household income of $545,549. This is over 53 times the average income of the bottom 20 percent, who earned an average of $10,259.
Andrew Beveridge, President of Social Explorer, commented on this staggering inequality, noting, “It’s amazingly unequal.” He likened it to disparities seen in many developing countries. This income gap is the widest in the United States since 2006, when such data was first reported. Notably, the Bronx and Brooklyn also rank among the top 10 counties in the nation concerning income inequality.
This latest data reinforces the uneven nature of New York City’s recovery from the pandemic. While wages have risen across the city, the benefits have primarily accrued to the affluent. Jobs have returned, but many of these are low-paying positions. While unemployment has decreased, it remains significantly higher among Black and Hispanic residents. This dichotomy underscores a growing divide: the city is rebounding, but many of its residents are not.
James Parrott, Director of Economic and Fiscal Policy at the Center for New York City Affairs at the New School, stated, “We’re still much worse off than we were in 2019.”
The Department of Housing and Urban Development reports that nearly 20 percent of public housing residents in New York City earn less than $10,000.
Middle-income New Yorkers are also feeling the pinch. Roger Gunning, a 50-year-old sanitation worker and resident of public housing in the South Bronx, shared his struggles, saying, “I make $22 an hour, and I still can’t survive on my own in New York.” He noted that some of his co-workers are forced to live in temporary shelters.
Dr. Parrott explained that middle-income New Yorkers have been hit hard by stagnant wage growth in service jobs and the slow recovery of key industries, particularly retail, which experienced a more severe contraction in New York compared to most other parts of the country.
When adjusting for inflation, the median household income in New York City dropped to less than $75,000 between 2019 and 2022, marking nearly a 7 percent decrease. This decline is four times the national rate and represents the most significant income drop among major U.S. cities. For comparison, San Antonio experienced just over a 5 percent drop, with median household income falling below $59,000. Phoenix, on the other hand, saw a significant improvement with an almost 8 percent increase in median household income, reaching nearly $76,000.
Chino Zeno, a 21-year-old construction worker earning $23 per hour installing solar panels, expressed his frustration with the impact of inflation on his finances. To cover rising costs of food and gas and help with expenses at his family’s apartment in East New York, Brooklyn, he also works as a freelance photographer. Despite a recent pay increase, which followed his transition from a part-time warehouse job earning $16 per hour in 2021, he still finds it necessary to hold down a second job.
Zeno summed up the challenge many New Yorkers face, stating, “One hundred is the new $20 bill. It’s hard for people right now.”
The already affluent have benefited the most from rising wages, according to labor data analyzed by the Center for New York City Affairs. Low-paid workers, like restaurant servers and child care professionals, who made an average of $40,000 last year, saw their salary increase by just $186 every year from 2019 to 2022, when adjusted for inflation. But highly paid earners, who made an average of $217,000 in fields like technology and finance, received an average pay bump of $5,100 in each of those years, or 27 times more, in extra income, than low-wage earners.
Picture: NYT
A recent analysis of labor data by the Center for New York City Affairs reveals a stark contrast in wage growth between the already well-off and low-paid workers. While highly paid earners in fields such as technology and finance, who averaged $217,000 annually, enjoyed an average pay increase of $5,100 each year from 2019 to 2022, their low-wage counterparts, including restaurant servers and child care professionals with an average income of $40,000, saw a meager salary rise of just $186 annually when adjusted for inflation.
The city has made significant strides. In August, the labor force participation rate was at a record high, and the unemployment rate was 5.3 percent, down from a pandemic peak of over 21 percent in May 2020. But New York has yet to fully recoup the jobs lost since the pandemic, while much of the nation already has, in part because the virus struck the city sooner and businesses, including those tied to hospitality and tourism, remained closed longer, Dr. Parrott said. Other popular entry-level jobs like couriers and home health aides have seen their wages lose ground to inflation.
Despite notable progress in New York City, including a record-high labor force participation rate and a decreased unemployment rate of 5.3 percent in August, down from its pandemic peak of over 21 percent in May 2020, the city has not completely recovered the jobs lost during the pandemic. This lag in recovery is attributed in part to the city being hit by the virus earlier than other areas and the extended closures of businesses tied to the hospitality and tourism sectors. Additionally, wages for popular entry-level jobs like couriers and home health aides have failed to keep pace with inflation.
Charles Lutvak, a spokesman for the mayor’s office, credited the job growth to initiatives like the expansion of youth employment and apprenticeship programs. “But we have more work to do, and we won’t stop until every New Yorker has access to a quality, family-sustaining job,” he said in a statement.
Charles Lutvak, spokesperson for the mayor’s office, attributed the city’s job growth to various initiatives, including the expansion of youth employment and apprenticeship programs. He emphasized their commitment to continue working toward ensuring that all New Yorkers have access to quality, family-sustaining employment opportunities.
Wage growth has been stunted for many New Yorkers in part because the minimum wage, set at $15 an hour, has not increased since 2019, Dr. Parrott said. Among the 10 largest American cities, five have raised their minimum pay in that period by an average of 25 percent, and four of them have higher minimum wages than New York City.
Wage growth in New York City has been hampered, in part, by the stagnant minimum wage, which has remained at $15 per hour since 2019, according to Dr. Parrott. In contrast, five of the ten largest American cities have increased their minimum wages by an average of 25 percent during the same period, with four of them now surpassing New York City’s minimum wage.
Many labor groups are pushing for a $21-an-hour minimum wage, which itself could fall short of the cost of living, because the city does not scale pay to inflation, said Gregory Morris, the chief executive of the New York City Employment and Training Coalition, an association of work force development groups. Next year, New York State will raise the minimum to $16 an hour in the greater New York City area and $15 statewide. In 2027, the minimum wage will be pegged to inflation.
Several labor organizations are advocating for a $21-per-hour minimum wage, although this amount may still not adequately cover the cost of living, as the city does not adjust wages for inflation, according to Gregory Morris, CEO of the New York City Employment and Training Coalition, a consortium of workforce development organizations. In the upcoming year, New York State plans to increase the minimum wage to $16 per hour in the greater New York City area and $15 statewide, with provisions to peg it to inflation in 2027.
“This is a working people’s city, as the mayor points out, but I think the question now is, which working people?” Morris asked.
Gregory Morris posed a crucial question, noting that New York City has long been characterized as a city of working people. However, he raised concerns about which segments of the working population are truly benefitting from the city’s economic growth.
For Khadijah Bethea, 42, a single mother raising three children on the Lower East Side of Manhattan, finding work is not the problem. It’s the hours.
Khadijah Bethea, a 42-year-old single mother raising three children in Manhattan’s Lower East Side, doesn’t struggle to find work; rather, her challenge lies in the demanding hours associated with her employment.
After losing her job as a security guard at a bank in 2020, she started working as a server for catering events around the city — up to 70 hours a week, seven days a week.
Following her job loss as a bank security guard in 2020, Khadijah Bethea transitioned to working as a server at various catering events across the city. Her new role required her to put in long hours, often up to 70 hours per week, working every day.
At over $25 an hour, the jobs were worthwhile, but all-consuming, she said. “I caught a bad anxiety attack one day. You worry about not spending enough time with your children, so I said, ‘I need to find something else to do.’”
While the pay for her server role exceeded $25 per hour, Khadijah found the job to be all-consuming and stressful. She experienced a severe anxiety attack, leading her to reflect on the importance of spending time with her children and prompting her to seek alternative employment.
Ms. Bethea enrolled earlier this year in a 14-week career training program run by Henry Street Settlement and Stacks + Joules, two nonprofit organizations. The free program helps lower-income job seekers find work in heating and ventilation system management for large buildings.
Earlier this year, Khadijah Bethea enrolled in a 14-week career training program offered by two nonprofit organizations, Henry Street Settlement and Stacks + Joules. This program, which is free of charge, assists individuals with lower incomes in securing employment related to heating and ventilation system management for large buildings.
She graduated in May and is now enrolled in another training program that pays $20 an hour — less than she made waiting tables — but has the opportunity for career growth and the possibility of working remotely some days. For now, she still works about four catering gigs a week.
Khadijah successfully completed the program in May and has since joined another training program that offers a wage of $20 per hour. Although this is less than what she earned as a server, the position presents opportunities for career advancement and the potential to work remotely on certain days. Currently, she continues to work approximately four catering jobs each week.
A significant dilemma for job seekers is that taking the time to learn new skills can be costly, especially in an expensive city like New York, said Anisee Alves-Willis, a program director for YouthBuild, a six-month employment program through St. Nicks Alliance, a nonprofit community services group.
One significant challenge faced by job seekers is the expense associated with acquiring new skills, particularly in a costly city like New York. Anisee Alves-Willis, a program director for YouthBuild, a six-month employment program offered by the nonprofit community services group St. Nicks Alliance, highlighted this dilemma.
The time commitment is a luxury many low- and middle-income workers can’t afford, even when stipends are included.
Even when stipends are provided, the time commitment required for skill development can be a luxury that many low- and middle-income workers cannot afford.
Angelita Mendez, 35, a beautician who moved to Washington Heights in Manhattan from the Dominican Republic in 2021, began taking free English lessons last year with a nonprofit service provider.
Angelita Mendez, a 35-year-old beautician who relocated from the Dominican Republic to Washington Heights in Manhattan in 2021, initiated free English lessons with a nonprofit service provider in the previous year.
She only made it about halfway through the course before bills started to pile up — the $1,600 a month rent she splits with her mother, the $1,100 a month she pays to lease a booth in a salon and the rising cost of groceries for her two children. She makes about $600 a week, or around $31,000 a year.
Angelita Mendez was unable to complete the English course as financial pressures began mounting. She shares a monthly rent of $1,600 with her mother, incurs a monthly expense of $1,100 for leasing a booth in a salon, and faces increasing grocery costs for her two children. Her weekly income amounts to roughly $600, equivalent to an annual income of around $31,000.
“I don’t have the time to do it, honestly,” she said in Spanish, but hopes to one day return to the class, become proficient in English and use her skills to study cosmetology.
Expressing her circumstances in Spanish, Angelita Mendez revealed that she currently lacks the time to continue her English lessons. Nevertheless, she aspires to return to the course at some point, attain proficiency in English, and leverage her language skills to pursue studies in cosmetology.
Where would her newfound skills take her?
Probably New Jersey, she said — where it’s cheaper.
Angelita Mendez anticipates that her newly acquired skills could lead her to opportunities in New Jersey, where the cost of living is more affordable.
The analysis of labor data in New York City reveals significant disparities in wage growth, with higher-income earners experiencing substantial pay increases while low-wage workers struggle to keep up with inflation. Although the city has made progress in terms of employment rates, the recovery of lost jobs from the pandemic remains a challenge, particularly for certain industries. Calls for a higher minimum wage and concerns about the affordability of skill development programs highlight the difficulties faced by many low- and middle-income workers in the city. Despite these challenges, individuals like Khadijah Bethea and Angelita Mendez are taking steps to improve their career prospects and financial stability, emphasizing the importance of accessible training programs and affordable living conditions in the city.
The Indian government’s Minority Commission has called upon a Christian organization to provide a comprehensive report regarding the violence against Christians, following the group’s appeal for Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s involvement five months ago.
On September 21, during a meeting in New Delhi, the National Commission for Minorities requested the United Christian Forum (UCF), an ecumenical entity, to submit this report within one month. Commission chairman, Sardar Iqbal Singh Lalpura, conveyed that they intend to conduct their own examination based on the UCF’s report and will subsequently present a comprehensive report to Prime Minister Modi. Christian leader A. C. Michael, who led the delegation, confirmed this development.
The UCF initiated this request for Prime Minister Modi’s intervention to address the escalating violence against Christians following Modi’s visit to the Sacred Heart Cathedral in New Delhi on Easter Sunday, April 9.
The UCF, responsible for documenting incidents of violence against Christians in India, asserts that attacks have surged, particularly after 11 of India’s 28 states introduced extensive anti-conversion laws. Most of these states are governed by Modi’s pro-Hindu Bharatiya Janata Party (BJP). According to Michael, these anti-conversion laws contradict the essence of Article 25, which guarantees religious freedom for Indians. He added that these laws are often misused by fringe pro-Hindu groups to target Christians.
The forum contends that governmental indifference contributes to the rise in anti-Christian violence. They reported 525 incidents of violence across 23 Indian states up until August this year, compared to 505 incidents for the entire previous year.
The delegation included John Dayal, the spokesperson of the All India Catholic Union, as well as UCF executive members Tehmina Arora and Siju Thomas.
Picture: UCAN
Michael remarked positively on the meeting with Lalpura, expressing encouragement. Lalpura assured the Christian leaders that the commission would address the growing persecution of Christians and urged them to dispatch fact-finding teams to areas affected by violence.
Uttar Pradesh, India’s most populous state, ranks highest in incidents of violence against Christians, followed by Chhattisgarh and Jharkhand in central India. Uttar Pradesh is governed by the BJP, which also wields significant influence in the two central Indian states.
In Uttar Pradesh, Christians constitute a mere 0.18 percent of the state’s 200 million population, with the majority being Hindus. Generally, Christian presence is less than one percent in central and northern Indian states.
Christians in Chhattisgarh and Jharkhand primarily belong to tribal communities, and Hindu groups aligned with the BJP have launched a nationwide campaign called “Ghar Vapasi” (returning home) to convert them to Hinduism.
Michael stated that their forthcoming report would encompass comprehensive details of every recorded anti-Christian incident. It will also address the anti-conversion laws, violent assaults on Christians, and issues related to reservation status, all of which are pressing concerns for the Christian community in India.
Christian leaders have expressed that their community feels marginalized. For instance, the National Minorities Commission currently lacks a Christian member, although it includes representatives from Buddhist and Sikh backgrounds. Indian Christians outnumber adherents of these religions.
Lalpura pledged to expedite the appointment of a Christian member, according to Michael. In their letter to Prime Minister Modi, the UCF called for the inclusion of Dalits (formerly known as untouchables) and tribal Christians in India’s affirmative action policies. Such policies reserve quotas in government jobs, educational institutions, and legislative bodies to integrate these marginalized groups into society. Despite recommendations from various committees, successive governments have denied reservation status to Christians, arguing that Christianity does not have a caste system, and therefore, there cannot be Dalits among Christians.
Air India CEO Campbell Wilson on Friday said that the airline had, this week, acquired three brand new aircraft including first Airbus A350, and two Boeing 737MAX.
In letter, Wilson said that the aircraft acquired are part of the mammoth 470-aircraft order announced just a few months ago. “As well as Air India being the first Indian carrier to acquire the A350, this transaction makes us the first scheduled carrier to use the Gujarat International Finance Tec-City (GIFT City), and the aircraft the first widebody to have been leased through India’s first International Financial Services Centre (IFSC).
“The A350 is now undergoing some interior and technical modification and will receive a new coat of paint with the new Air India livery, so will only enter Indian skies in December. However, the B737MAXs will arrive much sooner… in fact, the first one is winging it’s way to India as I write!” Wilson said. The CEO also said that they inaugurated a new Emergency Command Centre (ECC) at their headquarters in Gurugram this week, replacing two erstwhile Air India facilities that were well past their prime.
“This new, state-of-the-art facility would be where, in the event of a crisis affecting Air India or our alliance partners, our actions would decided, coordinated and overseen. While we all hope that we never have to actively use this facility, the ECC gives us a world-class base equipped with the latest technology so that we can respond with the best possible support,” he said.”
We will also be refreshing and strengthening our Go Team with ground handling, flight safety members and technical representation, and adding to our Family Assistance Team to ensure we can provide humanitarian support wherever needed. Currently, we have 750 ‘Angels of Air India’ volunteers who will soon undergo training in emergency management, and we are always keen for more,” he added. “Speaking of technology, I’d also like to acknowledge the D&T and Customer Experience teams for the successful transition of all customer service channels to our own technology stack.
This includes telephony, computer-telephony-interface, interactive voice response, customer relationship management, customer data platform and artificial-intelligence-driven agent-assist technologies, which allows us to have a unified view of all customer support needs,” he said in the letter.
“Modernising and in housing this tech stack, and better interfacing it with other key systems, gives Air India better control, independence and ability to materially improve our customers’ experience with us, and to accelerate the development and deployment of new capabilities,” he added.
The US government and 17 states are taking legal action against Amazon in a significant monopoly case that highlights years of allegations surrounding the e-commerce giant’s misuse of its economic dominance and its impact on fair competition.
This groundbreaking lawsuit has been jointly filed by the Federal Trade Commission (FTC) and 17 state attorneys general. It represents the most aggressive move to date against Amazon, a company that originally started as an online bookstore but has since grown into a global e-commerce behemoth, often referred to as the “everything store.” Amazon has expanded its operations to include the sale of a wide range of consumer products, established a far-reaching logistics network, and ventured into other technological domains, including cloud computing.
The 172-page complaint alleges that Amazon engages in unfair practices that prioritize its own platform and services at the expense of third-party sellers who rely on the company’s e-commerce marketplace for distribution. One example highlighted by the FTC is Amazon’s requirement for sellers on its platform to use Amazon’s in-house logistics services to qualify for benefits like “Prime” eligibility. Additionally, the complaint contends that Amazon unfairly compels sellers to list their products on Amazon at the lowest prices available anywhere online, rather than allowing them to offer their products at competitive prices on other platforms.
These practices have already been the subject of a separate lawsuit filed against Amazon by the Attorney General of California last year. Due to Amazon’s dominant position in e-commerce, sellers often feel compelled to accept Amazon’s terms, which, according to the FTC, results in higher prices for consumers and a less favorable shopping experience. The FTC also alleges that Amazon prioritizes its own products in search results over those of third-party sellers.
FTC Chair Lina Khan emphasized that Amazon is aggressively focused on preventing others from achieving the same level of customer reach it has. She stated, “This complaint reflects the cutting edge and best thinking on how competition occurs in digital markets and, similarly, the tactics that Amazon has used to suffocate rivals, deprive them of oxygen, and really leave a stunted landscape in its wake.”
Seventeen states are participating in this legal action: Connecticut, Delaware, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, Michigan, Minnesota, New Jersey, New Hampshire, New Mexico, Nevada, New York, Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, and Wisconsin.
The complaint has been filed in the US District Court for the Western District of Washington, and it seeks a court order to halt Amazon’s alleged anticompetitive behavior. While the FTC has not ruled out the possibility of breaking up Amazon, the focus at this stage is primarily on determining liability. The complaint, however, does suggest that any court order could potentially include “structural relief,” referring to the possibility of breaking up Amazon.
Furthermore, the FTC has not ruled out the idea of holding individual Amazon executives personally responsible if there is sufficient evidence of their involvement in the alleged anticompetitive conduct.
This lawsuit against Amazon follows similar actions taken against other tech giants like Google and Meta, marking a growing trend of government scrutiny and antitrust allegations against major tech companies. The legal proceedings are expected to be protracted, but they underscore the increasing global scrutiny and concerns regarding the market power of Big Tech companies.
In response to the FTC’s allegations, David Zapolsky, Amazon’s Senior Vice President of Global Public Policy and General Counsel, defended the company’s practices, stating that Amazon has contributed to competition, innovation, and product variety in the retail industry. He argued that Amazon has facilitated lower prices, faster delivery, and opportunities for small businesses to sell their products.
Zapolsky also warned that if the FTC’s lawsuit succeeds, it could lead to higher prices for consumers, slower delivery times, and increased costs for Amazon’s operations, which might result in higher Amazon Prime subscription fees and less convenience for customers.
Over the years, Amazon has faced criticism from various quarters, including US lawmakers, European regulators, third-party sellers, consumer advocacy groups, and others. These critics have accused the company of a range of issues, including mistreatment of its workers and the imposition of anticompetitive terms on third-party sellers.
The FTC’s lawsuit, however, is more focused and takes aim at Amazon’s conduct in two specific markets: the “online superstore” market, where Amazon’s actions are alleged to harm consumers, and the “online marketplace services” market serving independent sellers. The complaint also highlights Amazon’s self-promotion of its own products in search results, which it believes is linked to the anticompetitive behavior under scrutiny.
This lawsuit represents a significant moment in FTC Chair Lina Khan’s career, as she has been at the forefront of efforts to scrutinize and regulate Amazon and other tech giants for antitrust violations. Khan’s leadership at the FTC has led to a more aggressive enforcement stance, particularly in the tech industry.
The lawsuit against Amazon by the FTC and 17 states is a pivotal development in the ongoing debate over the market power of tech giants. It underscores the government’s increasing focus on antitrust issues in the digital marketplace and raises significant questions about the future of Amazon and other major technology companies.
Plans have emerged for what is poised to become London’s most remarkable underground tourist attraction ever: the $268 million makeover of a mile-long network of World War II tunnels into a glamorous immersive experience.
Previously shrouded in secrecy and once shielded by the UK’s Official Secrets Act, these former espionage tunnels are slated for transformation by a team that includes the architects responsible for Singapore’s Gardens by the Bay and London’s Battersea Power Station. This transformation is contingent on securing planning approval later this autumn.
Picture: CNN
Situated approximately 40 meters beneath Chancery Lane tube station in High Holborn, the Kingsway Exchange Tunnels were constructed during the 1940s to provide refuge for Londoners during the Blitz bombing campaign of World War II. Since then, they remained off-limits to the general public, serving subsequent wartime roles such as housing Britain’s covert Special Operations Executive, an offshoot of MI6 and the real-world inspiration for James Bond’s Q Branch.
Subsequently, these tunnels were expanded to become the Kingsway Telephone Exchange, functioning as an internal communications hub during the Cold War in the 1950s. Notably, it played host to the “hotline” directly linking the leaders of the United States and the USSR. The exchange operated an extensive network of 5,000 trunk cables and was staffed by a bustling community of 200 workers responsible for managing phone lines.
In the 1980s, British Telecom assumed control of the site, establishing the world’s deepest licensed bar, exclusively catering to government personnel. This bar featured a game room replete with snooker tables and an opulent tropical fish tank, epitomizing the luxury of the 1980s.
By the close of that decade, the technology underpinning the telephone center had become outdated, leading to its decommissioning. However, fund manager Angus Murray, who serves as CEO of The London Tunnels, is now endeavoring to breathe life into the tunnel’s history by utilizing high-resolution immersive screens, interactive structures, scent-emitting technology, and an array of pinpoint speakers to captivate visitors.
Murray articulated, “The history of the tunnels, their scale, and their location between London’s Holborn and the historic Square Mile could establish these tunnels as one of London’s most sought-after tourist destinations.”
The proposed investment comprises £140 million ($170.5 million) for restoration work, coupled with an additional £80 million ($97 million) allocated for immersive enhancements. With the participation of architects Wilkinson-Eyre, this project has assembled a stellar team for a highly ambitious endeavor that far surpasses any other offerings in the city. Presently, London’s most established permanent underground tourist attraction is the Churchill War Rooms, situated just 12 feet below ground level, occupying a fraction of the 8,000-square-meter expanse of the Kingsway Exchange Tunnels.
Periodically, London Underground organizes Hidden London tours, allowing exploration of the city’s abandoned tube stations and tunnels. These tours consistently garner immense popularity, with tickets being snatched up as soon as they become available.
Nonetheless, eager subterranean adventurers may need to exercise patience. The London Tunnels project, should it proceed, is not anticipated to welcome its first awe-struck visitors until 2027. Yet, judging by its ambitious scope, it appears to be well worth the wait.
The industry prefers a winning formula to creative exploration, particularly in big-budget films populated by rocking stars with fancy fees. Will that change from hereon with the success of ‘Jawan’? We have on offer a new path for Bollywood, a path that can use its huge and unrivalled soft power to drive home some significant messages of the kind and in a way it has rarely attempted in a big-budget extravaganza.
By Jagdish Rattanani Shah Rukh Khan, also known as King Khan or SRK, is raking it in at the box office with ‘Jawan’. The movie opened last week and reportedly netted over Rs.350 crore by the weekend, said to be the biggest opening ever on record for a Bollywood movie. A career that some thought was in decline is back with a big bang. The SRK magic works this time with co-star Nayanthara, noted for her work across the southern Indian states, and Tamil cinema stars like Vijay Sethupati and the director Atlee Kumar, combining talent across the North and South into a package that appears to have been lapped up by the national audience. The producer company, Red Chillies Entertainment, describes the 2¾-hour-long movie in these words: “A high-octane action thriller which outlines the emotional journey of a man who is set to rectify the wrongs in society.”
Picture: KOIMOI
Needless to say, a lot of it is typical Bollywood hyperbole. But the “wrongs in society” it highlights are very real, making ‘Jawan’ a bold venture with distinct political overtones that many would see as high risk in this particular political atmosphere, further heated by the upcoming elections. That the movie highlights the death of patients due to a lack of oxygen cylinders in a public hospital, the farmer suicides, bad deals for substandard equipment that fail our soldiers, the factories that pollute our water and air, or protection of select businessmen wheeler-dealers, is as real or as specific as it can get today.
In that, the movie goes beyond the general tirade against the ills of society, pictured usually in stereotypes of the rogue middleman, the corrupt politician, or the woes of everyday people as they struggle to get their due. ‘Jawan’ still has a lot of common nouns, of course, but proper nouns are in the air. In that sense, SRK and team have unhesitatingly opened real issues meshed within unreal drama, using escapist masala to serve burning political questions that many can see, many more can sense but few from Bollywood will dare ask in today’s political climate.
Puts people on notice
It used to be the theory long ago that Bollywood works because vacuous song-and-dance was the one release from the misery of everyday living for millions. This changed over the decades, from the early romance stories and the rich-poor commentary to the angry-young-man, bolder romances, and then post-liberalisation with the arrival of low-cost productions that experimented with new themes. The changing times brought more modern-day issues to the big screen, like live-in relationships, LGBTQ+ rights and alliances, caste conflicts, “encounter” killings, the rural-urban divide, autism, loneliness, mental health. Many of the films over the years have had political messages and, in that sense, Bollywood was always political but in an indirect sort of way. It played mostly in safe territory – not many looked the establishment in the eye and spoke up with gusto.
Picture: ABP
This is a place known after all for song and dance, where the watchwords are entertainment and glamour. The industry prefers a winning formula to creative exploration, particularly in big-budget films populated by rocking stars with fancy fees. Will that change from hereon with the success of ‘Jawan’? We have on offer a new path for Bollywood, a path that can use its huge and unrivalled soft power to drive home some significant messages of the kind and in a way it has rarely attempted in a big-budget extravaganza. In that sense, the movie puts everyone on notice and opens new imaginations and possibilities of what Bollywood can do when it wades into hot political spaces.
Clear political messaging
One highlight of the movie is a speech that shows SRK asking citizens to pick who they will vote for after raising the right question: What will you, dear candidate, do for us, in the next five years? If someone in the family takes ill, what will you do for their treatment? What will you do to get me a job?
The message is to demand performance and delivery of service in areas of health, education, jobs, and not fall for distraction in the name of religion, race or caste. But these are exactly the questions and issues that are not in focus in the India of today, and posing them in a successful masala format gets them further to the masses than any medium possibly can. The delivery comes against a backdrop of electronic voting machines, framing the messages in the very live context of the 2024 elections.
None of this is a sophisticated delivery, or a critical examination of the complex political issues of our times. It is a baseline delivery but its significance is that it was delivered, and its success is in its wide reach, its slick package and its big questions. In that, it quite ironically matches the unsophisticated approach of those who have twisted the national agenda, changed the political discourse and now those who have come out with desperate calls to boycott the movie by drawing all kinds of connections – from the current controversy over remarks on Sanatana Dharma to Shah Rukh Khan’s recent visit to the Tirupati temple.
Expanded the space
The Hindi film industry is one place where the key currency is the quality of work and acceptance by the audience, never mind all that has been said in the name of the late Sushant Singh Rajput. Hindus, Muslims and all other faiths work here hard, and hand-in-hand, to take audiences into a dream world. It’s an efficient business machine that challenges you to prove yourself every day, however well you are connected.
The trick to making money and enjoying the ride is to challenge yourself, not challenge the political establishment. SRK’s ‘Jawan’ has just expanded that space to speak up. The effort deserves to be protected and nurtured and allowed to grow. The success of the movie is therefore good news, but it remains to be seen what will follow and how Bollywood can or will embrace this new road.
Extracts from Cato Institute’s Associate Director of Immigration Studies David J. Bier’s testimony at Sept. 13, 2023, hearing of Committee on the Budget United States Senate, Washington, D.C.)
David J. Bier is Associate Director of Immigration Research at Cato Institute. Photo: cato.org
Our view is simple: people are the ultimate resource. New people are not threats to suppress but assets to celebrate. We need people to transform natural resources into human resources, and in a free country, people seek to do just that. Immigrants are no different. Immigrants are workers, inventors, investors, and entrepreneurs.
Immigrants increase the supply of labor, which increases the supply of goods and services that people need; their consumption, entrepreneurship, and investment also increases the demand for labor, creating better‐paying jobs for Americans elsewhere in the economy. Fundamentally, immigrants aren’t competitors. They are collaborators. Unfortunately, America’s immigration system fails to recognize this fact, leading to catastrophic consequences.
Immigrants can save the United States from population decline.
The most critical challenge facing the United States today is its declining population growth rate. The U.S. population is growing slower than at any point in its history. Moreover, in 2022, international migration accounted for 80 percent of the meager 0.4 percent population growth.1 Without immigration, the U.S. population will start to decline by the 2030s. Already in 2022, about half of all the counties in the United States saw declining populations.
People are necessary to maintain buildings, roads, schools, hospitals, and businesses because population decline erodes property values and forces business and school closures. This population death spiral has afflicted both urban and rural counties. Rural America saw a decrease in population for the first time in U.S. history in the last decade.3 Population aging or decline will reduce tax revenue per capita in nearly every state by 2030.
The country has already seen how population decline will manifest in the future. Major cities saw significant outmigration in the 1960s and 1970s before they stabilized and rebounded in the 1990s and 2000s, largely thanks to new immigrants. The outmigration led to housing vacancies and job losses, which contributed to increased crime, and the in‐migration went hand in hand with lower crime and more business creation. Immigration has already created or preserved $3.7 trillion in housing wealth for U.S. households.6 Immigrants do this primarily by preventing declines in housing values in the lowest‐cost areas in a city. Every 1,000 new immigrants to a county create economic opportunities for 270 additional U.S. residents, helping draw areas out of decline.
Immigrants can save America from labor force decline.
With slower population growth, labor force growth in the United States has also declined for decades, falling by 65 percent from the 1960s—when the immigrant share of the U.S.population bottomed out—to the most recent decade. It fell faster among those without a college degree. From 1995 to 2022, immigrants and their children accounted for 70 percent of labor force growth, and over the last two years, immigrants accounted for 100 percent of the increase in the working‐age population. Without immigrants, the working‐age population will fall by about 6 million in the next two decades. The total U.S. population would decline without any immigration by 2040.10
The costs of this decline are huge. The ratio of workers to retirees has plummeted since the 1960s, and the Social Security Trustees now estimate that Social Security will be short nearly 35 million workers to fund the system in the 2030s. It will have to cut benefits by at least 23 percent in 2034, if not earlier. The situation will not improve after that with benefit cuts reaching 30 percent and the shortfall in workers hitting 80 million by 2080.
The present value cost of this worker shortage to U.S. retirees is about $24 trillion. Of course, the underlying dynamics of Social Security need reforms regardless, but this shortfall highlights the magnitude of America’s workforce issues. The Federal Reserve Board of Governors expects that the decline in population growth will cause economic growth to decline throughout OECD member countries, including the United States, increasing the burden of the U.S. debt.
Immigrants improve the U.S. fiscal situation. According to a Cato Institute update of a National Academy of Sciences report, immigrants generate, in inflation‐adjusted terms, nearly $1 trillion in state, local, and federal taxes, which is almost $300 billion more than they receive in government benefits, including cash assistance, entitlements, and public education.
In the long‐term, the present value of all the taxes generated minus all the benefits received for an immigrant arriving at age 25 is positive for all education levels, including high school dropouts (Table below). This positive result occurs partly because immigrant workers cause companies to invest more in capital, which results in those companies paying far more in taxes than they would without those workers.
The Congressional Budget Office (CBO) found in 2013 that comprehensive immigration reform would have “a net savings of about $175 billion over the 2014–2023 period” and “would decrease federal budget deficits by about $700 billion (or 0.2 percent of total output) over the 2024–2033 period.” The CBO stated that there would be about another $300 billion in savings from the indirect economic effects of more workers. Unfortunately, this scoring was a rare exception to CBO’s normal practice of not considering the increases in employment that occur when immigrants enter the labor force, leading to such anomalies as finding that immigrant PhDs will impose net costs on the federal government.
Tax revenues grow when more is produced, and lower production is the biggest cost of all from an overly restrictive immigration system. Workers allow businesses to increase production, supplying the needs of U.S. consumers. Children and the elderly tend to increase inflation, while workers tend to lower it. This is because children and retirees produce no consumer products but still buy them, while workers lower prices by increasing the production of consumer goods and services. As the U.S. labor force shrinks, this problem will become more acute, driving up costs for seniors and everyone else.
Immigrants can fill current labor shortages.
Throughout the current labor shortage, especially in 2021 and 2022, U.S. consumers were acutely aware of the interaction between workforce shortages and higher inflation every time they faced delays and higher prices at restaurants, retailers, and online. Currently, U.S. nonfarm employers have about 9 million open jobs, and over the last two and a half years, this number has averaged about 10 million. Every single month after January 2021 had more job openings than any month before it, back to the start of the job openings data series in the year 2000. Filling these jobs would have increased U.S. gross domestic product by about $2 trillion. This additional production of goods and services that consumers want is the reason that new workers reduce inflation, not because they lower wages. Of course, any individual worker benefits if they alone receive a monopoly over an area of business, but monopolies hurt everyone else, and when applied to the entire economy, this type of economic policy harms everyone, including those who receive “protection.”
Immigrants fill labor market niches across the skill spectrum.
The short‐ and long‐term labor shortfall is not primarily about a skills gap. Labor demand has increased and will increase across the skills spectrum. Everything from construction laborers to web developers has seen unprecedented increases in open jobs. Every single industry averaged more job openings in 2023 than in 2019—which was already at near‐record highs.
Construction has averaged 354,000 job openings per month in 2023 while manufacturing has averaged 650,000. A major project—funded partly by U.S. taxpayers—to build a new TSMC microchip manufacturing facility in Arizona is already being delayed because of a shortage of experienced workers in the construction trades. Leisure and hospitality averaged 1.4 million. Trade, transportation, and utilities had over 1.6 million. Education and health services were nearly 2 million.
In the long‐term, the Bureau of Labor Statistics predicts that most jobs created this decade will not require a college degree, and that nearly 70 percent of jobs in the economy will not require a college degree in 2030. Besides lifting the production of goods and services that U.S. consumers need, immigrant workers in these positions create new opportunities for U.S. workers in other less manually intensive jobs—typically ones that require English language abilities. Immigrants complement Americans. They don’t replace them. This is one reason why U.S. worker employment has almost always moved in the same direction as immigrant employment.
With 1 million new jobs, home health aides are projected to see the largest increase in employment of any single occupational category. These aides are critical to provide care for seniors, and they allow many older workers to keep working while caring for an ailing spouse. But without the workers to fill them, the growth in aides may not happen. America has even seen declines in employment in critical areas of elder care, despite record demand. Shockingly, for instance, the number of employees in skilled nursing care facilities has declined from 1.7 million to 1.4 million from 2011 to 2023.
Many nursing homes are closing because they cannot properly staff their operations—particularly in rural areas. In Minnesota alone, 45 facilities have closed. Another 60 have closed in Texas. There were 22 closures in Iowa in the last year alone. In Rhode Island, according to the American Health Care Association, nursing homes have lost 21 percent of their staff since 2019.29 Five have already closed, and most are at risk of closing.
At open facilities, huge numbers of beds remain empty, with the vacancies nationwide reaching 32 percent. An analysis of nursing homes by researchers from Harvard, MIT, and Rochester showed that, “increased immigration significantly raises the staffing levels of nursing homes in the U.S., particularly in full‐time positions,” which results in better patient outcomes. The National Council of the State Boards of Nursing has found that 800,000 nurses plan to leave the labor force by 2027.
One reason why Americans are having fewer children is the cost of childcare. The cost of childcare directly reduces the growth in the future labor force and indirectly reduces the growth in the labor force by driving mothers to drop out of the labor force. A majority of mothers with young children are not looking for jobs solely because of childcare or family responsibilities. A staffing crisis has caused massive wait lists for care in states across the country. In Pennsylvania, 7,000 open positions have led to 32,500 kids waiting for care. It’s worse in Michigan, where nearly 54,000 kids are waiting.
Researchers Delia Furtado and Heinrich Hock have found that low‐skilled immigrants have “substantially reduced” the costs of having a child. Patricia Cortés and José Tessada similarly find, “low‐skilled immigration increases average hours of market work and the probability of working long hours of women at the top quartile of the wage distribution.” Allowing higher‐income women to work has important knock‐on fiscal and economic benefits because they have above‐average productivity.
New home construction—a critical component in family formation—has also suffered from too few workers. Construction employment has reached record highs, while construction unemployment is at near‐record lows. Construction industry wages are now higher than the average wage for workers generally.
The United States is also facing critical shortages of skilled workers. For physicians per capita, America ranks far behind Germany, Sweden, Australia, and Switzerland, and it has half the number of physicians per capita as Austria—effectively a difference of nearly 1 million physicians.
In rural areas, the shortages are dire. A study in the journal Health Affairs has shown that rural patients are far more likely to die because they lack the number of specialists to treat them effectively. This situation would be even worse if not for immigrants, who account for a quarter of all U.S. physicians.44 Skilled science, technology, engineering, and math workers are also in short supply. There are about half a million open computer and mathematics jobs in the United States right now, and the unemployment rate for these jobs is at 2 percent. McKinsey estimates that chip manufacturers will be short 390,000 engineers and skilled technicians by 2030, leading to more production being set up offshore. In 2020, the Defense Department issued a report saying that the shortfall of computer workers “directly threatens U.S. national self‐determination in commerce and geopolitics.”
Since 2019, the Department of Labor has certified over 250,000 computer and mathematics jobs as unfillable by any U.S. worker, which is the first step of the employment‐based green card process. But most of these workers have entered the green card backlog, and the U.S. immigration system is so poorly designed that engineers from Venezuela have been entering at the U.S. border.
Immigrants can supercharge entrepreneurship and innovation.
Picture: Citizen Path
As the U.S. population has aged, the entrepreneurship rate has declined. There has been a 40 percent decline in the rate of new business starts since the 1970s, and the rate of self‐employed entrepreneurs has likewise halved. Immigrants can counteract these drags on the economy. Immigrants are 80 percent more likely to start businesses than the U.S.-born population. Over 35 percent of new businesses have at least one immigrant founder, and they or their children founded 45 percent of Fortune 500 companies. Immigrants have founded the majority of businesses valued at more than $1 billion.
Immigrants also make up a disproportionate 28 percent of brick‐and‐mortar “main street” businesses nationwide. In many major metropolitan areas, immigrants account for about half of all main street businesses. Immigrants own astounding shares of small businesses in New York City: 90 percent of dry cleaning and laundry services, 84 of grocery stores, 75 percent of child daycares, and 69 percent of restaurants.55
Immigrants are key to productivity growth and innovation. Immigrants have founded 65 percent of the leading U.S. artificial intelligence companies. Over 70 percent of $1 billion U.S. companies employ an immigrant in a key leadership position, such as CEO or chief technology officer. Immigrant‐founded companies are also much more likely to have patents. From 1950 to 2000, immigrants with science and engineering degrees had patent rates double the average rate. The best estimate indicates that about 40 percent of total factor productivity growth—growth not from increases in labor or capital—came from immigrant workers in science, technology, engineering, and math degrees.
U.S. law thwarts legal immigration.
Immigrants are more likely to work than U.S.-born workers overall and at every education level—a difference that grows significantly among the least skilled—and nearly 97 percent of immigrants who looked for jobs in 2022 found them. Immigrant adults without high school degrees are about 20 percentage points more likely to work than comparable U.S.-born adults. The issue is not that immigrants lack the desire to help America. Rather, the issue is that America’s immigration system prevents too many potential immigrants from being able to do so. To briefly review the main permanent immigration options available for immigrants abroad:
The Refugee Program: The population of displaced people reached 100 million last year, and the United States accepted barely 25,000 through its refugee program—0.1 percent.62
Family‐sponsored: The capped family‐sponsored system has a backlog of over 8.3 million, and 1.6 million immigrants currently waiting will be dead before they can receive a green card.
Employer-sponsored: Employer‐sponsored green cards are capped at 140,000 annually and have a backlog of over 1.8 million. The country‐based caps mean that wait times for Indian workers with a master’s degree will be longer than the average lifespan. Employer‐sponsored green cards are close to impossible to obtain for those without very high wage offers and a work visa, and the main work visa—the H‑1B—is capped at 25 percent of demand. For those coming temporarily, the H‑2B seasonal worker program for nonagricultural jobs is the only path for most U.S. seasonal low‐skilled jobs, and it has an annual cap of 66,000. Although Congress temporarily doubled this cap year, that level was only about half the level required to meet the number of positions requested.
Diversity Lottery: The diversity green card lottery is available to immigrants only if they are notfrom legal immigrants’ main origin countries and have a high school degree or experience in a skilled job, and it offers entrants just a 0.2 percent chance of receiving a green card.
Note that there is no option for entrepreneurs. This high‐level review does not represent the complexity and restrictiveness of the system. The figure below details the legal requirements to immigrate to the United States in a flow chart. Many aspiring Americans are excluded with each section until nearly everyone loses their chance to immigrate. In 2023, about 34 million people entered a legal process to try to obtain a green card, and barely more than 1 million will receive legal permanent residence.
This massive disparity between green cards issued and green cards requested is a consequence of decades of unnecessarily low green card caps, leading millions to have no viable way to enter the U.S. legally. From 1848 to 1914, the annual number of people receiving green cards hit one percent of the U.S. population 22 times. It has never happened since the Immigration Act of 1924, and only once has it even hit half that rate, when Congress waived the caps on behalf of 3 million illegal immigrants in the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986. One percent of the U.S. population today would be nearly 3.4 million people. The number of green card recipients in 2022 was just 1 million.70
Immigration policy is also restrictive compared to our peer nations. The United States went from accounting for the majority of the increase in the world immigrant population in the 1990s to accounting for just 7.5 percent of it from 2015 to 2020. This happened both because more immigrants went to other countries and because fewer immigrants went to the United States.
Less than 15 percent of the U.S. population was born outside the United States. This ranks 56th highest in the world. It ranks in the bottom third of wealthy countries in the world, and the gaps are massive. To catch up to Canada (21.4 percent), nearly 30 million immigrants would have to arrive this year. To reach the immigrant share in Australia (30.3 percent), the number grows to 76.4 million. To hit Hong Kong’s percentage (39.2 percent), it would have to exceed 140 million. These totals are unfathomable, but they illustrate how much flexibility the United States has when it comes to changing its immigration policy and remaining well within the norms for the wealthy world.
…Conclusion
The most important economic challenge facing the United States right now is the decline in population and labor force growth. Fewer workers mean less production, higher prices, and lower tax revenues. Immigrants stand ready to address this challenge. Congress should focus on increasing legal immigration and assuring that workers already in the country can fully and legally contribute to this country.
Global, 4th October 2023:ZEE5 Global, the world’s largest streaming platform for South Asian content, announces the world digital premiere of the biggest Hindi blockbuster of the year, ‘Gadar 2’ today. After a successful theatrical run collecting 63M USD in India and still counting, Gadar 2 is set for another successful innings on ZEE5 Global on 6th October. Produced by Zee Studios and directed by Anil Sharma, the superhit sequel to the 2001 hit ‘Gadar’ will see Sunny Deol, Ameesha Patel and Utkarsh Sharma reprise their roles as Tara Singh, Sakeena and Charanjeet “Jeete” Singh respectively.
Gadar 2 brings back India’s most loved family of Tara, Sakeena & Jeete; 22 years after its predecessor. Set against the backdrop of Indo-Pakistan war of 1971, Tara Singh, once again, will face every enemy to protect the honor of his country and family. This time, the narrative will delve deeper into the enduring love of Tara Singh and Sakeena and additionally, will see a strong father-son bond between Tara Singh and Charanjeet as the latter lands in Pakistan and ends up being caught and tortured. While the last time, Tara Singh visited Pakistan to get his wife back, this time, he will return to rescue his son.
So, gear up for bigger, better and bolder action sequences from Sunny Deol and a repeat of his most popular dialogue “Hindustan zindabad tha, zindabad hai aur zindabad rahega” which will continue to echo in every Hindustani’s heart for a long time. The movie will also see Sunny Deol reprise his famous handpump scene and sing and dance to the original chartbusters (from the 2001 film) like ‘Udd Jaa Kaale Kaava’, ‘Main Nikla Gaddi Leke’ and recreate the same magic from 2001.
Archana Anand, Chief Business Officer, ZEE5 Global said, “Bollywood blockbusters have always transcended geographical boundaries and resonated with global viewers through their powerful and emotionally charged stories. With the World Digital Premiere of Gadar 2, ZEE5 Global is thrilled to present our global viewers with the sequel to one of Hindi cinema’s all-time blockbuster hits that has captivated audiences for over 22 years”.
Shariq Patel, CBO, Zee Studios said, “Gadar 2 brought back India’s most loved family of Tara Singh, Sakeena and Jeete; 22 years after its predecessor. Hindustan Ka Asli Blockbuster will make history once more with its digital premiere on ZEE5 Global”.
Sunny Deol said, “We are absolutely delighted with the overwhelming response that ‘Gadar 2’ has received in theatres. Now with its World Digital Premiere on ZEE5 Global, I am very excited for the movie to reach a wider, global audience. Gadar 2 is a perfect family entertainer which will keep the viewers completely engaged and entertained. I urge everyone to watch it if you haven’t already and watch it again if you have”.
Ameesha Patel said, “Sakeena is a character who has stayed with me throughout my career, and I was so excited to revisit her in ‘Gadar 2.’ The chemistry between Tara and Sakeena is timeless, and the sequel reignites that magic for our fans. ZEE5 Global’s platform allows us to connect with a global audience, and I’m thrilled that viewers from around the world will have the opportunity to witness this epic love story, all over again but with more twists and action”.
Director Anil Sharma said, “The story of ‘Gadar’ is etched in the memories of every movie lover and with Gadar 2, we have tried to recreate the same magic. I am beyond thrilled that Gadar 2 has become one of the most successful Hindi films of all time and now with its World Digital Premiere on ZEE5 Global, I hope that the film breaks more records and reaches more people across the world”.
‘Gadar 2’ is set for its World Digital Premiere on ZEE5 Global from 6th October 2023!
Viewers can catch ZEE5 Global’s unmissable slate and stock up on their yearlong entertainment by subscribing to the Annual pack and grabbing the limited-time special offer price.
Users can download the ZEE5 Global app from Google Play Store / iOS App Store. It is available on Roku devices, Apple TVs, Android TVs, Amazon Fire TV and Samsung Smart TVs and on www.ZEE5.com
ZEE5 Global is the digital entertainment destination launched by Zee Entertainment Enterprises Limited (ZEEL), a global Media and Entertainment powerhouse. The platform launched across 190+ countries in October 2018 and has content across 18 languages: Hindi, English, Bengali, Malayalam, Tamil, Telugu, Kannada, Marathi, Oriya, Bhojpuri, Gujarati, Punjabi, including six international languages Malay, Thai, Bahasa, Urdu, Bangla and Arabic. ZEE5 Global is home to 200,000+ hours of on-demand content. The platform brings together the best of Originals, Movies and TV Shows, Music, Health and Lifestyle content in one destination. In addition, ZEE5 Global offers features like 15 navigational languages, content download options and Voice Search.
Tasveer South Asian Film Festival (TSAFF) is gearing up for its 18th edition from October 12 to 22, 2023, across multiple venues in Seattle, WA. This year, TSAFF achieves a momentous milestone as the first and only South Asian film festival whose winning films will qualify for submission to the esteemed Oscars. The significance of a South Asian film festival qualifying for the Oscars illustrates the importance of representation and inclusivity in media as it challenges historically limited narratives and promotes cross-cultural understanding.
With the theme of “Breaking Cinematic Barriers,” this year’s lineup unveils an impressive collection of 83 selected films spanning diverse genres and captivating themes. The carefully curated selection includes 23 features, 60 shorts, 20 documentaries, and 63 narratives; 25 World Premieres, 36 North America Premiere, with 33 Female identified directors. These films, presented in 26 languages, promise an unparalleled global cinematic journey reflecting the rich tapestry of South Asian stories.
Tasveer co-founder Rita Meher expressed her pride in the festival: “As the only Oscar-qualifying South Asian festival, we are committed to presenting a program of unparalleled depth and significance. Our festival winners can directly compete in the Academy Awards run, allowing authentic South Asian narratives to shine on the grandest stage, unfiltered and unmediated.”
The 18th Annual Tasveer Festival kicks off with in-person screenings from October 12th to 15th at premier venues, including the Paccar IMAX Theater at Pacific Science Center. The festival will continue in a virtual format on TasveerTV from October 16th to 22nd, offering audiences the flexibility to engage with the content from the comfort of their homes.
Film + Event Highlights:
Opening Night Film: The opening night will feature the gripping drama of “Munnel (Sand in Tamil)” from Sri Lanka. The film skillfully weaves together themes of love, loss, faith, and desperation that immerse us in the post-war landscape of Sri Lanka, where Rudran, an ex-Tamil militant, returns home in search of his vanished lover, Vaani. The film won a jury award at the 2023 International Film Festival Rotterdam (IFFR).
Centerpiece: “Pasang: In the Shadow of Everest” presents an inspiring tale from Nepal, chronicling the remarkable journey of mountaineer Pasang Lhamu Sherpa as she challenges racism, gender bias, and political opposition to become the first Nepali woman to conquer Mount Everest.
Washington State/Climate Change Film: “Between Earth and Sky” delves into the life of ecologist Nalini Nadkarni as she explores the effects of disturbance and recovery of rainforest canopies, with a special local focus on the Olympic National Park in Washington state.
LGBTQIA+ Focus: “Blue Sunshine” is a groundbreaking film by and about a Transgender woman, based on the real-life events of Samyuktha Vijayan, who wrote, directed, produced, and acted in it.
Tasveer Youth Collective Focus: “Alone Alone Alone on a Wide Wide Sea” is a creation, in collaboration with Tasveer, from NYU Tisch School of the Arts.
Documentary Focus: “Tortoise Under the Earth” presents an Indigenous Tribal Rights docu-feature, co-presented in collaboration with the University of Washington South Asia Center.
Local Focus: “Alien” poignantly portrays the struggles of Indian immigrants on H1B visas, exposing the dichotomy between America’s dependence on foreign talent and its treatment of these individuals.
Bangladeshi Film: “Pett Kata Shaw” breathes life into ancient South Asian folktales through a supernatural anthology, embracing the burgeoning popularity of the horror genre in contemporary Bengali films.
Closing Night Film: “Catfish,” World Premiere, explores themes of prohibiting queer love, longing, and loneliness in the digital age as a lonely office worker from Pakistan engages in a desperate online attempt at companionship.
Special Partnership: South Asian House proudly hosts a Happy Hour at Tasveer to celebrate the screening of three films produced and executive produced by co-founders Rohi Mirza Pandya (14 YEARS & EID MUBARAK) and Jitin Hingorani (CALL ME DANCER), featuring lead protagonist and dancer Manish Chauhan on Saturday, October 14, 2023 at PACCAR IMAX Theater. The Happy Hour will take place right after the CALL ME DANCER screening and will take place at The Masonry 20 Roy St, Seattle, WA 98109 from 5 to 7pm. More info at www.southasianhouse.com
The District of Columbia Mayor Muriel Bowser joined global humanitarian and peacemaker Gurudev Sri Sri Ravi Shankar, founder of the Art of Living, to announce the preliminary lineup for the 2023 World Culture Festival, to be held September 29 through October 1, 2023, on the historic National Mall in the U.S. capital.
The Honorable Mayor Muriel Bowser:”We are delighted to host the fourth-annual World Culture Festival. Washington, D.C. is the perfect city to bring people together from around the globe. We are a city that celebrates diversity and inclusivity, a global city, a welcoming city, and a city that loves visitors. We know that Gurudev Sri Sri Ravi Shankar’s message that ‘diversity is the beauty of creation’ aligns with our D.C. values. So, we invite people to plan their visits, and we’ll see you in the fall!”
The World Culture Festival, which has attracted millions in its previous iterations in Asia and Europe, will come to the United States for the first time ever for an epic celebration of global diversity, unity and peace:
#YOUnitedWeCelebrate: Gurudev and Mayor Bowser invited the public to join in on the world’s largest celebration of diversity and belongingness.
Bridging the Divide: Amidst increasing political and societal polarization, world leaders will come together to affirm a collective intention for unity and peace.
Social Connection: As the world grapples with epidemic loneliness, isolation, and mental health burden, the Festival’s attendees will experience the power of social connection.
Gurudev Sri Sri Ravi Shankar: “We need to bridge the gap. There is a lot of polarization in the world. The World Culture Festival is an occasion for people to come together and celebrate each other’s differences. It is the need of the hour, to bring people together in celebration and to spread the message of peace and to say that we are one human family.”
PRELIMINARY LINEUP:
Over 50 world leaders,including current and former heads of state, members of national parliaments and international governmental organizations, have already committed to attending the Festival, including:
E. Secretary General Ban Ki-moon, 8th Secretary General of the United Nations
E. Chan Santokhi, President of Suriname
E. Pravind Jugnauth, Prime Minister of Mauritius
E. Vicente Fox, Former President of Mexico
E. Federico Franco, Former President of Paraguay
E. Venkaiah Naidu, Former Vice President of India
E. Alojz Peterle, Former Prime Minister of Slovenia
E. Rosalía Arteaga Serrano, Former President of Ecuador
E. Kjell Magne-Bondevik, Former Prime Minister of Norway
Hildebrando Tapia, Former Member of Andean Parliament
Thousands of unique performers and artists will take part in the jam-packed entertainment lineup. All performers are based in the United States, representing the cultures and heritage of over 35 countries and counting. Performance groups include:
1,000+ Chinese Cultural Performers
1,000-Person Gospel Choir
500 Indian Classical Dancers
500-Person Global Dance Mashup
200 Hip-Hop Dancers
200 Ukrainian Dancers
200 Latin-American Dancers
100 Afghan Performers
100 Native American Performers
A global Faith Advisory councilis being convened in support of the World Culture Festival. The council, composed of leaders from faiths of the world, will share messages about common values of peace, harmony and partnership to nurture greater unity and togetherness. More details to come.
There will be a diverse international food festivalassociated with the event that is expected to attract thousands to sample international cuisines made by chefs from around the capital region. Over 50 ethnic food trucks are expected to be in a designated area along the National Mall.
There will be multiple pop-up cultural events throughout the District of Columbialeading up to the festival, including at least one in each of D.C.’s eight community wards. These pop-ups will be a chance for D.C. residents and visitors to preview and experience the celebration of culture and unity before the historic event from Sept. 29 to Oct. 1. Details and dates for all upcoming pop-ups will be announced soon.
The first D.C. pop-up is Saturday, May 20 at the picturesque Meridian Hill Park. The free pop-up is open to the public and will have music, dance, yoga and meditation. The afternoon’s highlight will be a live meditation conducted by Art of Living founder Gurudev Sri Sri Ravi Shankar. For more information, please visit tiny.cc/wcfpopup.
WCF’S EXPANSIVE SCOPE AND SCALE:
The World Culture Festival is expected to attract more than 150,000 visitors. This festival is expected to have an economic impact of over $30M in revenue.
The previous WCF in New Delhi, India, created a 45% increase in the GDP of the union territory of Delhi and contributed $300 million dollars to the economy of the union territory of Delhi.
As of mid-May, 45,000 people have already registered to attend the World Culture Festival, with 80 percent of registrants coming from the United States and 20 percent from abroad.
Of the US registrants, 27 percent come from the greater D.C. area, while the rest are from all corners of the country.
Thousands of hotel rooms have already been booked ahead of the Festival. As of mid-May, 2,180 hotel rooms have been booked at the various neighboring hotels in the area.
Festival grounds will span the entire National Mall and will be similar in size to presidential inaugurations. It is being designed to be the largest event in D.C. this year, based on the permit given by the U.S. National Park Service.
Hargrove is working as the event designer, bringing Gurudev’s vision to life across the National Mall. The Festival is a D.C. endeavor that has been in the works for the better part of a year.
There will be an expansive performer/speaker stage – with vast audience seating (over 12,000 seats) to watch the events unfold – in addition to a large portion of the Mall dedicated to various World Culture Festival Activations. The dance floor is expected to be over 32,000 sq ft and will provide over a football field’s worth of performance space.
RECEPTION COMMITTEE/ORGANIZING COMMITTEE MEMBERS
The Reception Committee is composed of high-level government officials lending their experience and expertise to the Festival. Full list of names are below.
Video testimonials from Hon. Danny Davis, Member of House of Representatives (D-IL); Hon. Andy Kim, Member of House of Representatives (D-NJ); Hon. Raja Krishnamoorthi, Member of House of Representatives (D-IL); Virginia State Senator Chap Petersen(D-Fairfax City); Hon. Michelle Steel, Member of House of Representatives (R-CA); Hon. Mike Quigley, Member of House of Representatives (D-IL) can be found here.
Reception Committee Members:
E. Ban Ki-moon, the eighth Secretary-General of the United Nations and Chair of the Reception Committee
E. Pravind Jugnauth, Prime Minister, Mauritius
E. Ratu Wiliame Katonivere, President, Fiji
E. Chan Santokhi, President, Suriname
E. Jacques Santer, Former President, European Commission and Former Prime Minister, Luxembourg
E. Erik Solheim, Former UN Under-Secretary-General and Executive Director of the UN Environmental Programme (UNEP) and Former Minister of International Development & Environment, Norway
E. Venkaiah Naidu, Former Vice President, India
E. Kjell Magne Bondevik, Former Prime Minister, Norway Founder and Executive Chair, The Oslo Center
E. Helen Clark, Former Prime Minister, New Zealand
E. Nambaryn Enkhbayar, Former President, Mongolia
E. Mark Eyskens, Former Prime Minister, Belgium
E. Vicente Fox, Former President, Mexico
E. Federico Franco, Former President, Paraguay
E. Mohamed Moncef Marzouki, Former President, Tunisia
E. Olusegun Obasanjo, Former President, Nigeria
E. Alojz Peterle, Former Prime Minister, Slovenia
E. Rosalia Arteaga Serrano, Former President, Ecuador and Executive Director, Fidal Foundation
E. Jigmi Yoser Thinkley, Former Prime Minister, Bhutan
E. Akie Abe, Former First Lady, Japan
H. Sheikh Mohammed bin Hamad bin Mohammed Al Sharqi, Crown Prince of Fujairah, United Arab Emirates
Ryszard Czarnecki, Former Vice President of the European Parliament, Poland
Prof. Herman De Croo, Minister of State, Honorary Speaker of the House, Honorary Mayor of Brakel, Belgium
Armin Laschet, Member of German Parliament and Vice President, Parliamentary Assembly of the Council of Europe and Former Minister-President, North Rhine-Westphalia, Germany
Sumitra Mahajan, Former Speaker of the Lok Sabha, India
Nancy Pelosi, Former Speaker of the House of Representatives, United States of America
Right Honorable Sir Robert James Buckland KBE KC MP, Former Lord Chancellor and Wales Secretary, United Kingdom
Ted Baillieu, Former Premier of Victoria, Australia
Bruno Bruins, Former Minister for Medical Care, Netherlands
Raymond LaHood, Former U.S. Secretary of Transportation, United States of America
Hakubun Shimomura, Member of the House of Representatives and Former Minister of Education, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology, Japan
Hildebrando Tapia, Former Vice President, Andean Parliament, Peru
Geoffrey Van Orden CBE, Former Leader of British Conservatives in the European Parliament, United Kingdom
Danny Davis, Member of House of Representatives (D-IL), United States of America
Mike Quigley, Member of House of Representatives (D-IL), United States of America
Bill Foster, Member of House of Representatives (D-IL), United States of America
Andy Barr, Member of House of Representatives (R-KY), United States of America
Richard Hudson, Member of House of Representatives (R-NC), United States of America
Marc Veasey, Member of House of Representatives (D-TX), United States of America
Ro Khanna, Member of House of Representatives (D-CA), United States of America
Raja Krishnamoorthi, Member of House of Representatives (D-IL), United States of America
Andy Kim, Member of House of Representatives (D-NJ), United States of America
Jake Auchincloss, Member of House of Representatives (D-MA), United States of America
Jerry Carl, Member of House of Representatives (R-AL), United States of America
Young Kim, Member of House of Representatives (R-CA), United States of America
Deborah Ross, Member of House of Representatives (D-NC), United States of America
Michelle Steel, Member of House of Representatives (R-CA), United States of America
Kevin Kiley, Member of House of Representatives (R-CA), United States of America
Laurel Lee, Member of House of Representatives (R-FL), United States of America
Rick McCormick, Member of House of Representatives (R-GA), United States of America
Shri Thanedar, Member of House of Representatives (D-MI), United States of America
Binod Chaudhary, Member of Parliament, Nepal and Chairman and President, The Chaudhary Group (CG)
Yvonne Feri, Member of Parliament, Switzerland
Dr. Nik Gugger, Member of the Parliament, Switzerland and Member of the European Parliament
His Highness Azzan Bin Qais Al Said, Vice Chairman, Oman National Olympic Committee, Oman
Organizing Committee Members:
The Organizing Committee contributes their leadership, experience, and counsel to build an unforgettable World Culture Festival IV.
Rob Trombold, President of Art of Living and Convener of World Culture Festival
Ann Luskey, Founder and Trustee, Charlotte’s Web Foundation
Binod Chaudhary, Member of Parliament of Nepal and Chairman and President of The Chaudhary Group (CG)
Chirag Patel, President and CEO, Amneal Pharmaceuticals
Courteney Monroe, President, National Geographic Global Television Networks
Francisco Sanchez, Former U.S. Under-Secretary of Commerce at the US Department of Commerce
Jo Leinen, Former Member of European Parliament
Luis Moreno Ocampo, Founding Prosecutor of International Court of Justice
Louis Gagnon, Founder and CEO of the Regenerative Group
Madhu Rao, Former CEO of Shangri-La Group
Manoj K. Jain, Founder and President of Mid-South Infectious Disease Associates
Mike Perlis, Vice Chairman of Forbes Media
E. Nirj Deva DL FRSA, President Envoy to Western Europe & Commonwealth of Nations for the Commonwealth Union and Former Vice President for International Development, European Parliament
Prem Jain, Co-Founder of Pensando Systems, now the Networking Solutions Group AMD Pensando
Randi Weingarten, President of the American Federation of Teachers
Ranvir Trehan, General Trustee, Kennedy Center for the Performing Arts
Reginald Van Lee, Partner and Chief Transformation Officer, Carlyle Group
Rodney Mims Cook Jr., President of the National Monuments Foundation
Tim Draper, Founder of Draper Associates, DFJ, and Draper Venture Network
Tim Ryan, Former Congressman D-OH13
Tonya Vidal Kinlow, Vice President of Community Engagement, Advocacy and Government Affairs at Children’s National Hospital and Chair of the Board of DC Chamber of Commerce
E. AMB. Vijay Nambiar, Former Chef-de-Cabinet of the United Nations & Special Ambassador to Myanmar
Vivek Paul, Adjunct Professor, Stanford University
TICKET INFORMATION
All World Culture Festival events are free and open to the public. All ages are encouraged to join. Registration and ticket information for the fall festival in Washington, D.C. can be found at www.worldculturefest.org. Please direct all inquiries to WCF2023@lindarothpr.com for further information.
PAST WORLD CULTURE FESTIVALS:
Bangalore (2006):2.5 million attendees, including 3,800 musicians and performers, 750 political and business leaders, alongside 1,000 spiritual and religious figures.
Berlin (2011): 70,000 attendees from 151 countries including 6,000 artists and dignitaries including ministers and members of parliament.
New Delhi (2016): 3.75 million attendees from 155 countries including 36,603 artists and 2,500 religious and spiritual leaders from Hindu, Buddhist, Jewish, Christian, Zoroastrian, Islamic, Jain, Native American, and Tribal faiths.
MEDIA ACCESS:
World Culture Festival 2023 welcomes press outlets from Washington, D.C. and around the world to cover the weekend’s festivities. We are happy to provide approved members of the media with exclusive access. Please check back soon as applications for media will be available this spring. Reach out to WCF2023@lindarothpr.com with any questions or for pre-event interview opportunities.
#WCF2023: Official Hashtag for World Culture Festival 2023
About Art of Living Foundation
Operating in 180 countries,The Art of Living Foundation (AOLF) is a nonprofit, educational and humanitarian organization founded in 1981 by the renowned humanitarian and spiritual leader Gurudev Sri Sri Ravi Shankar. All of AOLF’s programs are inspired by Gurudev’s philosophy of creating world peace through a stress-free and violence-free society. AOLF has touched over 800 million lives through numerous educational and self-development programs and tools that facilitate the elimination of stress and foster deep and profound inner peace, happiness and well-being for individuals.
About Gurudev Sri Sri Ravi Shankar
Gurudev Sri Sri Ravi Shankar is a global humanitarian, spiritual leader, and peace envoy. He has helped millions of people worldwide find peace and resilience in the face of adversity, learning not only how to excel in their own lives, but also how to become powerful agents for social change.
Gurudev has created trauma-relief and meditation programs for at-risk youth, war veterans, prisoners and survivors of disaster. He has also created numerous educational and self-development programs and tools that facilitate the elimination of stress and foster deep and profound inner peace, happiness and well-being for individuals.
Standing for the Gandhian principles of non-violence, Gurudev has mediated and progressed negotiations for peace in conflict-stricken areas such as Sri Lanka, Iraq, Venezuela, and Colombia, where he is credited for playing a central role in ending the violent 52-year conflict between FARC and the Colombian government. He has received 39 governmental awards, including the highest civilian awards from several nations. Twenty-four universities have awarded him with honorary doctorates for his peace-keeping and humanitarian efforts.
(Newswire.com) –Sri Sri Tattva, a leading provider of premium health and wellness products, announced the in-store launch of its products in the United States. As part of a nationwide roll-out, the organic and natural Ayurvedic products are now available in stores in Dallas, Texas, including at all India Bazaar locations. The products are also now available online at SriSriTattva.com.
With a portfolio of over 350 products, all stores will carry a wide range of premium health products that include herbs, foods, drinks and cosmetics, including Sudanta, the fluoride-free toothpaste, Ojasvita, a herb-infused energy drink, and Chyawanprash. The India Bazaar West Plano location is hosting a launch party on September 28, open to the local communities.
“India has many ancient gifts to share with the world, from yoga to meditation, and now very prominently the science of Ayurveda is being recognized for its holistic healing. There is an increasing need for individuals to embrace a lifestyle that builds and strengthens immunity in order to enjoy a strong body, mind and spirit. Our products blend modern science with the ancient science and wisdom of Ayurveda to deliver pure and effective products,” says Ajay Tejasvi, President of Sri Sri Tattva. “We invite the local community to experience the goodness of all our Ayurvedic products.”
The Sri Sri Tattva Launch Party at India Bazaar West Plano will begin at 5 p.m. CST, September 28, and will offer free sample products, prizes and live musical performances. With a 360-degree approach to health, Sri Sri Tattva Ayurvedic practitioners (Vaidyas) will also be available for consultations to offer a complete health and wellness experience for the whole family.
About Sri Sri Tattva:
Sri Sri Tattva is a global health and wellness company with over 350 Ayurvedic, natural and organic products now available in 50+ countries. A portion of all proceeds goes to The Art of Living Foundation, whose wide-scale humanitarian initiatives have positively impacted the lives of over 375 million people globally.
A resolution — titled a motion to vacate — from Rep. Matt Gaetz, R-Fla., passed Tuesday with the support of eight Republicans and all the Democrats present and voting. The vote made McCarthy the first speaker in history to be removed from office, a bitter humiliation that came after less than nine months on the job.
The California Republican told his conference shortly after that he would not run for the job again. It is a stunning outcome in the House that shocked lawmakers of both parties and left them wondering what the future will bring.
Republican Rep. Patrick McHenry, now the acting speaker, declared the House in recess until both parties can decide on a path forward. There is no obvious successor to lead the House Republican majority now that McCarthy has opted not to run for the job again.
McHenry will be unable to bring legislation to the floor or take it off. He also does not have the power to issue subpoenas or sign off on any other official House business that would require the approval of the speaker.
WHAT HAPPENS NEXT?
The first order of business for McHenry would be to elect a new speaker.
As of now, it is unclear who House Republicans will nominate for the speakership. Some members left the chamber Tuesday determined to renominate McCarthy and vote for him for speaker until it passes. But now that he is out of the running, the path is clear for any Republican to jump in.
Picture : Reuters
Some members, including Gaetz, have been broaching potential consensus candidates like Majority Leader Steve Scalise or Whip Tom Emmer who they see as bringing the conference together. Other names up for discussion include Rep. Kevin Hern, chair of the Republican Study Committee, and Rep. Jim Jordan, the chair of the House Judiciary Committee and a favorite of the right flank of the party.
Once Republicans decide who to nominate for speaker, the House would have to vote as many times as it takes for a candidate to receive the majority of those present and voting for speaker. It can quickly become an arduous exercise, as it did in January when it took McCarthy an unprecedented 15 rounds to win the gavel.
ANOTHER SPEAKER?
Once a speaker candidate has won a majority of the vote, the clerk will announce the results of the election.
During a normal speaker election, which takes place at the start of each Congress, a bipartisan committee, usually consisting of members from the home state of the chosen candidate, will then escort the speaker-elect to the chair on the dais where the oath of office is administered. The oath is identical to the one new members will take once a speaker is chosen.
It is unclear if that is the same process that will be followed in this instance. It is customary for the minority leader to join the successor at the speaker’s chair, where they will pass the gavel as a nod to the potential future working relationship between one party leader and another.
The Indian American Kerala Cultural and Civic Center will honor eight Indian Americans for their outstanding achievements in their field of specialization and for their service to the society at its 31st Annual Awards Banquet to be held on October 28, 2023. Government officials and leaders from the USA and India are expected to attend this prestigious event.
“The Kerala Center has been honoring outstanding achievers since 1992. Every year we invite nominations and the committee has to make a unanimous choice for a candidate in a category to receive the award and this year is no different from previous years in terms of their achievements,” said Dr. Thomas Abraham, Kerala Center’s Trustee Board Chairman and Award Committee Member.
“Kerala Center is very happy to honor American Malayalees who excel in their professions and who work for social progress — their examples should be an inspiration for others,” said Dr. Madhu Bhaskaran, Chairman of the Board and Award Committee. This year’s honorees include: Dr. Shyam Kottilil (Baltimore, MD) – Life Time Achievement Award; Sajeeb Koya (Pickering, Ontario, Canada) – Entrepreneurship; Dr. Anna George (Long Island, NY) – Nursing; Shelby Kutty (Baltimore, MD) – Medicine; Ajay Ghosh (Trumbull, CT) – Media and Journalism; Lata Menon (Mississauga, Ontario, Canada) – Legal Services; Jayant Kamicheril (Reading, PA) – Pravasi Malayalam Literature; and Gopala Pillai (Dallas, Texas) – Community Service.
The awardees will be honored at the Kerala Center’s 31st Annual Awards Banquet on Saturday, October 28, 2023 at 5:30 pm at the Kerala Center, 1824 Fairfax St., Elmont, New York. There will be variety entertainment programs and a fabulous dinner for the evening. Dr. Madhu Bhaskaran was the Award Committee Chairman and the other members were Dr. Thomas Abraham, Daisy P. Stephen and Varkey Abraham. Kerala Center President Alex K. Esthappan said that the Center has recognized over 170 American Malayalees in the last 31 years and it is great to see that they have continued to rise further in their careers and serve the society. All are invited to join this Annual Award Banquet honoring the awardees.
Please contact the Kerala Center to reserve your seats at: 516-358-2000 or at email: kc@keralacenterny.com. Please contact: Alex Esthappan, President at 516 503 9387, Thambi Thalappillil, Executive Director at 516 5519868, Raju Thomas, General Secretary at 516 434 0669.
Dr. Shyam Kottilil – Life Time Achievement Award
Dr. Shyam Kottilil is a world renowned virologist and immunologist who has made pivotal contributions in the field of Hepatitis and HIV. He is currently the Interim Director of the Institute of Human Virology in Baltimore, MD, the first and foremost Virology Institute in the world. Dr. Kottilil has had an illustrious career with over 350 major publications, as well as awards and accolades from premier societies in Medicine, Infectious Diseases, Hepatology and the National Institutes of Health.
Sajeeb Koya – Entrepreneurship
Sajeeb Koya, a North American Malayali, is the man behind the LED Façade lighting that lights up Burj Khalifa, the tallest building in the world. Sajeeb and his team are proud to be part of this project which owns 2 Guinness World Records. His company 3S International Inc., which has its headquarters at Pickering (Ontario, Canda), has executed numerous vibrant Architectural and Media Façade LED projects all over the world. People just see lights as utilitarian, whereas Sajeeb sees multitude of colors, shades, movements, and blends the beauty of light with technology.
Sajeeb Koya hailing from Trivandrum, is an Electrical Engineer graduated in 1987 from CET Trivandrum. He has held key positions with several Multi Nationals before starting his own business in Canada in 2001. He lives with his family at Pickering, Ontario, Canada. He is very active since childhood in the fields of photography, music and acting. He is currently involved in key positions with several community & charity organizations.
Dr. Anna George – for Nursing
Dr. Anna George is the current President of the Indian Nurses Association of New York (INANY). She is a Nurse, a nurse practitioner, human rights advocate, and a social activist. She works at Molloy University as an Associate Professor, teaching the Nurse Practitioner Track and as a Nurse Practitioner at Northwell Health.
Dr. Shelby Kutty – Medicine
Dr. Shelby Kutty is a physician scientist and academic leader, serving as the Helen B. Taussig endowed professor and director of pediatric and congenital cardiology at the Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine. He also chairs the analytic intelligence program at Johns Hopkins. One of the world’s preeminent experts on multimodality cardiovascular imaging with over 400 peer-reviewed publications, Dr. Kutty is passionate about patient outcomes and evidence-based assessment of new technologies.
Ajay Ghosh – Media and Journalism
Ajay Ghosh is the Chief Editor and Co-Publisher of The Universal News Network (www/theunn.com). He serves as the Media Coordinator for the American Association of Physicians of Indian Origin (AAPI) and ITServe Alliance. Ajay was the founding President of the Indo-American Press Club and is its Secretary, Board of Directors. Prior to coming to the United States, Ajay was the Chief Editor of The Voice Delhi and contributed articles to several national publications in India. In the United States, starting his journalistic career as a reporter in 1999 for India Post, he had worked as the New York Bureau Chief of Indian Reporter and World News, and worked as the New York Bureau Chief of India Tribune, a weekly newspaper published from Chicago. Ajay served as the Executive Editor of NRI Today and was the Bureau Chief of The Indian Express, North American Editions. Ajay has a Master’s Degree in Journalism from Marquette University, Milwaukee, WI and a Social Work Degree (MSW) from Delhi University.
Lata Menon, Esq. – Legal Services
An accomplished Barrister and Solicitor and active community member, Lata Menon has become a recognized name in the legal community in Ontario, as well as the Indian states of Maharashtra, Karnataka, and Kerala, where she practiced as a lawyer before immigrating to Canada. In addition to her professional activities as a lawyer, Lata devotes her time to the community at large and has become an active supporter and champion of women’s equality and rights. She is actively engaged in several social and community programs in her capacity as a Founder, Board Member, Secretary, Legal Advisor, and many other positions. As a professional, Lata has touched the lives of several of her clients who came to her in distress when faced with family discord, domestic violence, abuse, and family disputes, which she has influenced many of her clients to pull their lives together and persevere in the face of adversity. Lata’s achievements and success makes her a true leader, mentor, formidable force, influence, and inspiration to many.
Jayant Kamicheril – Pravasi Malayalam Literature
Jayant Kamicheril is a recipient of Kerala Sahithya Academy award for 2022 for his book “Oru Kumarakom Karantay Kuruthamketta Likhithangal”. He won LANA Award in 2019 for his book: Kumarakathu Oru Pesaha. His essays and stories in English and Malayalam have been published in N. America and India. He lives in Reading, PA with wife Anita Namboodiri and they have two daughters – Aloka and Shreela.
Gopala Pillai –Community Service
Gopala Pillai has served as the President and Board Member of several organizations in CultureTexas and Detroit, and has been with the World Malayali Council from1995 as its Secretary, President and Chairman. Through these organizations he has been able to provide many services for the good of society. His life’s work reflects his unwavering commitment to both the local community in the USA and the betterment of the less privileged in Kerala, India. He has degrees in Economics, Journalism, and Computer Science, pursuing a successful career in Information Technology in the USA since 1975.
Recognizing their contributions to world peace and harmony, the United States Congress has honored two Indian spiritual leaders, Sri Sri Ravi Shankar and Acharya Lokesh Muni.
A popular Indian Yoga guru, Sri Sri Ravi Shankar, founded the Art of Living Foundation, to improve the lives of people around the world through meditation and yoga. Acharya Lokesh Muni is a Jain spiritual leader and the founder of Ahimsa Vishwa Bharti, which aims to spread the message of peace, harmony, non-violence, and brotherhood in the world.
Highlighting Sri Sri Ravi Shankar’s work in the US House of Representatives, Indian American Congressman, Raja Krishnamoorthi said, “With his message of peace and commitment to education and humanitarianism, Gurudev has lived a life dedicated to the betterment of others.”
“Through his charity work and educational efforts, Gurudev has spread his belief that if individuals find inner peace, it can lead to real-world reductions in violence and conflict,” Krishnamoorthi said.
The Congressman also acknowledged Acharya Lokesh Muni’s dedication to promoting nonviolence, religious acceptance, and universal brotherhood, a cause for which he devoted the early years of his life.
“At a young age, Acharya Dr. Lokesh Muni committed himself to the study and teaching of Jainism, Buddhism, and Vedic philosophy,” Krishnamoorthi told the House. “He has dedicated himself to the promotion of peace and tolerance among different faith groups,” he added.
The Indian American leader further elaborated on Lokesh Muni’s efforts to quell communal and religious violence through the recently established World Peace Center in Gurugram, India and his organisation’s support in hosting several interfaith dialogues around the world.
Nearly all registered Asian American voters — 97 per cent — say a candidate’s policy positions are more important than their race or ethnicity when deciding whom to vote for, says a new survey.
At the same time, a 68 per cent majority of Asian registered voters say it is extremely or very important to have a national leader who can advance the concerns of the US Asian community, according to the Pew Research Center survey conducted from July 5, 2022 to January 27, 2023.
The findings assume relevance as the 2024 US presidential election approaches with two candidates of Indian ancestry, Nikki Haley and Vivek Ramaswamy, running for the Republican nomination.
The survey — conducted among 7,006 Asian adults living in the US — said Asian Americans continue to be underrepresented among elected officials in the country compared with their share of the country’s population.
As of the beginning of the 118th Congress, 16 House members and two senators claim Asian ancestry.
Asian registered voters tend to prefer the Democratic Party — 62 per cent are Democrats or lean Democratic, while 34 per cent are Republicans leaners.
Issues Asian American voters care most about
About four in 10 registered Asian American voters, or 41 per cent, say inflation is the most important issue facing their local community — by far the most common issue cited during this extended survey period, which ended in January.
Economic inequality (16 per cent) is the second-most mentioned issue, followed by violent crime (11 per cent) and racism (9 per cent).
These concerns follow reports of violence against Asian Americans during the Covid-19 pandemic.
Japanese registered voters (28 per cent) are more likely than Chinese (15 per cent) and Indian (13 per cent) voters to view economic inequality as the biggest issue facing their community.
Picture: VOX
Among Indian registered voters, 15 per cent say climate change is the most important issue facing their community. This is higher than the share saying the same among Filipino (7 per cent), Chinese (6 per cent), Japanese (6 per cent) and Vietnamese (5 per cent) voters.
Asian American voters’ views differ by political party
The survey noted that Asian Republican voters are more likely than their Democratic counterparts to view inflation as the most important issue facing the community they live in.
Even so, it is the most cited top issue for both groups.
Asian Democratic voters are more than twice as likely as Republicans to say economic inequality is the biggest issue facing their community.
Economic inequality is the second-most cited issue among Asian Democratic voters.
Among Asian Republican voters, violent crime is the second-most cited issue.
In addition, Asian registered voters born in the US are slightly more likely than immigrants to view economic inequality as the most important issue facing their community.
However, the importance of issues varies less by nativity than by party among Asian Americans. (IANS)
Anxiety grips 69% of Indian students in Canada due to diplomatic row
77 per cent of students who participated in the survey said their parents are “paranoid” or “worried” amid the Indo-Canadian diplomatic row.
Over 100+ Indian students studying across 20+ colleges and universities were surveyed for a recent report, the findings of which say 69 per cent of these students have experienced anxiety amid the ongoing Indo-Canadian diplomatic row.
The participating colleges included York University, Seneca College, Ryerson University, Centennial College, George Brown College, and Carleton University, among others. The survey was conducted by LooneyTooney, a platform assisting newcomers and potential immigrants in Canada to provide a data point to stakeholders like federal/provincial governments, colleges/universities, and locals to be able to take action to reassure the student community, as per a news release.
The survey found that 69 per cent of students experienced anxiety amid the ongoing tensions between the two countries, female students more than males. The anxiety levels were higher among students who have not spent much time in Canada than those who have been in the country longer.
The findings say 32 per cent of students are more worried about their physical safety than before while 77 per cent of students reported their parents are “paranoid” or “worried”. However, the survey also found that overall, students seem to be hoping that the ongoing situation is a temporary setback. 81 per cent of Indian students in Canada have their long-term plans of staying in Canada unchanged while only 9 per cent are considering leaving the country.
LooneyTooney founder Ashish Bhatia said, “Indian students in Canada are a vital bridge for people-to-people contact between the two countries. The students are worried about the short-term implications of the spat on their career and personal plans. Their well-being should be a paramount concern for various stakeholders who should take actions to mitigate the negative impact of current tensions.”
Indian students from the University of Toronto (UofT) participated in the survey as well. Recently, stated that it is fully committed to making the Indian community on its campus feel safe.
“U of T is proud to be home to more than 2,400 international students from India who enrich our classrooms and campus life, and many more students, faculty, staff, librarians, and alumni with ties to that country. We want to assure all impacted members of our community – and in particular international students – that you are welcome here and we are deeply committed to supporting your wellbeing,” read a part of the statement from Joseph Wong, vice-president, International.
(RNS) For Hindu Heritage Month this year, Hindus want to highlight their faith for external audiences, but also grow broader awareness amongst Hindus themselves.
When Hindu Heritage Month was held for the first time two years ago, its organizers hoped to educate their fellow Americans about the contributions Hindus have made in the world. Most could name yoga as a Hindu influence; some might bring up the holistic health practices of ayurveda. But since ancient times, Hindus have been pioneers in astronomy, architecture, mathematics and numerous other fields.
“We have so much to be proud about, and we’ve been very modest in keeping it to ourselves,” said Ramya Ramakrishnan, community outreach director for the Hindu American Foundation, one of the sponsors of the month’s activities. “This is the way to tell people: ‘Look at what our faith has accomplished.’”
Now, the organizers of this third Hindu Heritage Month hope their movement will educate not only the wider public, but Hindu Americans themselves, about their faith’s growing profile in the United States.
“Thirty-five years ago, we didn’t have these organizations and institutions,” said author Rajiv Malhotra at the kickoff event for this year’s program, held in Monroe Township, New Jersey. The leaders of those that existed “were scared,” he said, “and stayed within the temples, but not out there the way we are today.”
Vijay Satnarine, the director of education strategy for the Hindu American Foundation, said that there is work to be done within the Hindu community. Even today, many Hindus’ knowledge of their faith remains at a “high-school level,” he said, adding that Hindus in positions of power do not always bring the fullness of their culture or heritage to their professions.
For decades, some Hindu Americans have blamed the U.S. education system, which has given short shrift to Hinduism’s legacy in world thought. At the same time, critics say, American educators restrict their discussions of Hinduism and Hindu culture to polytheism, caste hierarchy and arranged marriages, misleading not only outsiders but practitioners themselves.
“This very constricted education has left us unable to talk about our own diversity,” said Satnarine.
But the emergence of India, the birthplace of Hinduism, as a nascent superpower has begun to change how the world thinks about the country and the faith. The inaugural event included the reading of a written statement from Prime Minister Narendra Modi of India. “The rise of Indians and Indian diaspora in diverse fields, from space to sports, trade to technology, has created an immense interest in India, its people and its culture,” it said.
The month’s organizers want people to know that Hindus and Indians are not synonymous. Instead, the month is meant to highlight the global Hindu community, which extends from Indonesia to Kenya to the Caribbean and is rooted in a shared value of universal oneness.
The Hindu American Foundation has been marking Hindu American Awareness Appreciation Month since 2013 to recognize the specific contributions of the Hindu American diaspora, such as temples built on American land or the first Hindu members of Congress.
But the increasing attention to Hinduism in the past few years prompted a small group of Hindus to found the current initiative two years ago, aiming to rewrite a narrative centered on the caste system, Hindu nationalism and idol worship.
“We need to bring our cultural values, our mantras, or beautiful bindis and tilaks and colors to the world and be known for all of the good things that Hinduism has to offer,” said Richa Gautam, a member of the HHM core committee.
Despite its beginnings in the depths of the pandemic, the effort has taken off. Last year, about 100 proclamations in cities and school boards across the nation were issued. Virginia became the first and only state to sign a bill making October Hindu Heritage Month in perpetuity. And in 2023, the states of Georgia, Wisconsin, Ohio, Pennsylvania and New Jersey proclaimed the month Hindu Heritage Month.
This year, the organizers are emphasizing Hindus’ involvement in American life, hoping to dispel the view of Hinduism as a mystical, inward-looking faith.
“Hindu Americans have been very good citizens, enriching the tapestry through our cultural heritage and our universal Sanatan values,” said Gautam. “If we build awareness, there won’t be that exotic element that exists for us.”
Part of that task is to counter academics, even those in departments of religious studies, who have approached the faith from a Western, often Protestant Christian, paradigm of what “religion” means, advocates say.
Educational efforts like the Hindu American Foundation’s “Dharma Ambassadors” training program, which allows for Hindus to promote a streamlined narrative of the faith, or the accredited Hindu University of America, which offers courses on everything from Hindu feminism to advanced Sanskrit, strive to combat just that.
“A lot of our students, even though they were born and brought up as Hindus, they still have a very basic, partial, even sometimes erroneous knowledge about Hindu traditions,” said Aravind Swami, the vice president of operations for HUA. “When our students have discussions with anyone in the Hindu community, they’re able to speak with a greater sense of confidence and purpose.”
Jai Bansal, vice president of education for the World Hindu Council of America and one of the main organizers of Hindu Heritage Month, said the most valuable aspect of the initiative is to make all Americans recognize the Hindu values, from nonviolence to karma, as part of their history and their everyday lives. That, he said, is a job for all Hindus.
“One of the fundamental beliefs in our dharma is that ignorance is the root cause of all problems,” said Bansal. “It’s up to community leaders to try and distill our dharma in a form that modern society can easily digest.”
Bansal believes Hindu Heritage Month is a way to rally the global Hindu community, diverse as it is, to that task.
“If we continue with it, just think of someday 1 billion Hindus around the world celebrating their common heritage together — what kind of a message that will send to the world at large,” he said. “I’m just hoping for that day, whether I see it myself, or the next generation sees it.”
IAPC is celebrating its Tenth Anniversary and the Ninth International Media Conference at Hilton Stamford Convention Center, Connecticut during Oct 7-9th, 2023.
The prestigious Lifetime Achievement Award Winners will be recognized during the gala closing event commencing at 6:00 P M on Sunday 8th, October 2023.
VINAY MAHAJAN (Entrepreneurial Excellence)
Vinay Mahajan, the current national President of ITServeAlliance Inc., an association of 2100 + SME US IT companies. Has been chosen to receive the Lifetime Achievement Award by the Indo-American Press Club.
An Engineering Graduate and MBA from premier institutes, Mahajan is a serial entrepreneur with over 40 years of industry experience in leadership, marketing, finance, and engineering, creating, and building multiple entities. Entrepreneurial expertise through 100+ communication/IVR/Call center software projects across India and Healthcare Practice Management Software in the United States.
Dr. H.R.SHAH (Media & Arts)
Padma Shri Dr. H.R. Shah, Chairman & CEO of TV Asia Group, the first Non- Resident Indian to operate and telecast a 24/7 TV Channel, TV ASIA, coast-to-coast throughout North America since 1993,
Dr. Shah immigrated to the United States on March 21, 1970. A successful businessperson and media leader, Dr. Shah has worked relentlessly and tirelessly, contributing generously of his time, energy, and resources as a pillar for the Indian American community. He has been a major philanthropic supporter and has strongly supported many worthy causes across the US and India.
For his exemplary work in the media and arts, the Indian Government bestowed him with the Padma Shri in 2017. He is also the recipient of the prestigious Ellis Island Medal of Honor.
IAPC proudly bestows Dr. H R Shah with the prestigious Lifetime Achievement Award.
MEERA GANDHI (Philanthropist)
Meera Gandhi has lived many roles in her life as a philanthropist, a mother, a businesswoman, a television show host, an author, and a spiritual yogi who believes that we are very much a part of the universal spirit. We all must live in the flow of the ether that guides and propels us through our life journey!
She is a recipient of the Ellis Island Medal of Honor (2015), Marc Anthony Maestro Cares Humanitarian Award (2016), Children Hope Humanitarian Award (2013) and many more. Meera Gandhi established The Giving Back Foundation in 2010. By supporting education, mental health, and wellness, tackling malnutrition and illness, and addressing the causes of poverty, we can empower and uplift people to be the agents of change in this process.
Dr. SAMPAT SHIVANGI (Philanthropist)
Dr. Sampat Shivangi, a physician, an influential Indian American community leader, and a veteran leader of the American Association of Physicians of Indian Origin (AAPI), has been chosen to receive the prestigious Lifetime Achievement Award by the Indo-American Press Club.
Dr. Sampat Shivangi was awarded the highest civilian honor, the Pravasi Bharatiya Diwas Sanman Award, in 2016 in Bengaluru by the Hon. President of India, Shri Pranab Mukherjee. He was awarded the prestigious Ellis Island Medal of Honor in New York 2008.
Dr. Shivangi, for Community Service, Medicine, and philanthropy, IAPC herewith proudly presents its prestigious Lifetime Achievement Award.
SHAJAN SKARIAH (Excellence in Journalism)
Shajan Skariah, promoter and editor of the online portal “Marunadan Malayali” has been nominated for the Excellence in Media Award by the Indo-American Press Club (IAPC).
His courageous actions of being the mouthpiece of the public have resulted in the confiscation of his newspaper, his arrest, and his exile from the country. As part of the media world at IAPC, we consider that it is our legal and moral duty to support Shajan Skariah and his news media platforms.
Dr. RENU ABRAHAM VARUGHESE (Excellence in Elder Care)
Dr. Renu Abraham Varughese is an Associate Professor at the School of Health and Natural Sciences, Mercy University, NY. She is the founder and director of the Travancore Foundation Education and Research Center on Aging (TFERCA). She is the Recipient of the Founders Excellence Award (2022)- Association for Senior Living India (ASLI) for exemplary contributions to the senior care sector in the country.
And for her many accomplishments in Exemplary service, Visionary leadership, dedication, commitment, and innovation to promote quality care for elders and the eldercare industry in India, IAPC is proudly recognizing Dr. Renu Abraham Varughese with IAPC SATHSEVANA AWARD 2023.
IAPC was formed to unite the media groups and the Indian diaspora media fraternity across North America under one umbrella to work together, support one another, and provide a unified voice to the mainstream media world and the larger community. Every year IAPC hosts similar media conferences bringing together renowned journalists and media professionals from different countries, and hosts workshops and seminars.
The U.S. Congress passed a stopgap funding bill late on Saturday, September 30, 2023 with overwhelming Democratic support after Republican House Speaker Kevin McCarthy backed down from an earlier demand by his party’s hardliners for a partisan bill.
House Speaker Kevin McCarthy announced the stopgap proposal Saturday morning, a move that came after weeks of infighting among House Republicans and a failed effort to pass a GOP stopgap bill in the chamber. The bill passed the House with an overwhelmingly bipartisan vote, and it then was sent to the Senate. The final vote was 88 to 9. The House voted 335-91 to fund the government through Nov. 17, with more Democrats than Republicans supporting it.
The bill will keep the government open through November 17 and includes natural disaster aid but not additional funding for Ukraine or border security. The Bill will help avoid the federal government’s fourth partial shutdown in a decade, sending the bill to President Joe Biden, who signed it into law before the 12:01 a.m on Octpber 1st, 2023.
McCarthy abandoned party hardliners’ insistence that any bill pass the House with only Republican votes, a change that could cause one of his far-right members to try to oust him from his leadership role.
That move marked a profound shift from earlier in the week, when a shutdown looked all but inevitable. A shutdown would mean that most of the government’s 4 million employees would not get paid – whether they were working or not – and also would shutter a range of federal services, from National Parks to financial regulators.
The decision by McCarthy to put a bill on the floor that would win support from Democrats could put his speakership at risk as hardline conservatives continue to threaten a vote to oust him from the top House leadership post.
McCarthy was defiant after the vote, daring his detractors to try to push him out as he argued he did what was needed to govern effectively.
“If somebody wants to make a motion against me, bring it,” McCarthy told CNN’s Manu Raju at a news conference. “There has to be an adult in the room. I am going to govern with what’s best for this country.”
Federal agencies had already drawn up detailed plans that spell out what services would continue, such as airport screening and border patrols, and what must shut down, including scientific research and nutrition aid to 7 million poor mothers.
“The American people can breathe a sigh of relief: there will be no government shutdown tonight,” Democratic Senate Majority Leader Chuck Schumer said after the vote. “Democrats have said from the start that the only solution for avoiding a shutdown is bipartisanship, and we are glad Speaker McCarthy has finally heeded our message.”
DEMOCRATS CALL IT A WIN
Some 209 Democrats supported the bill, far more than the 126 Republicans who did so, and Democrats described the result as a win.
“Extreme MAGA Republicans have lost, the American people have won,” top House Democrat Hakeem Jeffries told reporters ahead of the vote, referring to the “Make America Great Again” slogan used by former President Donald Trump and many hardline Republicans.
Democratic Representative Don Beyer said: “I am relieved that Speaker McCarthy folded and finally allowed a bipartisan vote at the 11th hour on legislation to stop Republicans’ rush to a disastrous shutdown.”
McCarthy’s shift won the support of top Senate Republican Mitch McConnell, who had backed a similar measure that was moving through the Senate with broad bipartisan support, even though the House version dropped aid for Ukraine.
Democratic Senator Michael Bennett held the bill up for several hours trying to negotiate a deal for further Ukraine aid.
“While I would have preferred to pass a bill now with additional assistance for Ukraine, which has bipartisan support in both the House and Senate, it is easier to help Ukraine with the government open than if it were closed,” Democratic Senator Chris Van Hollen said in a statement.
McCarthy dismissed concerns that hardline Republicans could try to oust him as leader.
“I want to be the adult in the room, go ahead and try,” McCarthy told reporters. “And you know what? If I have to risk my job for standing up for the American public, I will do that.”
He said that House Republicans would push ahead with plans to pass more funding bills that would cut spending and include other conservative priorities, such as tighter border controls.
CREDIT CONCERNS
The standoff comes just months after Congress brought the federal government to the brink of defaulting on its $31.4 trillion debt. The drama has raised worries on Wall Street, where the Moody’s ratings agency has warned it could damage U.S. creditworthiness.
Congress typically passes stopgap spending bills to buy more time to negotiate the detailed legislation that sets funding for federal programs.
This year, a group of Republicans has blocked action in the House as they have pressed to tighten immigration and cut spending below levels agreed to in the debt-ceiling standoff in the spring.
The McCarthy-Biden deal that avoided default set a limit of $1.59 trillion in discretionary spending in fiscal 2024. House Republicans are demanding a further $120 billion in cuts.
The funding fight focuses on a relatively small slice of the $6.4 trillion U.S. budget for this fiscal year. Lawmakers are not considering cuts to popular benefit programs such as Social Security and Medicare.
“We should never have been in this position in the first place. Just a few months ago, Speaker McCarthy and I reached a budget agreement to avoid precisely this type of manufactured crisis,” Biden said in a statement after the vote. “House Republicans tried to walk away from that deal by demanding drastic cuts that would have been devastating for millions of Americans. They failed.” (Reuters)
The United States Senate has mourned the loss of one of its most prominent figures, as Senator Dianne Feinstein (D-Calif.) passed away at her residence in Washington, D.C. at the age of 90. Her death marks the conclusion of a lengthy and illustrious political career that played a crucial role in paving the way for women to attain higher echelons of political authority in the United States.
Senator Feinstein passed away on Thursday night, September 28, 2023 at the age of 90, shortly after casting her final vote, a moment that senators commemorated with heartfelt speeches. Emotions ran high as several senators, standing just a few feet from Feinstein’s Senate desk, which was draped in black and adorned with a crystal vase filled with white flowers, spoke about their esteemed colleague.
Senate Majority Leader Charles Schumer (D-N.Y.) paid tribute to her, saying, “She was smart, she was strong, she was brave, she was compassionate,” his voice occasionally quivering with emotion. He emphasized her “integrity” as the standout quality, describing it as a “diamond” that shone brightly not only in the Senate but also across the nation.
Throughout her career, Senator Feinstein shattered glass ceilings. She was the first woman to represent California in the Senate, the first woman to chair the Senate Judiciary, Rules, and Intelligence Committees, and the first woman to serve as mayor of San Francisco. She was part of the historic 1992 class of women elected to the Senate, often referred to as the “Year of the Woman,” alongside Senators Patty Murray (D-Wash.), Barbara Boxer (D-Calif.), and Carol Moseley-Braun (D-Ill.), which increased the number of women in the Senate from two to six. This number later surged to 25 by the start of the 118th Congress, with Feinstein cited as a significant influence.
Picture: The Hill
Senator Tammy Baldwin (D-Wis.) praised Feinstein as a role model and highlighted her ability to foster bipartisan relationships, especially among female senators, both on and off Capitol Hill.
Feinstein also achieved the distinction of being the longest-serving woman in Senate history at the time of her passing, being likened to titanic figures of the Senate such as Senators Ted Kennedy (D-Mass.) and John McCain (R-Ariz.).
One of her most notable legislative accomplishments was the passage of the 1994 Federal Assault Weapons Ban, signed into law by then-President Bill Clinton. This legislation prohibited the sale and manufacture of assault-style weapons for a decade, despite fierce opposition from the National Rifle Association (NRA). Schumer recalled the NRA’s relentless opposition but praised Feinstein for her unwavering stance against them.
While the ban expired in 2004, a 2020 academic study suggested that the number of mass shootings increased after its lapse. However, the effectiveness of the assault weapons ban remains a subject of contentious debate, and subsequent attempts to pass similar legislation failed, even in the wake of high-profile shootings involving AR-15-style weapons.
Senator Feinstein also played a pivotal role in opposing the U.S. government’s use of torture during the global war on terror that followed the September 11, 2001, attacks. In 2014, she released the Intelligence Committee’s report, which documented the use of “enhanced interrogation techniques” against detainees, including waterboarding and sleep deprivation. This report raised doubts about the effectiveness of such tactics in gathering intelligence.
Senator Sheldon Whitehouse (D-R.I.) recounted the intense struggle to complete the report, as it faced opposition from the Central Intelligence Agency. Feinstein’s stand against torture techniques earned her praise, with Senator Elizabeth Warren (D-Mass.) commending her for her courage.
Feinstein wasn’t afraid to deviate from her party’s leaders on occasion. In 2009, she broke with party leaders who hesitated to seat Roland Burris (D-Ill.) as Senator Barack Obama’s replacement due to ethical concerns surrounding then-Illinois Governor Rod Blagojevich’s handling of the appointment. Feinstein argued that refusing to seat Burris would undermine gubernatorial power, a position that may have played a role in preserving California Governor Gavin Newsom’s authority to appoint her successor.
Throughout her career, Feinstein’s tenacity in pursuing policy goals and her ability to withstand political challenges earned her the nickname “Ali and Frazier” alongside Senator Barbara Boxer. Her personal touch and ability to foster camaraderie were also celebrated, with colleagues recalling warm interactions and gestures of kindness, such as ordering a purse for a fellow senator.
Senator Feinstein’s passing marks the end of an era in the Senate, leaving behind a legacy of trailblazing accomplishments and a commitment to integrity and principled leadership that will be remembered for generations to come.
Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, Mark Milley, retired on Friday with a passionate address that indirectly criticized former President Trump, asserting that the U.S. military’s allegiance isn’t pledged to a “wannabe dictator.”
In the previous week, Trump had accused Milley of “treason” for allegedly conducting back-channel reassurances with his Chinese counterpart towards the end of his tenure, even suggesting the Army general should face execution.
Milley delivered his remarks at a ceremony in Virginia, stating, “We are unique among the world’s militaries. We don’t take an oath to a country. We don’t take an oath to a tribe. We don’t take an oath to a religion. We don’t take an oath to a king, or a queen, or to a tyrant or a dictator.”
He continued, “And we don’t take an oath to a wannabe dictator. We don’t take an oath to an individual. We take an oath to the Constitution, and we take an oath to the idea that is America — and we’re willing to die to protect it.”
Picture: VOA
Appointed by Trump in 2018, Milley frequently found himself at odds with the former president, notably in the incident involving St. John’s Church in Washington, D.C., during the racial injustice protests ignited by George Floyd’s murder in June 2020.
Milley briefly appeared alongside Trump, wearing combat fatigues, as Trump walked to St. John’s for a photo opportunity. Later, the four-star general publicly apologized for creating the perception that the military was involved in domestic politics, expressing regret for his presence — a move that didn’t sit well with Trump.
During that same summer, Milley supported the initiative to rename Army bases bearing the names of Confederate generals, a position that clashed with Trump’s views.
In the run-up to the 2020 presidential election, Milley sought to ensure a peaceful transition of power when he assured his Chinese counterpart that the American government had no intentions of initiating hostilities, as documented in the book “Peril” by Bob Woodward and Robert Costa.
Following the election, with concerns of a potential coup by Trump, Milley instructed his subordinates not to follow orders from anyone unless he was involved, as reported in “Peril.”
While Trump was not directly mentioned during Friday’s ceremony at Joint Base-Myer Henderson Hall, the speakers lavished praise on Milley for his over four decades of service to the country in the military.
President Biden commended Milley’s invaluable partnership, describing him as “unwavering in the face of danger.” Biden recounted an incident where Milley had run across a bridge laden with mines to prevent two battle tanks from crossing with wounded troops.
Defense Secretary Lloyd Austin referred to Milley as both a scholar and a warrior, emphasizing his dedication to leading the joint military forces.
The ceremony also featured the swearing-in of the incoming Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, Gen. Charles Q. Brown Jr., formerly the Air Force chief of staff.
After a lengthy period of planning and construction spanning 12 years, the grandest Hindu temple outside of India is poised to open its doors to the public in October. The BAPS Akshardham, located in Robbinsville, New Jersey, will be the third of its kind, following the temples in Gujarat and New Delhi, with the latter being recognized as the largest Hindu temple complex globally.
This architectural marvel, known as Akshardham, which translates to the “abode of the Divine,” is a testament to the harmonious blend of ancient scriptural principles and the intricacies of New Jersey zoning regulations. Sprawling across a vast 183-acre expanse, the New Jersey Akshardham includes a Maha Mandir (main temple), a traditional temple, a welcome center, a museum, and an event space.
Chaitali Inamdar, a devoted member of the Hindu community, expressed the significance of this achievement: “Having this Akshardham here on American soil is not just the triumph of a community or the triumph of the diaspora — it is the triumph of the nation.”
The construction of the New Jersey Akshardham has garnered significant attention from the Hindu American community over the past decade. However, it has also been marred by legal matters, specifically a lawsuit alleging forced labor within the BAPS organization, which arose in 2021. Although the lawsuit is currently on hold, it has raised important questions about distinguishing between unpaid work and selfless service in the name of the Divine.
Members of the BAPS community are renowned for their commitment to selfless service, known as “seva,” which they consider an act of devotion to God. Through their seva, BAPS has established an impressive network of 100 temples across the United States. Furthermore, the sampradaya, or Hindu sect, is poised to celebrate its 50th anniversary in North America next year.
Bochasanwasi Shri Akshar Purushottam Swaminarayan Sanstha, commonly referred to as BAPS, is a Hindu tradition that follows the teachings of Bhagwan Swaminarayan. According to their beliefs, Bhagwan Swaminarayan is present on Earth through six spiritual leaders, with Mahant Swami Maharaj currently holding this role.
Devotees explain that Pramukh Swami Maharaj, the fifth spiritual successor, envisioned the creation of a magnificent spiritual campus in the United States when he assumed leadership of BAPS in 1971. Inamdar, a chemical engineer and BAPS member, stated, “Pramukh Swami Maharaj’s ultimate singular vision [was] that, no matter which belief, which background you come from, this place is here to enrich everybody and allow everybody to feel peace and inspiration. The Akshardham is truly allowing the world to be one family.”
Visitors to the New Jersey Akshardham will enter through the Nilkanth Plaza, named after Swaminarayan’s teenage form, Nilkanth Varni, who is said to have traveled across India to revive the principles of Sanātana Dharma, or Hinduism. Dominating the entrance is a towering 49-foot statue of Nilkanth Varni, representing his 49 years on Earth.
Picture :WP
The Welcome Center, which connects to the vegetarian Shayona Cafe, immerses visitors in Indian celebrations and artistry. Thousands of “diyas” (lights) adorn the walls, creating a vibrant atmosphere. The scent of incense and the resonance of Sanskrit chants fill the air around the Brahm Kund pond, paying homage to the sacred waters of India. Remarkably, waters from rivers spanning all 50 states have been brought to New Jersey by dedicated volunteers.
Over 12,500 volunteers from diverse cultural backgrounds and faiths came together from across North America and the world to construct the Maha Mandir. This remarkable structure was meticulously crafted from white sandstone, limestone, marble, and granite by temple artisans in India. Adorning the four characteristic domes of the Mandir are nine shikharas or spires, each themed to represent different aspects of Hindu scriptures, including Vedic astrology.
Within the Mandir entrance, statues of dancers, musicians, and musical instruments serve as reminders of the importance of song and dance in Hindu traditions. Notably, this will be the first structure to showcase all 108 poses of the ancient Hindu dance form Bharatanatyam.
Some volunteers dedicated up to two weeks to this monumental project, while others, like 27-year-old Arjun Pandya, felt compelled to stay for two years. Pandya temporarily paused his career in corporate finance at Amazon to undertake seva in Robbinsville. Reflecting on his experience, Pandya said, “To have an opportunity to build something not only for my family and my community, but for the world, and to make something greater than myself, was very attractive.” He acknowledged that the conclusion of this journey is bittersweet, but the invaluable lessons and friendships he’s gained will remain with him forever.
Pandya eloquently summarized his experience: “I thought I’d be giving time, but I’m now realizing how much I’ve gained, not only in the friendships that I’ve built, but the values that are foundational to me that I’ll take with me forever.”
Bhagwan Swaminarayan’s teachings, according to devotees, emphasize values such as humility, compassion, and harmony. Akshardham will serve as not only a residence for the Swamis of the BAPS faith but also a sanctuary for the deities venerated across the broader Hindu spectrum.
Yagnesh Patel, a devotee originally from Kenya, where the BAPS community grew due to Indian migration patterns during British colonial rule, expressed his thoughts. “Any practicing Hindu, anyone who wants to know more about Hinduism, or even just a friend in my community, I have a place to bring them,” he stated. Patel, who was present with his children 12 years ago when BAPS initiated construction in Robbinsville, participated in the Bhumi Pujan ceremony, a tradition involving offering prayers to Mother Earth and God before commencing construction work. His son and daughter, now in their early twenties, have dedicated their time to Akshardham’s construction. “Both my kids are ideal American citizens, born in America, but they can raise their heads and say, ‘I am an American Hindu, and I am so proud that I was part of a place that many can visit as they come to this country,'” Patel proudly declared. “That has been my proudest moment.”
The construction of Akshardham was a challenging 12-year journey for the thousands of volunteers involved, some of whom arrived in the country on R-1 religious visas. They lived and worked on the mandir campus tirelessly. “It’s nonstop seva,” one worker remarked to another in mid-September, just weeks before the opening.
In 2017 and 2022, two devotees lost their lives while working on the construction, reasons the organization attributed to factors unrelated to safety conditions. As recently as March 2023, the Robbinsville Township police department responded to an offsite BAPS housing unit due to elevated levels of carbon monoxide.
In a headline-making event in May 2021, several volunteers originally from India initiated a class-action lawsuit against BAPS, citing wage theft, unsafe working conditions, and mistreatment of workers. However, the laborers withdrew the lawsuit earlier this year.
“The parties agreed to put the lawsuit on hold pending an investigation with which BAPS continues to cooperate fully,” said Ronak Patel, spokesperson for BAPS Temple Organization. “When the facts emerge, BAPS believes that they will reflect BAPS’ principles of kindness, equity, and respect for all human beings. BAPS continues to pray for all involved.”
Regarding the allegations of unpaid labor, BAPS stressed that worship through seva (selfless service) is at the core of the BAPS community, and the workers came to the U.S. as volunteers, not as employees.
“Because BAPS traditions emphasize serving those who serve, we took care of the artisans’ needs in the U.S., including travel, lodging, food, medical care, and internet and pre-paid phone cards so they could stay in touch with their families in India,” Patel added. “BAPS India also supported the artisans’ families in India, so they did not suffer financial hardship as a result of the artisans’ seva in the U.S.”
For many within the BAPS community, the opening in October represents an opportunity to showcase what can happen when devotees from around the world unite through the common thread of devotion.
“The ability to come together in volunteership, in selfless service, it created a sense of comfort and commonality,” expressed Ashini Parikh, a devotee from Atlanta. She reflected on the exponential increase in American awareness of Hinduism since her childhood as a first-generation kid. Playing a role in Hindu American history, for her, is an incredibly humbling experience.
“I am so proud that we as a community can come together from all walks of life, and we’ve all been able to be a part of this one thing that is going to have ripple effects for so many generations to come,” she remarked. “We all want to leave the planet a better place, and my contributions towards Akshardham allows me to leave the planet a better place well beyond my time.”